A dictionary of the art of printing (part 5 of 6)

A dictionary of the art of printing (part 5 of 6)

Even in founts that are next in size to each other; for instance,--Bourgeois and Long Primer, Long Primer and Small Pica, Small Pica and Pica, and Pica and English, head lines, &c., are not unfrequently distributed into wrong cases, where the nick is the same; and always occasion loss of time in correcting the mistakes, and sometimes pass undiscovered.

I would recommend, in furnishing a new office with types, that every fount, commencing with the smallest, should have a different nick from that of the next size: thus Brevier, supposing it to be the smallest, might have three wide nicks, Bourgeois two closer ones, and Long Primer one; Small Pica the same as Brevier, Pica as Bourgeois, English as Long Primer; and here it might stop, for there is difference enough in the sizes above English for the eye to distinguish them readily, without varying the nick.

By going as far as three nicks, which is now generally done, a sufficient variety may be obtained to distinguish one fount from another without hesitation; but I would strongly advise that the nicks should be deep, as it allows the compositor to see quickly how the letters lie in the box, and enables him to pick them up with greater facility, particularly by candlelight.

A single nick may be--low on the shank, in the middle, or nearer the top; two nicks may be close together--at the bottom, in the middle, or at the top, or they may be wide apart; three nicks may be--two at bottom and one at top, two at top and one at bottom, or the three close together, at the bottom, the middle, or the top, or wide apart. Where there are a great number of founts, it would add to the distinguishing mark, if consisting of more than one nick, that one of them should be cast shallow: but where there is only one nick it ought always to be cast deep.

NISKHI. See PERSIAN.

NONPAREIL.

The name of a type, one size larger than Pearl and one smaller than Minion. Moxon spelt the name Nomparel, and the French to this day spell it Nompareille.

NORTHERN LANGUAGES.

For the allowance of the duty on paper used in the printing of books in the Northern languages within the universities of Oxford and Cambridge, the universities of Scotland, and the university of Trinity College, Dublin, see PAPER.

A great deal of information respecting the Northern languages will be found in Recherches sur les Langues Tartares, par M. Abel Remusat.

NORTON, WILLIAM. See DONATIONS.

NOTATION, CHEMICAL. See FORMULÆ.

NOTES.

Quotations down the side of a page are called Notes.--M. At the present day we term these Marginal Notes; and usually mean, when we speak of notes, those at the bottom of a page, although they are sometimes termed Bottom Notes, or Foot Notes, which see.

NOTICE for entering printing press, types, &c., with Clerk of the Peace, see CERTIFICATE.

NUMBER LAID ON. See LAY ON.--M.

NUMERALS.

The names of numerals are very different, not only in several parts of Asia, but in both North and South America.

“Small stones were used amongst uncivilized nations: hence the words calculate and calculation appear to have been derived from calculus, the Latin for a pebble-stone. Alphabetic letters had also a certain numerical value assigned them, and several Greek characters were employed to express particular numbers.

“The combination of Greek numerical characters was not well known to the Latins before the thirteenth century, although Greek numerical characters were frequently used in France and Germany, in episcopal letters, and continued to the eleventh century. But of all the Greek ciphers the Episema ϐαῦ was most in use with the Latins: it gradually assumed the form of G with a tail, for so it appears in a Latin inscription of the year 296. It is found to have been used in the fifth century in Latin MSS. It was reckoned for 6, and this value has been evinced by such a number of monumental proofs, that there is no room to give it any other. Some of the learned, with even Mabillon, have been mistaken in estimating it as 5, but in a posthumous work he acknowledges his error.

“Those authors were led into this error by the medals of the Emperor Justinian having the episema for 5; but it is a certain fact that the coiners had been mistaken and confounded it with the tailed U, for the episema was still in use in the fourth century, and among the Latins was estimated as six, but under a form somewhat different. Whenever it appears in other monuments of the western nations of Europe of that very century, and the following, it is rarely used to express any number except 5.

“The Etruscans also used their letters for indicating numbers by writing them from right to left, and the ancient Danes copied the example in the application of their letters.

“The Romans, when they borrowed arts and sciences from the Greeks, learned also their method of using alphabetical numeration. This custom however was not very ancient among them. Before writing was yet current with them they made use of nails for reckoning years, and the method of driving those nails became in process of time a ceremony of their religion. The first eight Roman numerals were composed of the I and the V. The Roman ten was composed of the V proper, and the V inverted (Ʌ), which characters served to reckon as far as forty, but when writing became more general, I, V, X, L, C, D, and M, were the only characters appropriated to the indication of numbers. The above seven letters, in their most extensive combination, produce six hundred and sixty-six thousand ranged thus, DCLXVIM. Some however pretend that the Romans were strangers to any higher number than 100,000. The want of ciphers obliged them to double, treble, and multiply their numerical characters four-fold; according as they had occasion to make them express units, tens, hundreds, &c. &c. For the sake of brevity they had recourse to another expedient; by drawing a small line over any of their numeral characters they made them stand for as many thousands as they contained units. Thus a small line over Ī made it 1000, and over X̄ expressed 10,000, &c.

“When the Romans wrote several units following, the first and last were longer than the rest IIIIII: thus vir after those six units, signified sex-vir. D stood for 500, and the perpendicular line of this letter was sometimes separated from the body thus (IƆ,) without lessening its value. M, whether capital or uncial, expressed 1000. In the uncial form it sometimes assumed that of one of those figures, CIƆ Ɔ, CD, ∞, ო. The cumbent X was also used to signify a similar number.

“As often as a figure of less value appears before a higher number, it denotes that so much must be deducted from the greater number: thus, I before V makes but four, I before X gives only nine, X preceding C produces only 90, and even two XX before C reckons for no more than 80. Such was the general practice with the ancient Romans with respect to their numerical letters, which is still continued in recording accounts in our Exchequer.

“In ancient MSS. 4 is written IIII and not IV, 9 thus VIIII, and not IX, &c. Instead of V five units IIIII were sometimes used in the eighth century. Half was expressed by an S at the end of the figures, CIIS was put 102 and a half. This S sometimes appeared in the form of our 5.

“In some old MSS. those numerical figures LXL are used to express 90. The Roman numeral letters were generally used both in England, France, Italy, and Germany, from the earliest times to the middle of the fifteenth century.

“The ancient people of Spain made use of the same Roman ciphers as we do. The X with the top of the right hand stroke in form of a semi-circle reckoned for 40; it merits the more particular notice as it has misled many of the learned. The Roman ciphers however were continued in use with the Spaniards until the fifteenth century. The Germans used the Roman ciphers for a long time, nearly in the same manner as the French.”

“The points after the Roman ciphers were exceedingly various, and never rightly fixed. It is not known when the ancient custom was first introduced of placing an O at top immediately after the Roman characters, as A^o M^o L^o VI^o &c.”--Astle.

Numeral Letters.

Roman. Arabic. Unus, a, um, I. 1. Duo, æ, o, II. 2. Tres, ia, III. 3. Quatuor, IV. 4. Quinque, V. 5. Sex, VI. 6. Septem, VII. 7. Octo, VIII. 8. Novem, IX. 9. Decem, X. 10. Undecim, XI. 11. Duodecim, XII. 12. Tredecim, XIII. 13. Quatuordecim, XIV. 14. Quindecim, XV. 15. Se- sex- decim, XVI. 16. Septemdecim, XVII. 17. Octodecim, XVIII. or XIIX. 18. Novemdecim, } Undeviginti,} XIX. 19. Viginti, XX. 20. Triginta, XXX. 30. Quadraginta, XL. 40. Quinquaginta, L. 50. Sexaginta, LX. 60. Septuaginta, LXX. 70. Octoginta, LXXX. 80. Nonaginta, XC. 90. Centum, C. 100. Ducenti, æ, a, CC. 200. Trecenti, æ, a, CCC. 300. Quadringenti, æ, a, CCCC. 400. Quingenti, æ, a, IƆ. or D. 500. Sexcenti, æ, a, DC. 600. Septingenti, æ, a, DCC. 700. Octingenti, æ, a, DCCC. 800. Nongenti, æ, a, DCCCC. or CM. 900. Mille, M. or CIƆ. 1,000. Duo millia, } Bis mille, } MM. 2,000. Tria millia, } Ter mille, } MMM. 3,000. Quatuor millia, } Quater mille, } MMMM. 4,000. Quinque millia, } Quinquies mille, } IƆ​Ɔ​. or V̄. 5,000. Decem millia, } Decies mille, } CCIƆ​Ɔ​. or X̄. 10,000. Quinquaginta millia, } Quinquagies mille, } IƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​. or L̄. 50,000. Centum millia, } Centies mille, } CCCIƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​. or C̄. 100,000. Quingenta millia, } Quingenties mille, } IƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​Ɔ​. or D̄. 500,000. Decies centena millia, CCCCIƆ​Ɔ​Ɔ​Ɔ​, or M̄. 1,000,000.

If the lesser number is placed before the greater, the lesser is to be deducted from the greater; thus IV signifies one less than five, i. e. four; IX, nine; XC, ninety.

If the lesser number be placed after the greater, the lesser is to be added to the greater; thus VI signifies one more than five, i. e. six; XI, eleven; CX, one hundred and ten.

An horizontal stroke over a numeral denotes a thousand: thus V̄ signifies five thousand; L̄, fifty thousand: M̄, a thousand times a thousand, or a million.

I, signifies one, because it is the smallest letter.

V, five, because it is sometimes used for U, the fifth vowel.

X, ten, because it represents two Vs.

L, fifty, from its resemblance to the lower half of C.

C, a hundred, centum.

IƆ or D, five hundred, the half of CIƆ.

M or CIƆ, a thousand, from mille. The latter figures joined at the top ო formed the ancient M.--Latin Vocabulary, 18_mo._ Lond. Valpy, 1823.

NUSTALEEK. See PERSIAN.

NUT BOLTS.

Two bolts that pass through the head: they have square return heads, which clasp the under side of the nut of the spindle to keep it firm in its place.

NUT OF THE SPINDLE. It is also called the BOX, which see.

O.

OBELISK,

marked thus †, is used as a reference to notes in the margin, or at the bottom of the page.

In printing it is technically called a dagger; and is the second reference used, when more than one occurs in a page.

OCTAVO.

A sheet of paper folded into eight leaves or sixteen pages is termed an octavo or 8vo.

ODD PAGE.

The first, third, fifth, seventh, and all uneven numbered pages, are Odd Pages.--M.

OFF.

A pressman usually says, I am off, meaning he has wrought off his token, his heap, his form.--M. It is used also for part of the whole number that is to be worked; as, when a ream, or two reams are worked of a large number, he says, A ream’s off, Two reams off.

OFF CHEEK.

That cheek of the press which is on the opposite side to that at which the pressmen stand to beat and pull; the catch of the bar is fixed to the off cheek.

OFFCUT.

That part of a sheet which, when printed, cuts off, and when folded is inserted in the middle of the other part, which together form a regular and orderly succession of all the pages in the signature.

OIL.

The best oil for presses is neats foot oil, which does not candy nor become glutinous, as almost all other oils do. On this account it is used in the machinery employed in cotton manufactories, where it is necessary to have as little friction as possible.

OLD ENGLISH. See BLACK LETTER.

OPENING OF THE QUOINS.--M. See UNLOCK THE FORM.

OPEN MATTER.

Full of breaks and whites.--M.

OPEN THE FORM.

In laying-up a form to wash it, the compositor, after unlocking the quoins, opens the matter with his fingers so as to suffer the water to penetrate among the letters and wash away the lye and ink.--M.

OPISTHOGRAPHIC.

The first productions of the press were printed on one side of the paper only; as the art improved among the early printers they impressed both sides: and those early productions, when they are printed on both sides of the paper, are styled Opisthographic.

ORGANIC REMAINS.

Abbreviations of Authors’ Names on Organic Remains.

Bast. Basterot. Goldf. Goldfuss. Beaum. Elie de Beaumont. Jäg. Jäger. Blain. Blainville. Lam. Lamarck. Blum. Blumenbach. Lam^x. Lamouroux. Bobl. Boblaye. Linn. Linnæus. Broc. Brocchi. Lons. Lonsdale. Al. Brong. Alex. Brongniart Mant. Mantell. Ad. Brong. Adolphe Brongniart. Munst. Munster. Brug. Bruguière. Murch. Murchison. Buckl. Buckland. M. de S. Marcel de Serres. Conyb. Conybeare. Nils. Nilsson. Cuv. Cuvier. Park. Parkinson. De C., or De Cau. De Caumont. Phil. Phillips. Defr. Defrance. Raf. Rafinesque. De la B. De la Beche. Rein. Reinecke. Desh. Deshayes. Schlot. Schlotheim. Des M. Des Moulins. Sedg. Sedgwick. Desm. Desmarest. Sow. Sowerby. Desn. Desnoyers. Sternb. Sternberg. Dufr. Dufrénoy. Thir. Thirria. Dum. Dumont. Y. & B. Young and Bird. Fauj. de St F. Faujas de St Fond. Wahl. Wahlenberg. Flem. Fleming. Weav. Weaver.

De la Beche’s Geological Manual. 2d. edit. 12mo. 1832.

ORIENTAL LANGUAGES.

For the allowance of the duty on paper used in the printing of books in the Oriental languages within the universities of Oxford and Cambridge, the universities of Scotland, and the university of Trinity College, Dublin, see PAPER.

ORTHOGRAPHY.

The orthography of the English Language is attended with much uncertainty and perplexity. But a considerable part of this inconvenience may be remedied, by attending to the general laws of formation; and, for this end, the reader is presented with a view of such general maxims in spelling primitive and derivative words, as have been almost universally received.

RULE I.--Monosyllables ending with f, l, or s, preceded by a single vowel, double the final consonant; as staff, mill, pass, &c. The only exceptions are, of, if, as, is, has, was, yes, his, this, us, and thus.

RULE II.--Monosyllables ending with any consonant but f, l, or s, and preceded by a single vowel, never double the final consonant; excepting only, add, ebb, butt, egg, odd, err, inn, bunn, purr, and buzz.

RULE III.--Words ending with y, preceded by a consonant, form the plural of nouns, the persons of verbs, verbal nouns, past participles, comparatives, and superlatives, by changing y into i; as, spy, spies; I carry, thou carriest; he carrieth or carries; carrier, carried; happy, happier, happiest.

The present participle in ing, retains the y, that i may not be doubled; as, carry, carrying; bury, burying, &c.

But y, preceded by a vowel, in such instances as the above, is not changed; as, boy, boys; I cloy, he cloys, cloyed, &c; except in lay, pay, and say; from which are formed, laid, paid, and said; and their compounds, unlaid, unpaid, unsaid, &c.

RULE IV.--Words ending with y, preceded by a consonant, upon assuming an additional syllable beginning with a consonant, commonly change y into i; as, happy, happily, happiness. But when y is preceded by a vowel, it is very rarely changed in the additional syllable; as, coy, coyly; boy, boyish, boyhood; annoy, annoyed, annoyance; joy, joyless, joyful, &c.

RULE V.--Monosyllables, and words accented on the last syllable, ending with a single consonant preceded by a single vowel, double that consonant, when they take another syllable beginning with a vowel: as, wit, witty; thin, thinnish; to abet, an abettor; to begin, a beginner.

But if a diphthong precedes, or the accent is on the preceding syllable, the consonant remains single: as, to toil, toiling; to offer, an offering; maid, maiden, &c.

RULE VI.--Words ending with any double letter but l, and taking ness, less, ly, or ful, after them, preserve the letter double: as, harmlessness, carelessness, carelessly, stiffly, successful, distressful, &c. But those words which end with double l, and take ness, less, ly, or ful, after them, generally omit one l, as, fulness, skilless, fully, skilful, &c.

RULE VII.--Ness, less, ly, and ful, added to words ending with silent e, do not cut it off: as, paleness, guileless, closely, peaceful; except in a few words: as, duly, truly, awful.

RULE VIII.--Ment, added to words ending with silent e, generally preserves the e from elision: as, abatement, chastisement, incitement, &c. The words judgment, abridgment, acknowledgment, are deviations from the rule.

Like other terminations it changes y into i, when preceded by a consonant: as, accompany, accompaniment; merry, merriment.

RULE IX.--Able and ible, when incorporated into words ending with silent e, almost always cut it off: as, blame, blamable; cure, curable; sense, sensible, &c.; but if c or g soft comes before e in the original word, the e is then preserved in words compounded with able: as, change, changeable; peace, peaceable, &c.

RULE X.--When ing or ish is added to words ending with silent e, the e is almost universally omitted: as, place, placing; lodge, lodging; slave, slavish; prude, prudish.

RULE XI.--Words taken into composition, often drop those letters which were superfluous in their simples; as, handful, dunghil, withal; also, chilblain, foretel.

The orthography of a great number of English words, is far from being uniform, even amongst writers of distinction. Thus, honour and honor, inquire and enquire, negotiate and negociate, control and controul, expense and expence, allege and alledge, surprise and surprize, abridgment and abridgement, and many other orthographical variations, are to be met with in the best modern publications. Some authority for deciding differences of this nature appears to be necessary; and where can we find one of equal pretensions with Dr. Johnson’s Dictionary? though a few of his decisions do not appear to be warranted by the principles of etymology and analogy, the stable foundations of his improvements.--“As the weight of truth and reason,” (says Nares in his ‘Elements of Orthoepy,’) “is irresistible, Dr. Johnson’s Dictionary has nearly fixed the external form of our language. Indeed, so convenient is it to have one acknowledged standard to recur to; so much preferable, in matters of this nature, is a trifling degree of irregularity, to a continual change, and fruitless pursuit of unattainable perfection; that it is earnestly to be hoped, that no author will henceforth, on light grounds, be tempted to innovate.”

The plural number of nouns is generally formed by adding s to the singular: as, dove, doves; face, faces; thought, thoughts. But when the substantive singular ends in x, ch soft, sh, ss, or s, we add es in the plural: as, box, boxes; church, churches; lash, lashes; kiss, kisses; rebus, rebusses. If the singular ends in ch hard, the plural is formed by adding s; as, monarch, monarchs; distich, distichs.

Nouns which end in o, have sometimes es added to the plural; as, cargo, echo, hero, negro, manifesto, potato, volcano, wo: and sometimes only s; as, folio, grotto, junto, nuncio, portico, punctilio, tyro.

Nouns ending in f, or fe, are rendered plural by the change of those terminations into ves: as, loaf, loaves; half, halves; wife, wives; except grief, relief, reproof, and several others, which form the plural by the addition of s. Those which end in ff, have the regular plural: as, ruff, ruffs; except, staff, staves.

Nouns which have y in the singular, with no other vowel in the same syllable, change it into ies in the plural: as, beauty, beauties; fly, flies. But the y is not changed, when there is another vowel in the syllable: as, key, keys; delay, delays; attorney, attorneys.

Some nouns become plural by changing the a of the singular into e: as, man, men; woman, women; alderman, aldermen. The words, ox and child, form oxen and children: brother, makes either brothers, or brethren. Sometimes the diphthong oo is changed into ee in the plural: as, foot, feet; goose, geese; tooth, teeth. Louse and mouse make lice and mice. Penny makes pence, or pennies, when the coin is meant; die, dice (for play); die, dies (for coining).

The following words, which have been adopted from the Hebrew, Greek, and Latin languages, are thus distinguished with respect to number.

Singular. Plural.

Cherub. Cherubim. Seraph. Seraphim. Antithesis. Antitheses. Diæresis. Diæreses. Ellipsis. Ellipses. Emphasis. Emphases.

Automaton. Automata. Basis. Bases. Crisis. Crises. Criterion. Criteria. Arcanum. Arcana. Calx. Calces. Datum. Data. Effluvium. Effluvia. Encomium. Encomia, or Encomiums. Erratum. Errata. Genius. Genii.* Genus. Genera. Index. Indices, or Indexes.† Hypothesis. Hypotheses. Metamorphosis. Metamorphoses. Phænomenon. Phænomena. Appendix. Appendices, or Appendixes. Lamina. Laminæ. Medium. Media. Magus. Magi. Memorandum. Memoranda, or Memorandums. Radius. Radii. Stamen. Stamina. Stratum. Strata. Vortex. Vortices.

* Genii, when denoting aërial spirits: Geniuses, when signifying persons of genius.

† Indexes, when it signifies pointers, or Tables of contents: Indices, when referring to algebraic quantities.--Murray.

The following observations relate to English and Scotch orthography, temp. Hen. VIII.:--

A is frequently used in Scottish orthography for o; as, aith for oath, ane for one, twa for two, hame for home, quha for who.

Qu is in Scottish commonly substituted for w, as, quha for who, quhair for where, quhilk for which.

U is in Scottish usually substituted for the English oo, as, guid or gude for good, stude for stood.

V and W, at the commencement of words and syllables, are used indiscriminately, and sometimes also at their termination, as, foryew for foryeve; w is in Scottish also substituted for u in the middle of syllables, as, swt for suit.

Y is in Scottish almost always used for th (being corrupted from the Anglo-Saxon þ), and its place supplied by z.

Z is in Scottish constantly used for y, being corrupted from the Anglo-Saxon ȝ.

Verbs.--The following are some of the most commonly used irregular verbs, having a preterite and participle varying from those in use at the present time:--

To Be--in the second person singular Bes; in the third person Beis, Beth, or Beeth; in the third person plural Arn, Be, Ben, Been, Bene, Byn, or Er; in the third person plural of the preterite Werne.

To Bid--in the preterite Bode; in the participle Bode, Boden.

To Bind--in the preterite Bonde; in the participle Band, Bond, Bounde, Bounden.

To Bite--in the preterite Bote.

To Con or Can, to be able--in the third person singular Conith.--Michel can, to be powerful.

To Climb--in the preterite Clomb, Clame, Clambe, Clombe, Clomben.

To Cling--in the preterite Clong.

To Ferme (Sc.) to establish--in the participle Fermen.

To Fet, to fetch--in the preterite Fetten; in the participle Fette.--Ferfett, farfetched.

To Flete (Sc.) to float--in the preterite Flet.

To Forbede or Forbid--in the preterite Forbod; in the participle Forboden, Forbode, Forbodden.

To Gar or Ger (Sc.) to cause--in the preterite and participle Gart, Gert.

To Geve, Gif, or Gyf, to give--in the preterite Gaf; in the participle Giffin, Goue, Gouun, or Gyffen.

To Glide--in the preterite Glode.

To Kithe (Sc.) to prove--in the preterite Kidde.

Man, Mone, or Moten (Sc.)--must.

To Mow, Moue, or May, to be able--in the preterite Mot, Mought, Moght, or Mowght; in the future Shall mow or may; subjunctive May mow; To mow in the infinitive.

To Owe--preterite Ought; as “He oweth to pay,” “They owe to come,”--“D. ought him thirty shillings,” “He ought suit,” “Kindness ought to us.”

To Preif or Pryve (Sc.) to prove--in the preterite and participle Prewit or Pryved.

To Recet or Receipt (Sc.) to harbour a criminal--in the participle Reset, Resettit, or Receipted.

To Rede, to advise--in the preterite Radde.

To Reve, Reffe, or Riffe (Sc.) to rob--in the preterite Reft; in the participle Reft, Reved, or Revin.

To Tyne, Tyin, Tyn, or Tynte (Sc.) to lose--in the participle Tint, Tynt.

To Vys or Wis, to know--in the preterite Vyst or Wist.

To Wete, Wite, or Wit, to know--in the preterite Wote; in the imperative Wateth, Witeth, know thou.

To Will--in the preterite Willed, Woled, Wold, or Wolde; preterpluperfect Had wold; future Shall will.

To Yeve, Yew, or Yeove, to give--in the preterite Yaf, Yave; future Shall or will Yeve; active participle Yeving; passive participle Yeven, frequently, and sometimes Yewin, Yoven, Yeoven, Yevin, and Yevyn.

Yede, Yode, went, preterite of A. S. gán to go.

To Yield--in the preterite Yald, Yalt, or Yold; in the participle Yelde, Yold, Yolde, Yolden.

His, or sometimes Is, is used after a masculine substantive as the sign of the genitive case, and occasionally united with the substantive, as, Kinghis. It occurs sometimes, though rarely, after a feminine substantive, as, “The Queen his affairs,” “The Queen is favour;” but her is more commonly used in that case, as, “Elizabeth Holland her house.”

OUT.

A compositor usually says, I am out, meaning he has set out his page, form, or copy.--M.

When a compositor has omitted a word or words, a line, a sentence, a paragraph, a page or a leaf of copy, which sometimes does happen, each of these omissions is called an Out: thus we say, An out of a word--of two words--of a line, &c.

OUTER FORM.

The form that has the first page of the sheet in it. It is usual to work this form the last. See LAY ON.

OUT OF COPY.

A compositor is said to be out of copy when he has composed all that is in his possession, and there is no supply for him to go on with. It is also termed standing still for copy.

OUT OF LETTER.

When a compositor has no letter in his cases, and none to distribute, he is said to be out of letter.

OUT OF REGISTER.

Bad Register.--M. When the pages on both sides of a sheet do not print exactly upon each other; or when line does not fall upon line, where they are intended to do so; or folios are not justified in the middle of the line; or when any thing on one side of a sheet does not print exactly on the back of a similar thing on the opposite side, which it is meant to do, it is said to be Out of Register, or Out, or It does not Register, or It is not in Register.

OUT-PAGE.

In octavos, twelves, sixteens, every outside page in a sheet is called an Out-Page; the rest are called In-Pages.--M.

OUTSIDE QUIRES.

The two quires on the outside of every ream of paper delivered from the maker; they have never more than twenty sheets in each, all of which are either damaged or torn, more or less. These quires are also called Cassie Quires, and Cording Quires. It is now uncommon to send any outside quires to letter-press printers; the paper sent to them for use being what is termed Perfect.

OUTSIDERS. See NEWSPAPERS.

OVERFLOWING CASE. See CASE RUNS OVER.

OVERLAYS.

Pieces of paper pasted on the tympan sheet, or on a sheet between the tympans, to increase the pressure on particular parts of a form, to make the impression more regular, or more perfect. See ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD. FINE PRESSWORK. MAKING READY.

OVERPLUS. See WASTE.

OVERRUN.

If in a proof any matter is marked to be taken out, or to be inserted, in a page, or pages, it will be necessary to take matter from one page to another, to preserve them of a proper length, this is termed overrunning: it may be a few words only in a paragraph, and not extending beyond it; in this case it is termed overrunning a paragraph.

The best method of overrunning matter is to take the lines into a composing stick; the spacing and the justifying of the lines are better preserved by this means, than by spacing out upon the stone in the form, and feeling the ends of the lines with the fingers.

OVERSEER.

The manager or superintendent of a printing office. The duties of an overseer vary according to the size of the establishment, and the part that his principal takes in its management; but, generally speaking, he has the sole conducting of the practical department, receiving his general directions from the principal, and seeing that they are carried into execution in a proper manner. It is requisite, as a matter of course, that he should be intimately and practically acquainted with the business in all its details. It is of importance to the concern where he has the management, that he should blend urbanity with firmness; and show judgment and impartiality in giving out work, so that the business should proceed with regularity, and with satisfaction to all parties.

P.

PAGE CORD.

Small twine with which the pages are tied round, to secure them temporarily till they are imposed. Small net twine is the best, as being stronger and more uniform in thickness than any other cord that I have seen used for the purpose.

PAGE PAPER.

Stout paper cut up to the proper size, on which to place pages, till they are wanted to be imposed.

The wrappers that come round bundles of paper are generally used, for which the compositor applies to the warehouseman, who when he has no wrappers, gives some of the stoutest waste paper that he has; when it is not strong enough single the compositor uses it double. Page papers are cut longer than a page of the work they are for, and should be about an inch and a half broader than the width of the page and turned up to the sides of it, so that when the compositor has occasion to move his pages, he takes hold of both sides with one hand including the sides of the page paper which supports the bottom of the page.

Except the page papers be very stout, it would be running a risk to place large quarto pages on them: in this case it will be better to keep them on slices.

PALE COLOUR.

If there be not Blacking enough in the ink, or the form be beaten with too lean balls, the work will be said to have a Pale Colour.--M. The term is now applied only when there is a deficiency of ink, so that the surface of the paper is not completely covered on the impression of the types.

PAMPHLET.

Any work that does not exceed five sheets in octavo is termed a pamphlet, and is paid something extra for at case, as a compensation to the compositor for making up the letter and furniture without having any return of either; the whole being generally put in chase. See SCALE OF PRICES.

PAMPHLETS.

Act 60 Geo. 3. c. 9.--To subject certain Publications to the Duties of Stamps upon Newspapers, and to make other Regulations for restraining the Abuses arising from the Publication of Blasphemous and Seditious Libels.

First recites, that Pamphlets and printed Papers containing Observations upon Public Events and Occurrences, tending to excite Hatred and Contempt of the Government and Constitution of these Realms as by Law established, and also vilifying our Holy Religion, have lately been published in great Numbers, and at very small Prices; and it is expedient that the same should be restrained, and enacts;

s. 1. That all Pamphlets and Papers containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, printed in any Part of the United Kingdom for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days between the Publication of any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers, where any of the said Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers respectively, shall not exceed Two Sheets, or shall be published for Sale for a less Sum than Sixpence, exclusive of the Duty by this Act imposed thereon, shall be deemed and taken to be Newspapers within the true Intent and Meaning of several other Acts of Parliament now in force relating to Newspapers; and be subject to such and the same Duties of Stamps, with such and the same Allowances and Discounts, as Newspapers printed in Great Britain and Ireland respectively now are subject unto under and by virtue of the said recited Acts of Parliament, and shall be printed, published, and distributed under and subject to all such and the like Rules, Regulations, Restrictions, Provisions, Penalties, and Forfeitures, as are contained in the said recited Acts, or either of them.

s. 2. That no Quantity of Paper less than a Quantity equal to Twenty-one Inches in Length and Seventeen Inches in Breadth, in whatever Way or Form the same may be made, or may be divided into Leaves, or in whatever Way the same may be printed, shall be deemed or taken to be a Sheet of Paper within the Meaning and for the Purposes of this Act.

s. 3. That no Cover or Blank Leaf, or any other Leaf upon which any Advertisement or other Notice shall be printed, shall, for the Purposes of this Act, be deemed or taken to be a Part of any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number aforesaid.

s. 4. That all Pamphlets and Papers containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any such Remarks or Observations as aforesaid, printed for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals exceeding Twenty-six Days between any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers, and which said Pamphlets, Papers, Parts or Numbers respectively, shall not exceed Two Sheets, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence, shall be first published on the First Day of every Calendar Month, or within Two Days before or after that Day, and at no other Time; and that if any Person or Persons shall first publish or cause to be published any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number aforesaid, on any other Day or Time, he or they shall forfeit for every such Offence the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 5. That upon every Pamphlet or Paper containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, printed in any Part of the United Kingdom for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days between the Publication of any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts, or Numbers, and upon every Part or Number thereof shall be printed the full Price at which every such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number shall be published for Sale, and also the Day on which the same is first published; and if any Person shall publish any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part or Number, without the said Price and Day being printed thereon, or if any Person shall at any Time within Two Months after the Day of Publication printed thereon as aforesaid sell or expose to sale any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number, or any Portion or Part of such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number, upon which the Price so printed as aforesaid shall be Sixpence, or above that Sum, for a less Price than the Sum of Sixpence, every such Person shall for every such Offence forfeit and pay the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 6. Provided always, That nothing in this Act shall extend or be construed to extend to subject any Person publishing any Pamphlet or Paper to any Penalty for any Allowance in Price made by the Person for whom and on whose Behalf, and for whose Profit, Benefit, or Advantage, the same shall have been first published, to any Bookseller, or Distributor, or other Person to whom the same shall be sold for the Purpose of retailing the same.

s. 7. That all Pamphlets and Papers which are by this Act declared to be subject to the Stamp Duties upon Newspapers, shall be freed and discharged from all the Stamp Duties and Regulations contained in any Act of Parliament relating to Pamphlets.

s. 8. That no Person, from and after Thirty Days after the passing of this Act, shall print or publish for Sale, any Newspaper, or any Pamphlet or other Paper containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, which shall not exceed Two Sheets, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence, until he or she shall have entered into a Recognizance, in the Sum of Three hundred Pounds, if such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or Paper shall be printed in London or within Twenty Miles thereof, and in the Sum of Two hundred Pounds, if such Newspaper, &c. shall be printed elsewhere in the United Kingdom, and his or her Sureties in a like Sum in the Whole, conditioned that such Printer or Publisher shall pay to his Majesty, his Heirs and Successors, every such Fine or Penalty as may at any Time be imposed upon or adjudged against him or her, by reason of any Conviction for printing or publishing any blasphemous or seditious Libel, at any Time after the entering into such Recognizance or executing such Bond; and that every Person who shall print or first publish any such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or other Paper, without having entered into such Recognizance, or executed and delivered such Bond with such Sureties as aforesaid, shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 9. If Sureties pay any Part of the Money for which they are bound, or become Bankrupt, new Recognizance or Bond with Sureties must be given.

s. 10. Provided Sureties may withdraw from Recognizance upon giving Notice, and new Recognizance to be entered into.

s. 11. Bonds not to be subject to Stamp Duty.

s. 12. Lists of Recognizances and Bonds taken, to be transmitted to Commissioners of Stamps in England, Scotland, and Ireland, respectively.

s. 13. And whereas the Printer or Publisher of any Newspaper, and of any Pamphlet and Paper hereby enacted to be deemed and taken to be a Newspaper, will, after the passing of this Act, be bound under and by virtue of the Provisions contained in the said Acts made and passed in the Thirty-eighth and Fifty-fifth Years of his Majesty’s Reign respectively, to deliver to the Commissioners of Stamps in Great Britain and Ireland respectively, or some Distributor of Stamps or other Officer, on the Day on which the same is published, or within a certain Time afterwards, One of the Newspapers, Pamphlets, or Papers so published, signed as in the said Acts is respectively directed: And whereas it is expedient that the same or similar Provisions and Regulations should extend and be applied to all Pamphlets and Papers, whether published periodically or not, and which shall contain any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrence, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, and which shall not exceed Two Sheets as aforesaid, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence; be it therefore enacted, That from and after Ten Days after the passing of this Act, the Printer or Publisher of any Pamphlet or other Paper for Sale, containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or on any Matter in Church or State, shall, upon every Day upon which the same shall be published, or within Six Days after, deliver to the Commissioners of Stamps for Great Britain and Ireland respectively, at their Head Offices, or to some Distributor or Officer to be appointed by them to receive the same, and whom they are hereby required to appoint for that Purpose, one of the Pamphlets or Papers so published upon each such Day, signed by the Printer or Publisher thereof, in his Hand-writing, with his Name and Place of Abode; and the same shall be carefully kept by the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer as aforesaid, in such Manner as the said Commissioners shall direct; and such Printer or Publisher shall be entitled to demand and receive from the Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer, the Amount of the Retail Price of such Pamphlet or Paper so delivered; and in every Case in which the Printer and Publisher of such Pamphlet or Paper shall neglect to deliver One such Pamphlet or Paper in the Manner herein-before directed, such Printer and Publisher shall, for every such Neglect respectively, forfeit and lose the Sum of One hundred Pounds.

s. 14. Provided always, That in case the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer aforesaid, shall refuse to receive or pay for any Copy of such Pamphlet or Paper offered to be delivered to them or him as aforesaid, for or on account of the same not being within the true Intent and Meaning of this Act, such Commissioners, Distributor, or Officer shall, if required so to do, give and deliver to such Printer or Publisher a Certificate in Writing, that a Copy of such Pamphlet or Paper had been by him duly offered to be delivered; and such Printer or Publisher shall thereupon be freed and discharged from any Penalty for not having delivered such Copy as aforesaid.

s. 15. That if any Person shall sell or expose to sale any Pamphlet or other Paper not being duly stamped, if required to be stamped, such Person shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 16. That it shall be lawful for any of his Majesty’s Courts of Record at Westminster or Dublin or of Great Session in Wales, or any Judge thereof respectively, or for any Court of Quarter or General Sessions of the Peace, or for any Justice of the Peace before whom any Person charged with having printed or published any blasphemous, seditious, or malicious Libel, shall be brought for the Purpose of giving Bail upon such Charge, to make it a Part of the Condition of the Recognizance to be entered into by such Person and his or her Bail, that the Person so charged shall be of good Behaviour during the Continuance of such Recognizance.

s. 17. Recovery of Penalties. Provided always, that no larger Amount in the Whole than One hundred Pounds shall be recoverable or recovered before any Justices of the Peace, for any such Penalties incurred in any One Day; any Thing in this Act or any other Acts of Parliament contained to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 18. Two or more Justices to determine Offences, and may mitigate Penalties.

s. 19. Penalty on Persons summoned as Witnesses not appearing, &c.

ss. 20. to 25. Relate to the Forms of Conviction, commencing Actions for Penalties, Management of the Duties, Allowance of Discounts, &c.

s. 26. That nothing in this Act shall extend to Acts of Parliament, Proclamations, Orders of Council, Forms of Prayer and Thanksgiving, and Acts of State, ordered to be printed by his Majesty, his Heirs or Successors, or his or their sufficient and authorised Officer; or to any printed Votes or other Matters by Order of either House of Parliament; or to Books commonly used in the Schools of Great Britain or Ireland, or Books or Papers containing only Matters of Devotion, Piety, or Charity; or Daily Accounts; or Bills of Goods imported and exported; or Warrants or Certificates for the Delivery of Goods; and the Weekly Bills of Mortality; or to Papers containing any Lists of Prices current, or of the State of the Markets, or any Account of the Arrival, Sailing, or other Circumstances relating to Merchant Ships or Vessels; or of any other Matter wholly of a Commercial Nature; provided such Bills, Lists, or Accounts do not contain any other Matter than what hath been usually comprised therein; or to the Printers or Publishers of the foregoing Matters, or any or either of them.

s. 27. That nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be construed to extend to charge with Stamp Duties any Work re-printed and re-published in Parts or Numbers, whether such Work shall be wholly re-printed or shall be re-published in an abridged Form; provided that the Work so re-printed and re-published shall have been first printed and published Two Years at the least previous to such Re-printing and Re-publication, and provided the said Work was not first published in Parts or Numbers.

This act was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. as far as relates to newspapers, advertisements, and stamps. See BLASPHEMOUS LIBELS. NEWSPAPER POSTAGE. PUBLICATIONS, PERIODICAL.

Pamphlets. (Ireland.) 43 Geo. 3. c. 21. s. 45. “And, for the better collecting and securing the Duties hereby charged on Pamphlets, be it further enacted, That One printed Copy of every Pamphlet which shall be printed or published within the City of Dublin, shall, within the Space of six Days after the printing thereof, be brought to the said Head Office in Dublin, and the Title thereof, with the Number of Sheets contained therein, and the Duty hereby charged thereon, shall be registered or entered in a Book, to be there kept for that Purpose; which Duty shall be thereupon paid to the proper Officer or Officers appointed to receive the same, or his or their Deputy or Clerk, who shall thereupon give a Receipt for the same on such printed Copy, to denote the Payment of the Duty hereby charged on such Pamphlet; and that One printed Copy of every such Pamphlet that shall be printed or published in any Place in Ireland, not being within the City of Dublin, shall, within the Space of fourteen Days after the printing thereof, be brought to some Head Distributor or Collector of the Stamp Duties, who is hereby required forthwith to enter the Title thereof, with the Number of Sheets contained therein, and the Duty hereby charged thereon, in a Book to be by him kept for that Purpose, which Duty shall be thereupon paid to such Distributor or Collector, who shall give a Receipt for the same on such printed Copy.

s. 46. “And be it further enacted, That if any such Pamphlet shall be printed or published as aforesaid, and the Duty hereby charged thereon shall not be duly paid as aforesaid within the respective Times aforesaid, then the Printer or Publisher, and all and every other Person or Persons concerned in and about the printing or publishing of such Pamphlet, shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of One hundred Pounds; and the Author, Printer, and Publisher of such Pamphlet, shall forfeit and lose all Copy Right therein.

s. 47. “And be it further enacted, That on the Trials of Actions, Informations, or Suits, for Recovery of the aforesaid Penalty for Nonpayment of the aforesaid Duty, within the respective Times aforesaid, the Proof of the Payment of the said Duty shall lie upon the Printer or Publisher of such Pamphlet.”

SCHEDULE (D).

“For every Pamphlet or Paper, not exceeding Six Sheets in Octavo, or in a lesser Page, and not exceeding Twelve Sheets in Quarto, or Twenty Sheets in Folio, a Duty after the Rate of Two Shillings for every Sheet of any Kind of Paper contained in one printed Copy or Impression thereof.”

55 Geo. 3. c. 80., which re-enacts these sections, was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. as far as relates to Newspapers, Advertisements, and Stamps.

47 Geo. 3. c 50. sess. 1.

SCHEDULE (B).

“For every Pamphlet or Paper not exceeding Six Sheets in Octavo, or in a lesser Page, and not exceeding Twelve Sheets in Quarto, or Twenty Sheets in Folio, for every Sheet of any Kind of Paper contained in One printed Copy or Impression thereof, a Duty of 2_s._

“The foregoing Duty on Advertisements and Pamphlets does not extend to Advertisements respecting Hospitals, Forms of Prayer and Thanksgiving, printed Votes and Proceedings in Parliament, School Books, or Books of Devotion or Piety.”

56 Geo. 3. c. 56., which re-enacts this Duty, was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. as far as relates to Newspapers, Advertisements, and Stamps.

PAPER. The quality of paper is of great consequence in printing; but it is too frequently overlooked by all parties.

Every pressman of common attention perceives a material difference in the process of bringing off a sharp impression, according to the quality of the paper that he uses. When he meets with a hard-sized harsh paper, bleached with acid, it requires more than common care to make his work look well--to make it good, it frequently defies his utmost abilities--to preserve its first appearance is impossible, as the acid in the paper decomposes the ink.

It is to be regretted, that there is hardly any paper made at the present time but what is more or less bleached with acid, to the deterioration of its quality. The study of the paper maker is to produce stout and viewly paper at a low price; and this he does by using inferior rags bleached by acid; by adding a great proportion of gypsum, in some instances one seventh of its weight, in others one eighth; and frequently of whiting made from lime: he will thus produce a paper weighing sixteen or seventeen pounds a ream, that will feel as stout and look as viewly as an honest-made paper from good rags that will weigh about twenty-two pounds. To the publishers of cheap books, and of ephemeral productions, the price of paper is an important object; but no work of value ought to be printed on such an article, as it cannot be durable, nor will it bear much use, becoming tender with age, and breaking by turning over the leaves.

The origin of this viewly, inferior, perishable paper, was in consequence of the alteration of the duty on paper paid by the maker, from size to weight.

These evils are, however, in a fair way of being rectified. The paper makers of the present day are exerting their abilities to manufacture an article which, with all the beauty and fineness that are held so requisite, should be free from the evils which have of late years accompanied these qualities. Great improvements have already resulted from their endeavours; and one of the foremost in this praiseworthy competition is the house of Messrs. John Dickinson and Co., who have succeeded in manufacturing a paper of great fineness and beauty, and free from the imperfections of which we have had to complain.

The Rev. William Beloe, in his Anecdotes of Literature, &c. speaking of the paper on which books in the infancy of printing were executed, observes,--

“This presents a very fertile subject of discussion. Here, as in ink, two very distinct kinds occur, writing-paper and printing-paper, or rather did then; for the invention of paper made from rags did not precede that of printing more than half a century; and perhaps the first experiments were made on the paper in common use. But here it is worthy of remark, that in this particular fabrick of paper, the Italians far excelled the Germans; for it will appear that the paper used by Sweynheym and Pannartz in the Lactantius, printed at Subiaco, is greatly superior to that of the first printers at Mentz. But it is also a matter of surprise, in how very short a period, and to what a degree of excellence, the manufacture of paper was improved; never, perhaps, for the purposes of printing, to be excelled. Many of the EDITIONES PRINCIPES exhibit specimens of beauty and splendour never surpassed in all the productions of modern times. The earliest specimens of printing, however, were upon vellum; for which there were two reasons. The first was, that it was the object of the first printers to make their books as much as possible to resemble manuscripts; and the anecdote of Fust, and his disposing of his Bibles at Paris, which were considered as manuscripts, has before been related. The next motive of preferring vellum was, that the books were more durable; but from this circumstance, it sometimes happens that early books on paper are more difficult of attainment than on vellum. Yet the Mazarine Bible, which is now usually allowed to be the edition brought to Paris by Fust, is usually on paper. The Durandus, however, is never found but on vellum. It is observable, that the first printed books are distinguished by very ample margins. This, though considered by collectors in modern times as a distinguishing feature of beauty and excellence, was, in the infancy of the art, merely intended for the convenience of writing notes and making observations. Another very copious subject of animadversion is involved in the marks of the paper used in the infancy of printing. As the first printers often omitted to put their names to their works, many have supposed that a careful examination of the paper and paper-marks would ascertain to what printer such books might be ascribed. But this is very delusive.”

The following are the regular sizes of paper, of all descriptions, as they were fixed when the duty was paid to government according to the size. After the alteration in the mode of laying the duty, and it was imposed upon the weight and not upon the size, the makers began to vary the dimensions, so that in fact there is no regularity in them: yet the list will be useful in ascertaining those variations--in knowing what the size of each sort ought to be--and the comparative dimensions when folded into quarto, octavo, duodecimo, &c. for printing; and I have given all the list, although only a small part of it contains what are termed printing papers; yet the whole may be useful as a matter of reference.

+-------------------------+---------------+ | FIRST TABLE. | Inches | | +-------+-------+ | Imperial Writing | 22 | 30¼ | | Super Royal Do. | 19¼ | 27½ | | Royal Do. | 19¼ | 24 | | Medium Do. | 17½ | 22½ | | Demy Do. | 15½ | 20 | | Thick and Thin Post | 15¼ | 19½ | | Small Post | 13½ | 16½ | | Foolscap | 13½ | 16¾ | | Pott | 12½ | 15½ | | Extra Large Post | 16½ | 21 | | | | | | SECOND TABLE. | | | | | | | | Double Atlas | 55 | 31½ | | Demy | 15½ | 20 | | Copy or Bastard | 16 | 20¼ | | Foolscap | 13½ | 16¾ | | Littriss Foolscap | 13½ | 17½ | | Pott | 12½ | 15 | | Grand Eagle, or} | | | | Double Elephant} | 26¾ | 40 | | Columbier | 23½ | 34½ | | Atlas | 26¼ | 34 | | Atlas, Small | 25 | 31 | | Imperial | 22 | 30¼ | | Super Royal | 19¼ | 27½ | | Long Royal | 27½ | 18 | | Royal | 19¼ | 24 | | Demy | 17 | 22 | | Short Demy | 14 | 20¼ | | Crown | 15 | 20 | | Large Fan | 23½ | 20½ | | Small Fan | 22¼ | 13¼ | | Elephant | 23 | 28 | | | | | | THIRD TABLE. | | | | | | | | Double Demy | 26 | 38½ | | Royal Do. | {19½ | 24¼ | | | {20 | 26 | | Inferior Royal | 19½ | 24¼ | | Medium | 18 | 23 | | Demy, Single | 17½ | 22 | | Do. Do. | 19¼ | 21¼ | | Double Crown | 20 | 30 | | Single Crown | 15 | 20 | | Demy Tissue | 17½ | 22 | | Crown Tissue | 15 | 20 | | Double Pott | 17 | 25½ | | | | | | FOURTH TABLE. | | | | Cartridge | 21 | 26 | | Cartridge, Square | 24½ | 25½ | | Cartridge | 19¼ | 24 | | Elephant, Common | 23 | 28 | | Sugar Blue | 21½ | 33 | | Sugar Blue, Small Size | 18¾ | 27 | | Do. Demy Size | 17½ | 22 | | Do. Crown Size | 15 | 20 | | Purple, Royal | 19½ | 24¼ | | Blue Elephant | 23 | 28 | | Blue Royal | 19½ | 24¼ | | Blue Demy | 17 | 22 | | Blue Crown | 15 | 20 | | | | | | FIFTH TABLE. | | | | Royal Hand, Thick | 24 | 19¼ | | Royal Hand | 24 | 19¼ | | Lumber Hand | 23 | 18 | | Double Two Pound | 24 | 16 | | Single Two Pound | 16 | 11 | | Middle Hand, Double | 33 | 21 | | Middle Hand | 22 | 16 | | Small Hand, Double | 32 | 20 | | Small Hand | 19¾ | 16 | | Couples, Pound | 12 | 10 | | Couples, Half Pound | 9 | 7½ | | Imperial Cap | 29 | 22 | | Havon Cap | 24 | 20 | | Bag Cap | 23½ | 19 | | Kentish Cap | 21 | 18 | | Four Pounds | 20 | 16 | | Small Cap | 20 | 15 | | Double Four Pounds | 33 | 20 | | Single Two Pounds | 16 | 12 | | Couples, Pound | 12 | 10 | | Couples, Half Pound | 9 | 7½ | +-------------------------+-------+-------+

The subjoined table shows the dimensions of the leaves of each sort of paper when folded into the various sizes. It will be serviceable to the printer, by enabling him to ascertain easily what kind of paper will cut up to the most advantage for jobs, labels, &c.; and it will be equally serviceable to the bookseller, by enabling him to ascertain what sized paper will be the most economical to print a work on, when the size of the page is fixed, as he will perceive, on referring to it, that a foolscap octavo is 6¾ inches high, and 4⅛ inches broad; and that a royal eighteens is 6⅝ inches high, and 4¼ inches broad; that a post octavo is 7⅝ inches high, and 4⅞ inches broad; and a medium duodecimo is 7⅝ inches high, and 4½ inches broad;--so as to give him the option of saving both in presswork and the price of paper, without the trouble of having to fold various specimens of paper. It will also serve to ascertain the paper on which any book or job is printed.

I have not carried the calculation to a smaller fraction than the eighth of an inch, as that is near enough for all practical purposes, considering the variations in the size of paper; and when the division came to less, I adopted the next number; so that in some cases the parts of a sheet will be a little larger than the dimensions.

D. signifies drawing paper; P. printing paper; and W. writing paper.

+---------------------------+---------------+---------------+ | | Size of | Folio. | | | Sheet. | | | +---------------+-------+-------+ | | Inches. | Long. | Br. | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+ | Double Atlas. D. | 55 | 31½ | 31½ | 22½ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | Double Elephant. D. } | 40 | 26¾ | 26¾ | 20 | | Double Demy. P. | 38½ | 26 | 26 | 19¼ | | Columbier. D. | 34½ | 23½ | 23½ | 17¼ | | Atlas. D. | 34 | 26½ | 26½ | 17 | | Atlas, Small. D. | 31 | 25 | 25 | 15½ | | Imperial. D. | 30½ | 22 | 22 | 15¼ | | Imperial. W. | 30¼ | 22 | 22 | 15⅛ | | Double Crown. P. | 30 | 20 | 20 | 15 | | Elephant. D. | 28 | 23 | 23 | 14 | | Super Royal. D. | 27½ | 19¼ | 19¼ | 13¾ | | Super Royal. W. | 27½ | 19¼ | 19¼ | 13¾ | | Royal, Long. D. | 27½ | 18 | 18 | 13¾ | | Royal. P. | 26 | 20 | 20 | 13 | | Double Pott. P. | 25½ | 17 | 17 | 12¾ | | Royal. P. | 24¼ | 19½ | 19½ | 12⅛ | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 24¼ | 19½ | 19½ | 12⅛ | | Royal. D. | 24 | 19¼ | 19¼ | 12 | | Royal. W. | 24 | 19¼ | 19¼ | 12 | | Medium. P. | 23 | 18 | 18 | 11½ | | Medium. W. | 22½ | 17½ | 17½ | 11¼ | | Demy. P. | 22 | 17½ | 17½ | 11 | | Demy. D. | 22 | 17 | 17 | 11 | | Demy. P. | 21¼ | 19¼ | 19¼ | 10⅝ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 21 | 16½ | 16½ | 10½ | | Copy, or Bastard. W. | 20¼ | 16 | 16 | 10⅛ | | Demy, Short. D. | 20¼ | 14 | 14 | 10⅛ | | Demy. W. | 20 | 15½ | 15½ | 10 | | Crown. D. | 20 | 15 | 15 | 10 | | Single Crown. P. | 20 | 15 | 15 | 10 | | Thick and Thin Post. W. | 19½ | 15¼ | 15¼ | 9¾ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 17½ | 13½ | 13½ | 8¾ | | Foolscap. W. | 16¾ | 13½ | 13½ | 8⅜ | | Foolscap. D. | 16¾ | 13¼ | 13¼ | 8⅜ | | Small Post. W. | 16½ | 13½ | 13½ | 8¼ | | Pott. W. | 15½ | 12½ | 12½ | 7¾ | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+

+---------------------------+---------------+-------+-------+ | | Long Folio. | Quarto. | | +---------------+---------------+ | | Long. | Br. | Long. | Br. | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+ | Double Atlas. D. | 55 | 15¾ | 22½ | 15¾ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | Double Elephant. D. } | 40 | 13⅜ | 20 | 13⅜ | | Double Demy. P. | 38½ | 13 | 19¼ | 13 | | Columbier. D. | 34½ | 11¾ | 17¼ | 11¾ | | Atlas. D. | 34 | 13¼ | 17 | 13¼ | | Atlas, Small. D. | 31 | 12½ | 15½ | 12½ | | Imperial. D. | 30½ | 11 | 15¼ | 11 | | Imperial. W. | 30¼ | 11 | 15⅛ | 11 | | Double Crown. P. | 30 | 10 | 15 | 10 | | Elephant. D. | 28 | 11½ | 14 | 11½ | | Super Royal. D. | 27½ | 9⅝ | 13¾ | 9⅝ | | Super Royal. W. | 27½ | 9⅝ | 13¾ | 9⅝ | | Royal, Long. D. | 27½ | 9 | 13¾ | 9 | | Royal. P. | 26 | 10 | 13 | 10 | | Double Pott. P. | 25½ | 8½ | 12¾ | 8½ | | Royal. P. | 24¼ | 9¾ | 12⅛ | 9¾ | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 24¼ | 9¾ | 12⅛ | 9¾ | | Royal. D. | 24 | 9⅝ | 12 | 9⅝ | | Royal. W. | 24 | 9⅝ | 12 | 9⅝ | | Medium. P. | 23 | 9 | 11½ | 9 | | Medium. W. | 22½ | 8¾ | 11¼ | 8¾ | | Demy. P. | 22 | 8¾ | 11 | 8¾ | | Demy. D. | 22 | 8½ | 11 | 8½ | | Demy. P. | 21¼ | 9⅝ | 10⅝ | 9⅝ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 21 | 8¼ | 10½ | 8¼ | | Copy, or Bastard. W. | 20¼ | 8 | 10⅛ | 8 | | Demy, Short. D. | 20¼ | 7 | 10⅛ | 7 | | Demy. W. | 20 | 7¾ | 10 | 7¾ | | Crown. D. | 20 | 7½ | 10 | 7½ | | Single Crown. P. | 20 | 7½ | 10 | 7½ | | Thick and Thin Post. W. | 19½ | 7⅝ | 9¾ | 7⅝ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 17½ | 6¾ | 8¾ | 6¾ | | Foolscap. W. | 16¾ | 6¾ | 8⅜ | 6¾ | | Foolscap. D. | 16¾ | 6⅝ | 8⅜ | 6⅝ | | Small Post. W. | 16½ | 6¾ | 8¼ | 6¾ | | Pott. W. | 15½ | 6¼ | 7¾ | 6¼ | +---------------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+

+------------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+----------+ | | Long 4to. | 6mo. | Octavo. | Long 8vo.| | +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.| +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+----+ | Double Atlas. D. | 31½ | 13¾ | 18¼ | 15¾ | 15¾ | 13¾ | 22½ | 7⅞ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. D.} | 26¾ | 10 | 13¼ | 13⅜ | 13⅜ | 10 | 20 | 6⅝ | | Double Demy. P. | 26 | 9⅝ | 12¾ | 13 | 13 | 9⅝ | 19¼ | 6½ | | Columbier. D. | 23½ | 8⅝ | 11½ | 11¾ | 11¾ | 8⅝ | 17¼ | 5⅞ | | Atlas. D. | 26½ | 8½ | 11¼ | 13¼ | 13¼ | 8½ | 17 | 6⅝ | | Atlas, Small. D. | 25 | 7¾ | 10¼ | 12½ | 12½ | 7¾ | 15½ | 6¼ | | Imperial. D. | 22 | 7⅝ | 10⅛ | 11 | 11 | 7⅝ | 15¼ | 5½ | | Imperial. W. | 22 | 7½ | 10 | 11 | 11 | 7½ | 15⅛ | 5½ | | Double Crown. P. | 20 | 7½ | 10 | 10 | 10 | 7½ | 15 | 5 | | Elephant. D. | 23 | 7 | 9¼ | 11½ | 11½ | 7 | 14 | 5¾ | | Super Royal. D. | 19¼ | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6⅞ | 13¾ | 4¾ | | Super Royal. W. | 19¼ | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6⅞ | 13¾ | 4¾ | | Royal, Long. D. | 18 | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 9 | 9 | 6⅞ | 13¾ | 4½ | | Royal. P. | 20 | 6½ | 8⅝ | 10 | 10 | 6½ | 13 | 5 | | Double Pott. P. | 17 | 6⅜ | 8½ | 8½ | 8½ | 6⅜ | 12¾ | 4¼ | | Royal. P. | 19½ | 6 | 8 | 9¾ | 9¾ | 6 | 12⅛ | 4⅞ | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 19½ | 6 | 8 | 9¾ | 9¾ | 6 | 12⅛ | 4⅞ | | Royal. D. | 19¼ | 6 | 8 | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6 | 12 | 4¾ | | Royal. W. | 19¼ | 6 | 8 | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 6 | 12 | 4¾ | | Medium. P. | 18 | 5¾ | 7⅝ | 9 | 9 | 5¾ | 11½ | 4½ | | Medium. W. | 17½ | 5⅝ | 7½ | 8¾ | 8¾ | 5⅝ | 11¼ | 4⅜ | | Demy. P. | 17½ | 5½ | 7¼ | 8¾ | 8¾ | 5½ | 11 | 4⅜ | | Demy. D. | 17 | 5½ | 7½ | 8½ | 8½ | 5½ | 11 | 4¼ | | Demy. P. | 19¼ | 5¼ | 7 | 9⅝ | 9⅝ | 5¼ | 10⅝ | 4⅛ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 16½ | 5¼ | 7 | 8¼ | 8¼ | 5¼ | 10½ | 4⅛ | | Copy, or Bastard. W. | 16 | 5 | 6¾ | 8 | 8 | 5 | 10⅛ | 4 | | Demy, Short. D. | 14 | 5 | 6¾ | 7 | 7 | 5 | 10⅛ | 3½ | | Demy. W. | 15½ | 5 | 6⅝ | 7¾ | 7¾ | 5 | 10 | 3⅞ | | Crown. D. | 15 | 5 | 6⅝ | 7½ | 7½ | 5 | 10 | 3¾ | | Single Crown. P. | 15 | 5 | 6⅝ | 7½ | 7½ | 5 | 10 | 3¾ | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 15¼ | 4⅞ | 6½ | 7⅝ | 7⅝ | 4⅞ | 9¾ | 3¾ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 13½ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 6¾ | 6¾ | 4⅜ | 8¾ | 3⅜ | | Foolscap. W. | 13½ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 6¾ | 6¾ | 4⅛ | 8¾ | 3⅜ | | Foolscap. D. | 13¼ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 4⅛ | 8⅜ | 3¼ | | Small Post. W. | 13½ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 6¾ | 6¾ | 4⅛ | 8¼ | 3⅜ | | Pott. W. | 12½ | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 6¼ | 6¼ | 3⅞ | 7¾ | 3⅛ | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+----+

+------------------------+-----------+----------+-----------+-----------+ | | Nines. | 12mo. | Long l2mo.| Squ. l2mo.| | +-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.|Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. D. | 18¼ | 10½ | 18¼ | 7⅞ | 15¾ | 9⅛ | 13¾ | 10½ | | Grand Eagle, or }| | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. D. }| 13¼ | 8⅞ | 13¼ | 6⅝ | 13⅜ | 6⅝ | 10 | 8⅞ | | Double Demy. P. | 12¾ | 8⅝ | 12¾ | 6½ | 13 | 6⅜ | 9⅝ | 8⅝ | | Columbier. D. | 11½ | 7¾ | 11½ | 5⅞ | 11¾ | 5¾ | 8⅝ | 7¾ | | Atlas. D. | 11¼ | 8¾ | 11¼ | 6⅝ | 13¼ | 5⅝ | 8½ | 8¾ | | Atlas, Small. D. | 10¼ | 8¼ | 10¼ | 6¼ | 12½ | 5⅛ | 7¾ | 8¼ | | Imperial. D. | 10⅛ | 7¼ | 10⅛ | 5½ | 11 | 5 | 7⅝ | 7¼ | | Imperial. W. | 10 | 7¼ | 10 | 5½ | 11 | 5 | 7½ | 7¼ | | Double Crown. P. | 10 | 6⅝ | 10 | 5 | 10 | 5 | 7½ | 6⅝ | | Elephant. D. | 9¼ | 7⅝ | 9¼ | 5¾ | 11½ | 4⅝ | 7 | 7⅝ | | Super Royal. D. | 9⅛ | 6⅜ | 9⅛ | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4¼ | 6⅞ | 6⅜ | | Super Royal. W. | 9⅛ | 6⅜ | 9⅛ | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4½ | 6⅞ | 6⅜ | | Royal, Long. D. | 9⅛ | 6 | 9⅛ | 4½ | 9 | 4½ | 6⅞ | 6 | | Royal. P. | 8⅝ | 6⅝ | 8⅝ | 5 | 10 | 4¼ | 6½ | 6⅝ | | Double Pott. P. | 8½ | 5⅝ | 8½ | 4¼ | 8½ | 4¼ | 6⅜ | 5⅝ | | Royal. P. | 8 | 6½ | 8 | 4⅞ | 9¾ | 4 | 6 | 6½ | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 8 | 6½ | 8 | 4⅞ | 9¾ | 4 | 6 | 6½ | | Royal. D. | 8 | 6⅜ | 8 | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4 | 6 | 6⅜ | | Royal. W. | 8 | 6⅜ | 8 | 4¾ | 9⅝ | 4 | 6 | 6⅜ | | Medium. P. | 7⅝ | 6 | 7⅝ | 4½ | 9 | 3¾ | 5¾ | 6 | | Medium. W. | 7½ | 5¾ | 7½ | 4⅜ | 8¾ | 3¾ | 5⅝ | 5¾ | | Demy. P. | 7¼ | 5¾ | 7¼ | 4⅜ | 8¾ | 3⅝ | 5½ | 5¾ | | Demy. D. | 7½ | 5⅝ | 7½ | 4¼ | 8½ | 3⅝ | 5½ | 5⅝ | | Demy. P. | 7 | 6⅜ | 7 | 4⅞ | 9⅝ | 3½ | 5¼ | 6⅜ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 7 | 5½ | 7 | 4⅛ | 8¼ | 3½ | 5¼ | 5½ | | Copy or Bastard. W. | 6¾ | 5¼ | 6¾ | 4 | 8 | 3⅜ | 5 | 5¼ | | Demy, Short. D. | 6¾ | 4⅝ | 6¾ | 3½ | 7 | 3⅜ | 5 | 4⅝ | | Demy. W. | 6⅝ | 5⅛ | 6⅝ | 3⅞ | 7¾ | 3¼ | 5 | 5⅛ | | Crown. D. | 6⅝ | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¾ | 7½ | 3¼ | 5 | 5 | | Single Crown. P. | 6⅝ | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¾ | 7½ | 3¼ | 5 | 5 | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 6½ | 5 | 6½ | 3¾ | 7⅝ | 3¼ | 4⅞ | 5 | | Littriss Foolscap. | 5¾ | 4½ | 5¾ | 3⅝ | 6¾ | 2⅞ | 4⅜ | 4½ | | Foolscap. W. | 5½ | 4½ | 5½ | 3⅜ | 6¾ | 2¾ | 4⅛ | 4½ | | Foolscap. D. | 5½ | 4⅜ | 5½ | 3¼ | 6⅝ | 2¾ | 4⅛ | 4⅜ | | Small Post. W. | 5½ | 4½ | 5½ | 3⅜ | 6¾ | 2¾ | 4⅛ | 4½ | | Pott. W. | 5⅛ | 4⅛ | 5⅛ | 3⅛ | 6¼ | 2½ | 3⅞ | 4⅛ | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+------------------------+-----------+----------+-----------+-----------+ | | 16mo. | 18mo. | 20mo. | 24mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.|Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. D. | 13¾ | 7⅞ | 10½ | 9⅛ | 11 | 7⅞ | 10½ | 6⅞ | | Grand Eagle, or }| | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. D. }| 10 | 6⅝ | 8⅞ | 6⅝ | 8 | 6⅝ | 8⅞ | 5 | | Double Demy. P. | 9⅝ | 6½ | 8⅝ | 6⅜ | 7⅝ | 6½ | 8⅝ | 4¾ | | Columbier. D. | 8⅝ | 5⅞ | 7¾ | 5¾ | 6⅞ | 5⅞ | 7¾ | 4¼ | | Atlas. D. | 8½ | 6⅝ | 8¾ | 5⅝ | 6¾ | 6⅝ | 8¾ | 4¼ | | Atlas, Small. D. | 7¾ | 6¼ | 8¼ | 5⅛ | 6⅛ | 6¼ | 8¼ | 3⅞ | | Imperial. D. | 7⅝ | 5½ | 7¼ | 5 | 6 | 5½ | 7¼ | 3¾ | | Imperial. W. | 7½ | 5½ | 7¼ | 5 | 6 | 5½ | 7¼ | 3¾ | | Double Crown. P. | 7½ | 5 | 6⅝ | 5 | 6 | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¾ | | Elephant. D. | 7 | 5¾ | 7⅝ | 4⅝ | 5½ | 5¾ | 7⅝ | 3½ | | Super Royal. D. | 6⅞ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4¼ | 5½ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3⅜ | | Super Royal. W. | 6⅞ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4¼ | 5½ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3⅜ | | Royal, Long. D. | 6⅞ | 4½ | 6 | 4½ | 5½ | 4½ | 6 | 3⅜ | | Royal. P. | 6½ | 5 | 6⅝ | 4¼ | 5⅛ | 5 | 6⅝ | 3¼ | | Double Pott. P. | 6⅜ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 4¼ | 5 | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 3⅛ | | Royal. P. | 6 | 4⅞ | 6½ | 4 | 4¾ | 4⅞ | 6½ | 3 | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 6 | 4⅞ | 6½ | 4 | 4¾ | 4⅞ | 6½ | 3 | | Royal. D. | 6 | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3 | | Royal. W. | 6 | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 6⅜ | 3 | | Medium. P. | 5¾ | 4½ | 6 | 3¾ | 4½ | 4½ | 6 | 2⅞ | | Medium. W. | 5⅝ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 3¾ | 4½ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 2¾ | | Demy. P. | 5½ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 3⅝ | 4⅜ | 4⅜ | 5¾ | 2¾ | | Demy. D. | 5½ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 3⅝ | 4⅜ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 2¾ | | Demy. P. | 5¼ | 4⅞ | 6⅜ | 3½ | 4¼ | 4⅞ | 6⅜ | 2⅝ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 5¼ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 3½ | 4⅛ | 4⅛ | 5½ | 2⅝ | | Copy, or Bastard. W. | 5 | 4 | 5¼ | 3⅜ | 4 | 4 | 5¼ | 2½ | | Demy, Short. D. | 5 | 3½ | 4⅝ | 3⅜ | 4 | 3½ | 4⅝ | 2½ | | Demy. W. | 5 | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 3¼ | 4 | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 2½ | | Crown. D. | 5 | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | 4 | 3¾ | 5 | 2½ | | Single Crown. P. | 5 | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | 4 | 3¾ | 5 | 2½ | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 4⅞ | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | 3⅞ | 3¾ | 5 | 2⅜ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 4⅜ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2⅞ | 3½ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2⅛ | | Foolscap. W. | 4⅛ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2¾ | 3¼ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2 | | Foolscap. D. | 4⅛ | 3¼ | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 3¼ | 3¼ | 4⅜ | 2 | | Small Post. W. | 4⅛ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2¾ | 3¼ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 2 | | Pott. W. | 3⅞ | 3⅛ | 4⅛ | 2½ | 3 | 3⅛ | 4⅛ | 1⅞ | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+------------------------+-----------+----------+-----------+-----------+ | | Long 24. | Squ. 24. | 32mo. | 36mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br.|Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. D. | 13¾ | 5¼ | 9⅛ | 7⅞ | 7⅞ | 6⅞ | 9⅛ | 5¼ | | Grand Eagle, or }| | | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. D. }| 10 | 4⅜ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 5 | 6⅝ | 4⅜ | | Double Demy. P. | 9⅝ | 4¼ | 6⅜ | 6½ | 6½ | 4¾ | 6¾ | 4¼ | | Columbier. D. | 8⅝ | 3⅞ | 5¾ | 5⅞ | 5⅞ | 4¼ | 5¾ | 3⅞ | | Atlas. D. | 8½ | 4⅜ | 5⅝ | 6⅝ | 6⅝ | 4¼ | 5⅝ | 4⅜ | | Atlas, Small. D. | 7¾ | 4⅛ | 5⅛ | 6¼ | 6¼ | 3⅞ | 5⅛ | 4⅛ | | Imperial. D. | 7⅝ | 3⅝ | 5 | 5½ | 5½ | 3¾ | 5 | 3⅝ | | Imperial. W. | 7½ | 3⅝ | 5 | 5½ | 5½ | 3¾ | 5 | 3⅝ | | Double Crown. P. | 7½ | 3¼ | 5 | 5 | 5 | 3¾ | 5 | 3¼ | | Elephant. D. | 7 | 3¾ | 4⅝ | 5¾ | 5¾ | 3½ | 4⅝ | 3¾ | | Super Royal. D. | 6⅞ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3⅜ | 4¼ | 3⅛ | | Super Royal. W. | 6⅞ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3⅜ | 4¼ | 3⅛ | | Royal, Long. D. | 6⅞ | 3 | 4½ | 4½ | 4½ | 3⅜ | 4½ | 3 | | Royal. P. | 6½ | 3¼ | 4¼ | 5 | 5 | 3¼ | 4¼ | 3¼ | | Double Pott. P. | 6⅜ | 2¾ | 4¼ | 4¼ | 4¼ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 2¾ | | Royal. P. | 6 | 3¼ | 4 | 4⅞ | 4⅞ | 3 | 4 | 3¼ | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 6 | 3¼ | 4 | 4⅞ | 4⅞ | 3 | 4 | 3¼ | | Royal. D. | 6 | 3⅛ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3 | 4 | 3⅛ | | Royal. W. | 6 | 3⅛ | 4 | 4¾ | 4¾ | 3 | 4 | 3⅛ | | Medium. P. | 5¾ | 3 | 3¾ | 4½ | 4½ | 2⅞ | 3¾ | 3 | | Medium. W. | 5⅝ | 2⅞ | 3¾ | 4⅜ | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 3¾ | 2⅞ | | Demy. P. | 5½ | 2⅞ | 3⅝ | 4⅜ | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 3⅝ | 2⅞ | | Demy. D. | 5½ | 2¾ | 3⅝ | 4¼ | 4¼ | 2¾ | 3⅝ | 2¾ | | Demy. P. | 5¼ | 3⅛ | 3½ | 4⅞ | 4⅞ | 2⅝ | 3½ | 3⅛ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 5¼ | 2¾ | 3½ | 4⅛ | 4⅛ | 2⅝ | 3½ | 2¾ | | Copy, or Bastard. W. | 5 | 2⅝ | 3⅜ | 4 | 4 | 2½ | 3⅜ | 2⅝ | | Demy, Short. D. | 5 | 2¼ | 3⅜ | 3½ | 3½ | 2½ | 3⅜ | 2¼ | | Demy. W. | 5 | 2½ | 3¼ | 3⅞ | 3⅞ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Crown. D. | 5 | 2½ | 3¼ | 3¾ | 3¾ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Single Crown. P. | 5 | 2½ | 3¼ | 3¾ | 3¾ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Thick and Thin Post. W.| 4⅞ | 2½ | 3¼ | 3¾ | 3¾ | 2⅜ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 4¾ | 2¼ | 2⅞ | 3⅜ | 3⅜ | 2⅛ | 2⅞ | 2¼ | | Foolscap. W. | 4⅛ | 2¼ | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 3⅜ | 2 | 2¾ | 2¼ | | Foolscap. D. | 4⅛ | 2⅛ | 2⅜ | 3¼ | 3¼ | 2 | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Small Post. W. | 4⅛ | 2¼ | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 3⅜ | 2 | 2¾ | 2¼ | | Pott. W. | 3⅞ | 2 | 2½ | 3⅛ | 3⅛ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 2 | +------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+---------------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+ | | 40mo. | 48mo. | 64mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. D. | 6⅞ | 6¼ | 9⅛ | 3⅞ | 6⅞ | 3⅞ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. D. } | 5 | 5¼ | 6⅝ | 3¼ | 5 | 3¼ | | Double Demy. P. | 4¾ | 5⅛ | 6⅜ | 3¼ | 4¾ | 3¼ | | Columbier. D. | 4¼ | 4⅝ | 5¾ | 2⅞ | 4¼ | 2⅞ | | Atlas. D. | 4¼ | 5¼ | 5⅝ | 3¼ | 4¼ | 3¼ | | Atlas, Small. D. | 3⅞ | 5 | 5⅛ | 3⅛ | 3⅞ | 3⅛ | | Imperial. D. | 3¾ | 4⅜ | 5 | 2¾ | 3¾ | 2¾ | | Imperial. W. | 3¾ | 4⅜ | 5 | 2¾ | 3¾ | 2¾ | | Double Crown. P. | 3¾ | 4 | 5 | 2½ | 3¾ | 2½ | | Elephant. D. | 3½ | 4½ | 4⅝ | 2⅞ | 3½ | 2⅞ | | Super Royal. D. | 3⅜ | 3¾ | 4¼ | 2⅜ | 3⅜ | 2⅜ | | |Super Royal. W. | 3⅜ | 3¾ | 4¼ | 2⅜ | 3⅜ | 2⅜ | | Royal, Long. D. | 3⅜ | 3½ | 4½ | 2¼ | 3⅜ | 2¼ | | Royal. P. | 3¼ | 4 | 4¼ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Double Pott. P. | 3⅛ | 3⅜ | 4¼ | 2⅛ | 3⅛ | 2⅛ | | Royal. P. | 3 | 3⅞ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 3 | 3⅞ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Royal. D. | 3 | 3¾ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Royal. W. | 3 | 3¾ | 4 | 2⅜ | 3 | 2⅜ | | Medium. P. | 2⅞ | 3½ | 3¾ | 2¼ | 2⅞ | 2¼ | | Medium. W. | 2¾ | 3½ | 3¾ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Demy. P. | 2¾ | 3½ | 3⅝ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Demy. D. | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 3⅝ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 2⅛ | | Demy. P. | 2⅝ | 3¾ | 3½ | 2⅜ | 2⅝ | 2⅜ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 2⅝ | 3¼ | 3½ | 2 | 2⅝ | 2 | | Copy, or Bastard. W. | 2½ | 3⅛ | 3⅜ | 2 | 2½ | 2 | | Demy, Short. D. | 2½ | 2¾ | 3⅜ | 1¾ | 2½ | 1¾ | | Demy. W. | 2½ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Crown. D. | 2½ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Single Crown. P. | 2½ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Thick and Thin Post. W. | 2⅜ | 3 | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2⅜ | 1⅞ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 2⅛ | 2⅝ | 2⅞ | 1⅝ | 2⅛ | 1⅝ | | Foolscap. W. | 2 | 2⅝ | 2¾ | 1⅝ | 2 | 1⅝ | | Foolscap. D. | 2 | 2⅝ | 2¾ | 1⅝ | 2 | 1⅝ | | Small Post. W. | 2 | 2⅝ | 2¾ | 1⅝ | 2 | 1⅝ | | Pott. W. | 1⅞ | 2½ | 2½ | 1½ | 1⅞ | 1½ | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

+---------------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+ | | 72mo. | 96mo. | 128mo. | | +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. |Long.| Br. | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+ | Double Atlas. D. | 5¼ | 4½ | 5¼ | 3⅜ | 3⅞ | 3⅜ | | Grand Eagle, or } | | | | | | | | Double Elephant. D. } | 4⅜ | 3¼ | 4⅜ | 2½ | 3¼ | 2½ | | Double Demy. P. | 4¼ | 3⅛ | 4¼ | 2⅜ | 3¼ | 2⅜ | | Columbier. D. | 3⅞ | 2⅞ | 3⅞ | 2⅛ | 2⅞ | 2⅛ | | Atlas. D. | 4⅜ | 2¾ | 4⅜ | 2⅛ | 3¼ | 2⅛ | | Atlas, Small. D. | 4⅛ | 2½ | 4⅛ | 1⅞ | 3⅛ | 1⅞ | | Imperial. D. | 3⅝ | 2½ | 3⅝ | 1⅞ | 2¾ | 1⅞ | | Imperial. W. | 3⅝ | 2½ | 3⅝ | 1⅞ | 2¾ | 1⅞ | | Double Crown. P. | 3¼ | 2½ | 3¼ | 1⅞ | 2½ | 1⅞ | | Elephant. D. | 3¾ | 2¼ | 3¾ | 1¾ | 2⅞ | 1¾ | | Super Royal. D. | 3⅛ | 2¼ | 3⅛ | 1⅝ | 2⅜ | 1⅝ | | Super Royal. W. | 3⅛ | 2¼ | 3⅛ | 1⅝ | 2⅜ | 1⅝ | | Royal, Long. D. | 3 | 2¼ | 3 | 1⅝ | 2¼ | 1⅝ | | Royal. P. | 3¼ | 2⅛ | 3¼ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1⅝ | | Double Pott. P. | 2¾ | 2⅛ | 2¾ | 1½ | 2⅛ | 1½ | | Royal. P. | 3¼ | 2 | 3¼ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Royal, Inferior. P. | 3¼ | 2 | 3¼ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Royal. D. | 3⅛ | 2 | 3⅛ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Royal. W. | 3⅛ | 2 | 3⅛ | 1½ | 2⅜ | 1½ | | Medium. P. | 3 | 1⅞ | 3 | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1⅜ | | Medium. W. | 2⅞ | 1⅞ | 2⅞ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | | Demy. P. | 2⅞ | 1¾ | 2⅞ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | | Demy. D. | 2¾ | 1¾ | 2¾ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | | Demy. P. | 3⅛ | 1¾ | 3⅛ | 1¼ | 2⅜ | 1¼ | | Extra Large Post. W. | 2¾ | 1¾ | 2¾ | 1¼ | 2 | 1¼ | | Copy, or Bastard. W. | 2⅝ | 1⅝ | 2⅝ | 1¼ | 2 | 1¼ | | Demy, Short. D. | 2¼ | 1⅝ | 2¼ | 1¼ | 1¾ | 1¼ | | Demy. W. | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1¼ | 1⅞ | 1¼ | | Crown. D. | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1¼ | 1⅞ | 1¼ | | Single Crown. P. | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1¼ | 1⅞ | 1¼ | | Thick and Thin Post. W. | 2½ | 1⅝ | 2½ | 1⅛ | 1⅞ | 1⅛ | | Littriss Foolscap. | 2¼ | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Foolscap. W. | 2¼ | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Foolscap. D. | 2⅛ | 1⅜ | 2⅛ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Small Post. W. | 2¼ | 1⅜ | 2¼ | 1 | 1⅝ | 1 | | Pott. W. | 2 | 1¼ | 2 | ⅞ | 1½ | ⅞ | +---------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

See FORGERY. INDIA PAPER. PLATE PAPER.

10 Geo. 2. c. 27. s. 4. Drawbacks.--“And whereas the Drawbacks allowed upon the Exportation of foreign Paper tend to the great Discouragement of the Manufacture of Paper within the Kingdom of Great Britain; Be it therefore enacted, by the Authority aforesaid, That from and after the twenty-fourth Day of June One thousand seven hundred and thirty-seven, there shall not be allowed or made on the Re-exportation of any foreign Paper any Drawback or Repayment of any of the Customs or Duties charged and paid on the Importation thereof into this Kingdom, by any Act or Acts of Parliament; any Law, Custom, or Usage to the contrary thereof in anywise notwithstanding.”

2 & 3 Vict. c. 23. “An Act to consolidate and amend the Laws for collecting and securing the Duties of Excise on Paper made in the United Kingdom.

“Whereas the Laws for collecting and securing the Duties of Excise on Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, have become numerous and complicated, and it is expedient to consolidate and amend the same; Be it therefore enacted, by the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons, in this present Parliament assembled, and by the Authority of the same, That there shall be raised, levied, and collected, allowed, granted, and paid, the Duties, Allowances, and Drawbacks of Excise following; (that is to say,)

Duties.--“On every Pound Weight Avoirdupois of all Paper, Glazed Paper, Sheathing Paper, Button Paper, or by whatsoever Name any Paper may be known, and on all Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board made in the United Kingdom, a Duty of One Penny Halfpenny:

Allowances.--“For all such Glazed or other Press Papers, made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom, for Clothiers and Hotpressers, as shall be actually and bonâ fide used, employed, and consumed in the pressing Woollen Cloths and Stuffs in the United Kingdom, an Allowance of One Penny Halfpenny the Pound Avoirdupois:

“For all Paper made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom which shall be used in the printing of any Books in the Latin, Greek, Oriental, or Northern Languages within the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, or within the Universities of Scotland, or the College of the Holy and Undivided Trinity of Queen Elizabeth, Dublin, by Permission of the Vice Chancellors, Rectors, or Principals or Provost of the said Universities respectively, or which shall be used in the printing of Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, Books of Common Prayer of the Church of England, the Book commonly called or known in Scotland by the Name of ‘The Confession of Faith,’ or the Larger or Shorter Catechism of the Church of Scotland, within the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, and Trinity College, Dublin, by Permission of the Vice Chancellors or Provost of the same, or by the Queen’s Printers in England, Scotland, and Ireland respectively, an Allowance of One Penny Halfpenny the Pound Avoirdupois:

“For every Pound Weight Avoirdupois of all Paper, Sheathing Paper, Button Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom, and which shall be duly exported as Merchandize, a Drawback of One Penny Halfpenny:

“For every Pound Weight Avoirdupois of printed Books in perfect and complete Sets, or, if periodical Publications, in perfect Parts or Numbers, and of blank, plain, or ruled Account Books, whether bound or unbound, made of or printed or ruled on Paper made and charged with Duty in the United Kingdom, and which shall be exported as Merchandize, a Drawback of One Penny Halfpenny:

“For every Dozen Square Yards of Paper made and charged with Duty, and printed, painted, or stained, in the United Kingdom, and exported as Merchandize, a Drawback of Two-pence.”

Stamps.--s. 8. “And be it enacted, That the Commissioners of Excise shall and they are hereby required to provide or cause to be provided proper Stamps, with such Marks and Devices thereon as they shall see fit for marking or stamping all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, to denote the Duty being charged thereon, when made and tied up in the Manner herein-after directed, and shall cause such Stamps to be delivered to the Officers of Excise for that Purpose; and it shall be lawful for the said Commissioners of Excise to cause the said Stamps, or the Marks and Devices thereon, to be altered or varied as they shall from Time to Time see fit.

Labels.--s. 9. “And be it enacted, That the Commissioners of Excise shall and they are hereby required to provide, and from Time to Time to cause to be issued to every Supervisor of Excise in whose District any Paper Mill shall be situated, or in which any Maker of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall carry on his Manufacture, a sufficient Number of Labels, of such Form and Construction and with such Devices thereon as the said Commissioners shall deem fit and proper, to be used in the tying up of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, as herein-after by this Act directed; and every such Paper Maker shall, on his Request in Writing given to the proper Officer of Excise, specifying therein the Number of Labels which such Maker may require, be within Four Days after the Receipt of such Request supplied by such Officer with the Number of Labels required, each Label being signed by the Supervisor of the District for the Time being, and marked by such Supervisor with the Number or Letter or Number and Letter by which the Mill of such Paper Maker is then distinguished in the Books of the Excise; and every such Paper Maker, or his chief Workman or Servant, shall, at the Time of the Delivery of such Labels, give on the Back of the Request Note requiring the same a Receipt in Writing, signed by him, for the said Number of Labels delivered to him by the Officer of Excise; and all such Labels shall at all Times, when demanded by any Supervisor of Excise, or other Officer of Excise of equal or superior Rank, be delivered to the Supervisor or other such Officer demanding the same; and every Paper Maker who shall, by himself or his chief Workman or Servant, refuse to give such Receipt as aforesaid for the Labels delivered to him, or who shall destroy, cancel, or obliterate any such Label, or shall sell or dispose of or use any such Label for any other Purpose than in tying up Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board as herein-after directed, or shall suffer the same to be done, or who shall refuse to produce or deliver to any Supervisor or other such Officer as aforesaid demanding the same any such Label or Labels, or shall not satisfactorily account for any Label which shall be at any Time missing, shall forfeit for every Label so delivered to him, and for which a Receipt shall not be given, or which shall be cancelled, obliterated, or destroyed, sold or disposed of, or improperly used or not produced or accounted for, Ten Pounds.

s. 10. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker shall cause all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board made by him to be made up into Reams or Half Reams or Parcels, and shall also cause every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel to be enclosed in a Wrapper or Wrappers, on or to which Wrappers, or One of them if Two are made use of, One of the Labels herein-before directed to be provided and delivered to Paper Makers shall have been previously firmly and permanently fixed and united with Paste or Glue or other binding Cement, and pressed and dried thereon, and which Label, when such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel is tied up, shall be on the Top thereof, or on such other Part of the Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct; and every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel shall, as soon as made up and enclosed in the Wrapper or Wrappers, be immediately firmly and securely tied up with strong Thread or String; and when and so soon as any Ream or Half Ream or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, shall be tied up in manner aforesaid, the Maker thereof shall write or print, in large and legible Letters, with durable Ink, on the Label affixed on the Top thereof as aforesaid, the Description or Denomination and the Contents of such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, whether Paper, Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, or Button-paper, or Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board; and every Paper Maker who shall neglect or refuse to enclose and tie up any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, in a Wrapper or Wrappers, to which, or to One of which Wrappers, One of such Labels shall have been affixed according to the Directions herein-before given, or immediately to write or print in manner aforesaid the Particulars required to be written or printed on the Label affixed on each Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, shall forfeit Ten Pounds for every Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel not enclosed and tied up according to the Directions aforesaid, or not having written or printed in manner aforesaid on the Label affixed to the Wrapper the Particulars herein-before required to be written or printed thereon, and every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel shall also be forfeited.

s. 11. “And be it enacted, That a Ream of Paper, other than Glazed-paper, Sheathing or Button Paper, shall consist of Twenty Quires, each Quire containing Twenty-four Sheets, or Forty Half Quires, each Half Quire being Twelve Sheets; and a Half Ream of Paper shall consist of Ten Quires, or Twenty Half Quires, save and except the Ream or Half Ream of Paper for printing, which may consist of any Number of Sheets not exceeding Five hundred and sixteen Sheets the Ream, or Two hundred and fifty-eight Sheets the Half Ream, and save and except the outside Quires of any Ream of Paper, which may consist of any Number of Sheets not less than Twenty nor more than Twenty-four; and a Parcel of Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, Button-paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall consist of even Dozens of Sheets of one and the same Denomination or Description, and of equal Dimensions, and not less than Twenty-four nor more than Seventy-two such Sheets in each Parcel; and all Paper, Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, Button-paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board which shall be made up or tied up in any other Quantities than as aforesaid shall be forfeited.

s. 12. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That if from the Size of the Sheets, or from any other Cause, it shall be necessary for any Paper Maker to make and tie up any Paper, other than Glazed-paper, Sheathing-paper, or Button-paper, in any less Quantities than a Ream or Half Ream, it shall be lawful for such Paper Maker to make and tie up such Paper in Parcels containing a less Number of Sheets than a Ream or Half Ream, provided that he write and specify on the Label attached to the Wrapper of such Parcel the true Number of Sheets of Paper contained therein: Provided always, that no Paper shall be made up into any such Parcel or into any Half Ream weighing less than Twenty Pounds.

s. 13. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful for any Paper Maker, before tying up any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board into Reams, Half Reams, or Parcels, to cut the Edges thereof, and also for any Paper Maker to make his Paper into Quires without folding the same, such Quires, when made up into Reams or Half Reams, being separated by a Slip of coloured Paper.

s. 14. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker shall, at the Time when any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board is tied up as herein-before directed, or at or before the Time when the same is or shall be produced to be weighed and charged with Duty by the Officer of Excise, write on the Label on every such Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel respectively the Weight thereof in large and legible Letters, and in Words at Length, joining to the Words expressing the Weight the Letters “lbs.,” or the Word “Pounds,” on pain of forfeiting for every Omission or Neglect the Sum of Ten Pounds, and the Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board.”

s. 17. “And whereas it is expedient to make Provision for Paper being tied up and charged with Duty, and sent out in single Sheets on the Rollers on which the same may be rolled or received from the Machine, without cutting or making the same up into Reams; be it enacted, That every Paper Maker who shall intend so to send out any Paper shall, before using any Roller or Rollers, mark the true Weight of every such Roller in legible Letters or Numbers on the End thereof, and shall continue the same so marked, and shall upon each Occasion of using the same produce every such Roller so marked to the Officer of Excise surveying his Mill, who shall ascertain that such Weight is correctly marked, and shall sign his Name or Initials under such Mark; and every such Paper Maker shall cause all such Paper, as soon as received from the Machine, to be tied up, as herein-before directed, in a Wrapper or Wrappers, on or to which, or One of them, a Label has been firmly and permanently fixed and united, but in such Manner that the End of the Roller having the Weight thereof marked thereon shall be open and visible to the Officer of Excise, and shall write upon such Label all the Particulars herein-before required to be written by the Paper Maker on the Label; and it shall be lawful for the Officer of Excise weighing and charging with Duty any such Paper, and he is hereby empowered and required, to deduct and allow from the Weight thereof the even Pounds (Fractions of a Pound being disregarded) marked on the End of the Roller on which each Parcel of such Paper shall be rolled, and the Remainder shall be taken as the Weight of the Paper on which the Duty shall be charged: Provided always, that no such Deduction or Allowance shall be made in the Case of any Paper which shall be produced to the Officer of Excise in any Parcel not having the End of the Roller open and visible to the Officer of Excise, or rolled on any Roller which shall not have the true Weight legibly and clearly marked on the End thereof as herein-before directed.”

s. 24. “And be enacted, That every Paper Maker who, after any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been so made and tied up, and the Particulars herein-before required written or printed on the Label on the Wrapper thereof, shall, either before or after such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been weighed and charged with Duty by the Officer of Excise, make any false Entry on the Label affixed on the Cover or Wrapper of any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or deface, obliterate, extract, or fraudulently alter any of the Particulars written or printed by such Paper Maker, or by the Officer of Excise, or shall take off, remove, or detach, or cause or permit or suffer to be taken off or removed or detached, any such Label from the Cover or Wrapper of any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, made and tied up under the Directions of this Act, or who shall use any Label, or any Wrapper to which any Label is affixed, to cover or tie up any other Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board than that contained in such Wrapper, with such Label when first tied up, or who shall, after any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been weighed and charged with Duty, open any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, and remove any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board out of the Wrapper or Wrappers in which the same shall have been so weighed and charged, or who shall add any other Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board thereto, or shall in any respect make any Alteration in any such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel, shall for every such Label, Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel respectively in respect of which any such Offence shall be committed forfeit Twenty Pounds, and every such Label and Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel, with the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board contained therein, shall also be forfeited.”

s. 26. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker who shall sell, send out, deliver, or remove any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board without the same being tied up in a Wrapper or Wrappers on which, or on the uppermost of which, One of such Labels as is by this Act required shall have been permanently affixed, or not having written or printed on the Label affixed to the Wrapper all the Particulars by this Act required to be written and printed on such Label, shall, in respect of every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel so sold, sent out, delivered, or removed, forfeit Twenty Pounds, and every such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel which shall be found in the Possession of any Person not having such Label, with the Particulars aforesaid thereon, shall also be forfeited.

s. 27. “And be it enacted, That if any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall at any Time, on being weighed by any Officer of Excise, either at the Mill where manufactured or elsewhere, be found to weigh under or over the Weight marked, written, or printed on such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel by the Maker thereof as herein-before required, in the Proportion of Five per Centum if the Weight marked on such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel exceed Twenty Pounds, or Ten per Centum if such Weight be Twenty Pounds or less, the same shall be forfeited.”

s. 37. “And be it enacted, That no Stationer or Printer or Paper Stainer, or Maker of Paste-board not a Maker of Paper, shall receive into his Custody or Possession, nor shall any other Person remove or receive from any Mill, any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board which shall not be an entire Ream or Half Ream or Parcel, enclosed in a Wrapper or Wrappers having a Label thereon, with such Particulars as are herein-before required written thereon, together with the Impressions of the Officer’s Stamp denoting the Charge of Duty, on pain of forfeiting One hundred Pounds; and all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board so received, and all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board which shall be found in the Custody or Possession of any Stationer or Printer or Paper Stainer, or Maker of Paste-board not a Maker of Paper, (not being broken Reams, or Parcels for immediate Sale, Use, or Consumption,) without being enclosed in a Wrapper so labelled, and with such Impressions of the Duty Stamp thereon as aforesaid, shall be forfeited, and the Stationer or Printer or Paper Stainer or Maker of Paste-board in whose Possession the same shall be found shall forfeit Fifty Pounds: Provided always, that nothing herein contained shall extend to subject any Stationer to the said first-mentioned Penalty for or by reason of his obtaining or receiving from any other Stationer any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board in less Quantity than a Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel for immediate Use.

s. 38. “And be it enacted, That every Person shall, on opening any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board received into their Possession, immediately write in large Letters in Ink upon the Label attached to the Wrapper the Word “Opened,” or shall across such Label with Ink or otherwise permanently cancel, obliterate, and deface the same, so as to prevent the said Label from being again made use of by any Paper Maker; and every Person who shall not, on opening any such Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel as aforesaid, immediately so write on or cross or otherwise cancel, obliterate, or deface such Label, or in whose Possession any such Label, whether attached or not to any Wrapper which shall have been opened, shall be found not so written upon, crossed, or otherwise cancelled, shall forfeit for each such Label Ten Pounds, and every such Label, with any Wrapper to which the same may be attached, shall also be forfeited.

s. 39. “And be it enacted, That every Person who shall restore, return, send, or deliver, or cause or procure, permit or suffer, to be restored, returned, sent, or delivered, to any Paper Maker, or to any Mill, Warehouse, Room, or Place, belonging to any Paper Maker, or to any other Place for the Use of any Paper Maker, any Wrapper or Label which has been before used as a Wrapper or Label in tying up any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or which shall be marked and stamped with the Marks, Stamps, or Impressions directed by this Act to be marked and stamped on the Labels attached to and the Wrappers enclosing any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, and every Paper Maker who shall receive, or shall cause, procure, permit, or suffer to be returned, sent, or delivered to him, or to be kept or deposited at any Mill, Warehouse, Room, or Place belonging to him, or at any other Place for his Use, or who shall have in his Custody or Possession, any Wrapper or Label which has been before used as a Wrapper or Label to any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or in or with which any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board has been removed, carried, or sent out by any Paper Maker, shall forfeit Two hundred Pounds; and every Workman and Servant of any Paper Maker in whose Custody or Possession any such Wrapper or Label shall be found shall also forfeit Fifty Pounds, over and above any Penalty to which the Paper Maker may thereby become subject.

s. 40. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That nothing herein-before contained shall extend or be deemed or construed to extend to render liable to the said Penalty of Two hundred Pounds any Person for or by reason of such Person returning or sending back to any Paper Maker any Wrapper, with the Label thereon, which shall have been opened, containing therein the same identical Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board received by such Person, and by him returned on account of the same being disliked or refused, nor to render liable to the said Penalty any Paper Maker for receiving back the said Label and Wrapper containing such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board.

s. 41. “And be it enacted, That every Stationer or other Person who shall have bought, received, or agreed for any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board respectively which may be forfeited or liable to Seizure under this or any other Act relating to the Revenue of Excise, and who shall discover to and inform any Officer of Excise thereof, so as to cause the Seizure of the same, shall, on the Condemnation of the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board so seized by the Officer, be paid, by Order of the Commissioners of Excise, the Value of all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board which shall be so seized and condemned, and for which such Stationer or other Person shall have actually paid or be liable to pay and shall pay, and such Payment shall be deemed a Part of the Expences attending the Seizure.

s. 42. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker and other Person who shall counterfeit, forge, or imitate, or cause or procure to be counterfeited, forged, or imitated, any Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, or any Figure, Letter, or Part of any Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, directed to be provided and used in pursuance of this Act, or which shall have been provided in pursuance of any other Act in force for securing the Duties on Paper at the passing of this Act; or shall have in his Custody or Possession any such counterfeit, forged, or false Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, or any counterfeit, forged, or false Figure, Letter, or Part of any such Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, knowing the same to be counterfeit, forged, or false; or who shall, upon any Wrapper used or to be used for tying up any Quantity of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or upon any such Label as aforesaid, counterfeit, forge, or imitate, or cause or procure to be counterfeited, forged, or imitated, the Mark or Impression of any such Stamp, Die, or Device, or of any Figure, Letter, Character, or Part of such Stamp, Die, or Device, or shall knowingly have the same in his Custody or Possession; or who shall have in his Custody or Possession, or utter, vend, or sell, any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board with a counterfeited, forged, false, or imitated Mark or Impression of any such Stamp, Die, or Device, or any Figure, Letter, Character, or Part thereof, on the Wrapper of such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or on the Label affixed thereto or thereon, or with any false, counterfeit, or forged Label aforesaid, or any false, counterfeit, or forged Figure, Letter, Character, or Part of such Label as aforesaid, or with any false, counterfeited, or forged Printing or Writing on any such Label, knowing the same or any Part thereof to be counterfeited or forged; or who shall upon any Quantity of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board put or place any Wrapper or Part of any Wrapper, or any Label or Part of any Label, having thereon or therein any false, counterfeit, or forged Writing, Printing, Letter, Figure, Character, Mark, or Impression, knowing the same to be false, counterfeited, and forged; or who shall, upon any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board not taken account of and charged with Duty by the proper Officer of Excise put or place any of the Stamps or Impressions directed by or provided or used in pursuance of this Act or any such other Acts as aforesaid; shall for every such false, counterfeit, or forged Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, or Figure, Letter, Character, or Part of such Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, forfeit and lose the Sum of One thousand Pounds, and for every such Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel respectively the Sum of Five hundred Pounds; and every such false, counterfeited, and forged Stamp, Die, Device, and Label, Figure, Letter, Character, and Part of such Stamp, Die, Device, or Label, and every such false, counterfeit, and forged Impression, and every such Wrapper, Ream, Half Ream, and Parcel respectively, shall be forfeited.

s. 43. “And be it enacted, That every Paper Maker, Stationer, or other Person who shall alter the distinguishing Letter or Number of any Mill on the Label attached to the Wrapper of any Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, save and except in the Case of Paper sent from one Mill to another, or returned to any Mill, under the Provisions herein-before contained, or who shall alter the Weight inserted on any such Label, shall forfeit Twenty Pounds, together with the Ream, Half Ream, or Parcel to which such Label shall be attached.

s. 44. “And be it enacted, That the Allowance of the Duty on Paper used in the printing of Books in the Latin, Greek, Oriental, or Northern Languages within the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, the Universities of Scotland, and the University of Trinity College, Dublin, shall be made and allowed in manner following; (that is to say,) the chief Manager of the Press in the said Universities respectively shall, Forty-eight Hours before any such Paper shall be begun to be printed, give to the proper Officer of Excise a Notice in Writing of the Intention to print such Paper, specifying the Number of Reams of Paper and the Title of the Book intended to be printed, and of how many Copies the Edition is to consist; and upon the Attendance of the Officer of Excise all such Paper shall be produced to him enclosed in the original Wrappers in which the same was charged with Duty, with the respective Labels thereon, and the several Matters herein-before prescribed to be marked, written, or printed and stamped on such Labels and Wrappers remaining thereon; and such chief Manager of the Press shall provide sufficient Scales and Weights, and shall permit and assist such Officer to use the same, and to ascertain the Weight of such Paper; and within One Month after the whole of such Edition shall have been printed off such chief Manager shall give to the proper Officer of Excise Forty-eight Hours Notice in Writing, specifying a Day and Hour when such Edition will be ready to be produced to him, and thereupon such Officer shall attend and examine and weigh the whole of such Edition unbound and in Sheets, and thereupon give to such chief Manager a Certificate of his having so done, specifying the Name of the Book, the Size thereof, the Number of Copies of which the Edition consists, and the Weight of the Paper on which it is printed; but if such Weight shall exceed the Weight of the Paper taken account of by the Officer previous to the Printing, such last-mentioned Weight shall be inserted in the Certificate, and the Allowance shall be made for no more.

s. 45. “And be it enacted, That the Chief Manager of the Press in the said Universities respectively shall make and subscribe at the Foot or on the Back of such Certificate as aforesaid, before the Vice Chancellor, Principal, or Rector or Provost of the University respectively, a Declaration in Writing setting forth that the whole of the Edition of the Book so printed was and is printed for the University for which the same expresses to be printed, and that no Bookseller or other Person had or hath any Share or Interest therein, or in the Allowance payable in respect of the Paper on which the same was or is printed.

s. 46. “And be it enacted, That the Allowance of the Duty on Paper used in the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, and in the University of Trinity College, Dublin, or used by the Queen’s Printers in England, Scotland, or Ireland respectively, in the printing of Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, Books of Common Prayer of the Church of England, the Book commonly known in Scotland by the Name of ‘The Confession of Faith,’ or the Larger or Shorter Catechism of the Church of Scotland, shall be made and allowed in manner following; (that is to say,) the chief Manager of the Press of such Universities respectively, or such Queen’s Printers respectively, shall, Forty-eight Hours before any such Paper is begun to be prepared for printing, give to the proper Officer of Excise a Notice in Writing of the Intention to print such Paper, specifying in such Notice the Number of Reams of Paper so intended to be printed, and whether the same is to be printed for Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, Common Prayer Books, Books of Confession of Faith, or the Larger or Shorter Catechism, of what Size the intended Impression or Edition of such Book is to be, and of how many Copies the same is to consist; and all the Paper intended to be used shall, on the Attendance of the Officer of Excise, be produced to him enclosed in the original Wrappers in which the same was charged with Duty, with the respective Labels thereon, and the several Matters herein-before prescribed to be marked, written, or printed and stamped on such Labels and Wrappers remaining thereon; and such chief Managers and Queen’s Printers respectively shall provide good and sufficient Scales and Weights, and shall permit and assist the Officer of Excise to use the same, and to ascertain and take an Account of the true Quantity and Weight of such Paper; and such chief Managers of the Press and such Queen’s Printers respectively shall, within One Month after the whole of such Impression or Edition shall have been printed off and finished, give to the proper Officer of Excise Forty-eight Hours Notice thereof in Writing, specifying a Day and Hour when such Impression or Edition will be ready to be produced to him, and thereupon such Officer of Excise shall attend, and inspect, examine, and weigh the whole of such Edition unbound and in Sheets, and shall thereupon give and deliver to such chief Manager of the Press or Queen’s Printer, as the Case may be, a Certificate in Writing of his having so done, specifying therein the Name of the Book, together with the Size thereof, and the Number of Copies of which such Impression or Edition consists, and the Weight of the Paper on which the same is printed; but if such Weight shall exceed the Weight of the Paper actually produced to and taken account of by the Officer of Excise previous to the printing thereof as aforesaid, then and in such Case such last mentioned Weight shall be inserted in such Certificate, and the Allowance shall be made for no greater Weight than the Weight specified in such Certificate.

s. 47. “And be it enacted, That the chief Manager of the Press in the said Universities respectively shall make and subscribe, at the Foot or on the Back of such Certificate, before the Vice Chancellor or Provost of the University, a Declaration in Writing setting forth that no Drawback or Allowance has been before granted or paid on such Paper, and that the whole of the Edition of such Book so printed is printed for the University for which the same expresses to be printed, and that no Bookseller or other Person had or hath any Share or Interest therein, or in the Allowance payable in respect of the Paper on which the same is printed; and the Queen’s Printers in England, Scotland, and Ireland respectively, or the acting Patentee in such Office, shall make and subscribe, at the Foot or on the Back of such Certificate, before the Commissioners of Excise, or such Person as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct and appoint to receive the same, a Declaration in Writing setting forth that no Drawback or Allowance has been before claimed or paid for or in respect of the Paper mentioned in such Certificate, or any Part thereof, and that the whole of such Impression or Edition of such Bible, Testament, Psalm Book, Book of Common Prayer, Confession of Faith, or Larger or Shorter Catechism, has been printed by him or them at his or their usual and ordinary Printing House, on his or their own Account, under and by virtue of the exclusive Patent or Privilege belonging to him or them as such Queen’s Printer, and for his or their sole and entire Benefit, Profit, Emolument, and Advantage.

s. 48. “And be it enacted, That on the said Certificates respectively, with such Declaration as aforesaid made and subscribed thereon, being produced to the Commissioners of Excise, the said Commissioners shall and they are hereby required, on being satisfied of the Correctness thereof, to cause Payment of the Amount of the Allowance appearing by such Certificate to be due to be made to the chief Manager of the Press of the said Universities respectively, or to such Person as the Vice Chancellor, Principal, or Rector or Provost of the said Universities respectively shall appoint to receive the same, or to such Queen’s Printer by whom or on whose Behalf such Certificate shall be produced, as the Case may be.

s. 49. “And be it enacted, That no such Allowance shall be granted or paid on any Book in the Latin, Greek, or Oriental or Northern Languages, unless such Book shall be wholly printed in the Latin, Greek, Oriental or Northern Languages, as the Case may be: Provided always, that it shall be lawful for the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, if they shall see fit, to direct such Allowance to be made and granted on any Book partly in the Latin, Greek, or Oriental or Northern Languages, and partly in the English or any other Language.

s. 50. “And be it enacted, That every House, Office, or Place heretofore approved of or which may hereafter be approved of by the Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury, in which the Queen’s Printers in England, Scotland, and Ireland respectively shall have printed or may hereafter print, by themselves or their own bonâ fide Agents, and not by others, and for their own sole and undivided Interest, the whole of any Impression or Edition of any Bible, Testament, Psalm Book, Book of Common Prayer, Confession of Faith, or Larger or Shorter Catechism, shall be deemed and taken to be an ordinary and usual Printing House of such Queen’s Printer within the Meaning of this Act for entitling such Queen’s Printer to the Allowances aforesaid.”

s. 52. “And be it enacted, That every Person intending to export any Paper, or any Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, as Merchandize, and to obtain the Drawback thereon, shall give Twelve Hours Notice of his Intention to the Officer of Excise who shall be appointed by the Commissioners of Excise for that Purpose, specifying in such Notice the Time and Place when and where and the Person on whose Account such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, is or are intended to be packed; and such Notice having been given, an Officer of Excise shall attend at the Time and Place specified, and all the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, intended to be exported, shall be produced to him, and in the Case of Paper (except Paper printed, painted, or stained, or out and gilded, as herein-after mentioned), Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, the same shall be produced in the original Wrappers in which the same was charged with Duty, with the Labels, having printed or written, marked and stamped thereon, the several Particulars required by this Act; and such Officer shall examine the same, and shall cancel, obliterate, or destroy every such Label, and the Impressions of the Duty Stamp on each Ream, Half Beam, or Parcel; and such Officer shall weigh and take an Account of all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, as shall be produced to him, or, in the Case of Paper printed, painted, or stained, shall measure and take an Account of the Number of Square Yards thereof; and all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, shall be packed in the Presence of the Officer of Excise, and the Packages containing the same shall be marked with the true Weight thereof in the Presence of such Officer, and shall be secured with such Fastenings, and sealed with such Seals or Marks, by such Officer, as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct; and every such Officer shall make out an Account of the Quantities and Kinds and Weight, or, in the Case of Paper printed, painted, or stained, of the Number of Square Yards, of all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, as shall be produced to him and be packed in his Presence, and shall make a Return thereof to the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as Export Officer, at the Port of Exportation: Provided always, that if the Person giving such Packing Notice shall not begin and proceed to pack up all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, at the Time mentioned therein, such Notice shall be null and void, and a like fresh Notice shall be required before the packing up the same or any Part thereof.

s. 53. “And be it enacted, That if any Person shall put or place any heavy Substance, or other Matter than Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, except the Materials necessarily used in packing the same, in any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package containing Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, packing or packed for Exportation, or shall pack in any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package any other Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, or other Substance or Article, (except as aforesaid,) than the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, produced to the Officer as to be packed and exported, or shall, by any Art, Contrivance, or Device, prevent, hinder, or deceive any Officer of Excise from or in taking a true Account of the Kind or Weight (or, in the Case of Paper printed, painted, or stained, the Measure) of the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, packed or produced to be packed, such Person shall forfeit Two hundred Pounds, and every such Cask, Box, Chest, or Package, with the Contents thereof, shall be forfeited.

s. 54. “And be it enacted, That every Person who shall open any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package containing Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, which shall have been packed for Exportation, or shall wilfully destroy or deface any Seal or Mark of the Officer placed thereon, or damage any of the Fastenings thereof, and every Person who shall cut out, erase, obliterate, alter, or damage any Figure, Letter, or Mark cut, written, painted, branded, or made on any Cask, Box, Chest, or Package containing Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, for Exportation, expressing or denoting the Weight of such Cask, Box, Chest, or Package, or the Weight of the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, therein, or the Number thereof, shall forfeit One hundred Pounds, and every such Cask, Box, Chest, or Package, with the Contents thereof, shall be forfeited, and may be seized by any Officer of Excise or Customs.

s. 55. “And be it enacted, That every Person intending to export any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, on Drawback, shall, by himself or his Agent, give to the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as such, at the Port of Exportation, a Notice in Writing of his Intention to ship such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, Six Hours at least before such Shipment shall be made, in which Notice shall be specified the Number of Packages to be shipped, with the respective Marks and Numbers thereon, and the Quantity, Weight, and Kinds of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, in each Package, with the Amount of the Drawback claimed thereon, and the Value of the same for Home Consumption, and shall also specify the Quay or Place where the Packages are then lying, and from which the same are to be shipped, and the Time of Shipment, with the Name of the Ship and the Master thereof, and the Place or Port to which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, is or are to be exported; and the Person so intending to export such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, shall also, by himself or his Agent, make a Declaration before the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as such as aforesaid, that such Packages, and the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, contained therein, are the same described and set forth in the Account or Certificate of the Packing Officer, and that to the best of his Knowledge and Belief the full Duties of Excise have been charged and secured on such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or on the Paper on which such Books shall have been printed or ruled, and shall also give Bond, with One or more sufficient Surety or Sureties, to be approved of by the Officer appointed by the Commissioners of Excise to take such Bond, in Double the Value of the Drawback, conditioned that such Packages, with the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books therein, shall with all convenient Speed be shipped and exported, and shall not be unpacked in any Port or Harbour of the United Kingdom, nor unloaded, unshipped, or relanded, or put on board any other Ship or Vessel, in any Part of the United Kingdom, Shipwreck or other unavoidable Accident excepted; and such Notice having been given and such Declaration made as aforesaid, and such Security entered into, the Officer of Excise receiving the same shall write his Name upon the said Shipping Notice as a Certificate of the Requisites aforesaid having been complied with, and shall forward and transmit the said Notice, with his Name thereon, to the proper Officer of Customs at the Port whose Duty it may be to attend the shipping of such Goods.

s. 56. “And be it enacted, That all the said Packages, with the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books therein, shall, at the Time specified in the Notice for shipping the same, be produced to the proper Officer of Customs, who shall inspect and examine the same, and, being satisfied that they are the Packages specified in the Shipping Notice, shall see them shipped in his Presence, and certify such Shipment on the Shipping Notice, and return the same to the Export Officer of Excise, or Officer acting as such, and such Export Officer, having received back the said Notice, with the Certificate of Shipment thereon, shall deliver to the Exporter or his Agent a Debenture, in such Form and with such Particulars thereon as the Commissioners of Excise shall direct, for Payment of the Amount of Drawback at the Expiration of Six Weeks from the Time of Shipment.

s. 57. “Provided always, and be it enacted, That no Debenture shall be made out for the Payment of Drawback on any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, exported to Guernsey, Jersey, Alderney, or the Isle of Man, until a Certificate shall be produced of the due landing thereof under the Hand of the Chief Officer of Customs of the said Islands respectively.

s. 58. “And be it enacted, That in every Case where any such Notice for shipping any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, on Drawback, shall be given, it shall be lawful for the Officer of Customs to whom the Package or Packages containing such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, shall be produced for Shipment, and for any other Officer of Customs or of Excise, to open all or any of the Packages mentioned in such Notice, and to unpack and examine the Contents thereof; and if the same shall be found correct such Officer shall, at his own Expence, to be allowed him by the Commissioners of Customs or of Excise, as the Case may be, cause the same to be carefully repacked, and the respective Packages again secured and sealed; but if on such Examination any Package, or the Contents thereof, shall be found to vary in any Particular from the Description contained in the Shipping Notice, so that a higher or greater Sum than of right due shall have been claimed, or in case such Discovery had not been made would have, on the Exportation of such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, been deemed payable as Drawback, or Her Majesty in any respect defrauded therein, such Packages, and the Contents thereof, shall be forfeited, and may be seized by any Officer of Excise or Customs, and the Exporter thereof shall forfeit Treble the Value of the Drawback sought to be obtained, or Two hundred Pounds, at the Election of the Commissioners of Excise.

s. 59. “And be it enacted, That no Drawback shall be allowed for or in respect of the Paper of any Books in the Latin, Greek, Oriental, or Northern Languages printed within the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, or the Universities of Scotland, or Trinity College, Dublin, by Permission of the Vice Chancellors or Principals or Provost of the same respectively, nor for or in respect of any Bibles, Testaments, Psalm Books, or Books of Common Prayer, Confession of Faith, or Larger or Shorter Catechism, printed in the Universities of Oxford or Cambridge, or Trinity College, Dublin, or by the Queen’s Printers in England, Scotland, or Ireland respectively, nor for or in respect of any other printed Books exported by any Person not being a Printer or Bookseller or Stationer, or which have ever been before sold to any Person not using or exercising the Trade or Business of a Printer or Bookseller or Stationer.”

s. 62. “And be it enacted, That every Person who shall produce to any Officer of Excise or Customs to be packed or shipped for Exportation on Drawback any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or any Books, not entitled to Drawback under the Provisions of this Act, or who shall pack or ship for Exportation on Drawback any such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, or any Articles, Matters, or Goods, other than the Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, produced to the Officer of Excise to be packed, or who shall fraudulently remove, deposit, or conceal any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, or Books, with Intent unduly to obtain any Drawback, or any higher Amount of Drawback than he would otherwise be entitled to, shall, over and above all other Penalties which he may thereby incur, forfeit Treble the Amount of the Drawback sought to be obtained, or Two hundred Pounds, at the Election of the Commissioners of Excise, and all such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, or Books, or other Articles, Matters, or Goods, shall be forfeited, and may be seized by any Officer of Excise or Customs.

s. 63. “And be it enacted, That if any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall, by Fire or by the sinking, casting away of, or by any inevitable Accident happening to any Vessel or Barge in which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall be transporting or have been transported from any Part of the United Kingdom to any other Part thereof, or on board of which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been put for that Purpose, be wholly lost or destroyed, or so far damaged as to be worthless and only fit to be wholly destroyed, and no longer capable of Use as Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board unless re-manufactured and re-charged with Duty, it shall be lawful for the Maker of such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board, being at the Time of such Loss or Damage the Proprietor or Owner thereof, to make Proof of such Loss or Damage, and of the Cause thereof, on the Oath or Oaths of One or more credible Witness or Witnesses, and of the Duty on such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board having been duly charged on and paid by such Maker, and that he was at the Time of such Loss or Damage the Proprietor or Owner thereof, before the Justices of the Peace at the Quarter Sessions for the County, Shire, Division, City, Town, or Place where such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been made and charged with Duty, or at or next adjoining to the Place where such Accident shall have taken place, or shall have been first discovered or made known to such Maker, or before the Commissioners of Excise, or any Three of them, if such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been made or charged with Duty, or such Accident shall have happened or been first discovered or made known to such Maker, within the Limits of the Chief Office of Excise; and such Justices at Quarter Sessions and Commissioners of Excise respectively shall and they are hereby required to examine any Witness or Witnesses thereupon upon Oath (which Oath they are hereby authorized to administer), and upon satisfactory Proof being made before them respectively that such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board had been so wholly lost and destroyed, or so far damaged as aforesaid, by any of the Causes respectively aforesaid, and that the Duties thereon had been duly charged and paid, and that such Maker was the Proprietor or Owner thereof at the Time of such Loss or Damage, to grant a Certificate thereof, and of the Amount of such Duties, under their respective Hands; and upon the Production of such Certificate to the Collector of Excise or other Officer acting as Collector of Excise of the Collection in which such Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall have been charged with Duty, such Collector or other Officer shall and he is hereby authorised and required to pay or allow to such Maker, out of any Monies arising from the Duties of Excise in his Hands, so much Money as the Sum specified in such Certificate for such Duties as aforesaid shall amount to.”

s. 65. “And be it enacted, That the Term ‘Paper’ in this Act shall include and be deemed to include, except where otherwise expressed, Glazed Paper, Sheathing Paper, Button Paper, and every Kind of Paper whatsoever, by whatever Denomination known or called, save and except that nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be deemed to extend to authorize the Allowance or Payment of any Drawback on the Exportation of Glazed Paper; and that the Term ‘Paper Maker’ shall, except where otherwise particularly expressed, include and be deemed and taken to include every Maker of Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, and several in Partnership as well as one Person, and Females as well as Males; and the Term ‘Paper Mill’ shall, except where otherwise particularly expressed, include and be deemed and taken to include every Mill, House, Premises, Room, or Manufactory in which any Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, or Scale-board shall be made or manufactured.

s. 66. “And be it enacted, That all Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, of whatever Materials made, and by whatever Denomination known or called, and however manufactured, whether made by the Materials being reduced to Pulp and moulded or finished by Machinery, or by being pressed or intermixed in a dry State, and made to adhere by Pressure or otherwise, shall be deemed and taken to be Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board within the Meaning of this Act, and shall be charged with Duty accordingly; and the Makers thereof shall be and are hereby declared to be subject and liable to all the Enactments, Rules, Regulations, Fines, Penalties, and Forfeitures of this Act, and of the general Laws for securing the Duties of Excise.

s. 67. “And be it enacted, That from and after the Commencement of this Act the several Acts and Parts of Acts following shall be and the same are hereby repealed; (that is to say,) so much of the Acts 10 Ann. c. 19.; 21 Geo. 3. c. 24.; 24 Geo. 3. sess. 2. c 18.; 34 Geo. 3. c. 20.; 41 Geo. 3. c. 8.; 42 Geo. 3. c. 94.; 54 Geo. 3. c. 106.; 54 Geo. 3. c. 153.; 56 Geo. 3. c. 103.; 56 Geo. 3. c. 78.; 1 Geo. 4. c. 58.; 5 Geo. 4. c. 55.; and 6 & 7 Will 4. c. 52.; as relates to the Duties on Paper, Button-board, Mill-board, Paste-board, and Scale-board, and the collecting and securing the same; save and except so far as any of the said recited Acts repeal any former Acts or Parts of Acts, and also save as to any Duties or Arrears of Duties, or any Drawbacks or Allowances, due or owing or payable, or any Penalties, Fines, or Forfeitures incurred, under the said recited Acts or Parts of Acts, or any of them, before the Commencement of this Act, all which said Duties, Drawbacks, and Allowances, Penalties, Fines, and Forfeitures, may be demanded, recovered, and paid, sued for, enforced, and recovered, and condemned, as if this Act had not been passed.

s. 68. “And be it enacted, That this Act shall commence and take effect on the Eleventh Day of October One thousand eight hundred and thirty-nine.”

Paper (Ireland).--4 Geo. 4. c. 72. imposes a Customs Duty on the Importation of Paper into Ireland, not being the Manufacture of Great Britain, viz.

Duty. £ s. d. “Brown Paper made of old Rope or Cordage only, without separating or extracting the Pitch or Tar therefrom, and without any Mixture of other Materials therewith, the lb. 0 0 10

“Paper printed, painted, or stained Paper, or Paper Hangings, or Flock Paper, the Yard square 0 1 7

“Waste Paper, or Paper of any other Sort, not particularly enumerated or described, nor otherwise charged with Duty, the lb. 0 1 7

“The same Duties from the East Indies.

“No Drawback.”

PAPER BENCH.--M. See BANK, also HORSE.

PAPER BOARD.

Boards made of deal plank, on which to place paper when wetted for printing. They have two slips of deal nailed to the bottom of each to strengthen them, and to prevent the joining from giving way; these slips are broader and not so thick as those inserted in letter boards. The general sizes are, demy boards, twenty-six inches by twenty-two; royal, thirty inches by twenty-six.

PAPER THE CASE.

Lining the bottom of the boxes in the cases with paper.--M. This was formerly done by the compositor; it is now done by the printer’s joiner before the bottom is nailed on.

PAPER UP LETTER.

To wrap the pages up in paper after a work is finished.--M.

In all book houses, there are bulks appropriated for the letter that is cleared away; so that when it is dry it may be papered up. In small houses this is generally done by the overseer; but in houses with large establishments, there is a person appointed to take care of the letter, furniture, chases, &c. which he keeps locked up, and delivers out as wanted: he also papers up the letter; that is, he wraps up each piece in the waste of some work, which he procures from the warehouse, and on which he writes the name of the type; it also tends to save trouble if he add whether it be open matter, Italic, or figures, as the case may be, as it prevents the necessity of opening the pieces out, when particular kinds only are wanted for distribution.

PAPER STOOL.

A stool with a large square top, on which to lay printed paper after it has been worked off, while the warehouseman is hanging it up to dry. There is a notch cut in the top to admit the fingers, for the greater convenience of moving it about.

PAPER WINDOWS. See ANCIENT CUSTOMS.

PARAGON.

The name of a type, one size larger than Great Primer, and one smaller than Double Pica. Moxon does not enumerate this size in his list. It is equal to two Long Primers. See TYPES.

PARAGRAPH.

A paragraph ¶ denotes the beginning of a new subject, or a sentence not connected with the foregoing. This character is chiefly used in the Old and in the New Testament.--Murray.

It is also used as a reference to notes, in printing.

PARAGRAPHS.

As a compositor is sometimes allowed to divide a paragraph in his manuscript copy, for the convenience of workmanship, the following observations on the subject, by Lindley Murray, may be serviceable:--

“Different subjects, unless they are very short, or very numerous in small compass, should be separated into paragraphs.

“When one subject is continued to a considerable length, the larger divisions of it should be put into paragraphs. And it will have a good effect to form the breaks, when it can properly be done, at sentiments of the most weight, or that call for peculiar attention.

“The facts, premises, and conclusions, of a subject, sometimes naturally point out the separations into paragraphs: and each of these, when of great length, will again require subdivisions at their most distinctive parts.

“In cases which require a connected subject to be formed into several paragraphs, a suitable turn of expression, exhibiting the connexion of the broken parts, will give beauty and force to the division.”

PARALLEL.

Marked thus ‖, is used as a reference to notes in the margin, or at the bottom of the page.

PARCHMENT.

Parchment is used for covering the tympans, both inner and outer: care should be used in selecting it, that the skins are free from any imperfections or cuts, and that they are of an uniform thickness, as nearly as possible. The parchment for the inner tympan may be a little thinner than that for the outer. Dealers in printing materials generally keep a stock of old deeds, leases, &c. which are cheaper than new parchment, and are frequently used for common work.

PARENTHESIS. See PUNCTUATION.

PARLIAMENTARY PAPERS.

3 Vict. c. 9. “An Act to give summary Protection to Persons employed in the Publication of Parliamentary Papers.

“Whereas it is essential to the due and effectual Exercise and Discharge of the Functions and Duties of Parliament, and to the Promotion of wise Legislation, that no Obstructions or Impediments should exist to the Publication of such of the Reports, Papers, Votes, or Proceedings of either House of Parliament as such House of Parliament may deem fit or necessary to be published: And whereas Obstructions or Impediments to such Publication have arisen, and hereafter may arise, by means of Civil or Criminal Proceedings being taken against Persons employed by or acting under the Authority of the Houses of Parliament, or One of them, in the Publication of such Reports, Papers, Votes, or Proceedings; by reason and for Remedy whereof it is expedient that more speedy Protection should be afforded to all Persons acting under the Authority aforesaid, and that all such Civil or Criminal Proceedings should be summarily put an end to and determined in manner herein-after mentioned: Be it therefore enacted by the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons, in this present Parliament assembled, and by the Authority of the same, That it shall and may be lawful for any Person or Persons who now is or are, or hereafter shall be, a Defendant or Defendants in any Civil or Criminal Proceeding commenced or prosecuted in any Manner soever, for or on account or in respect of the Publication of any such Report, Paper, Votes, or Proceedings by such Person or Persons, or by his, her, or their Servant or Servants, by or under the Authority of either House of Parliament, to bring before the Court in which such Proceeding shall have been or shall be so commenced or prosecuted, or before any Judge of the same (if One of the Superior Courts at Westminster), first giving Twenty-four Hours Notice of his Intention so to do to the Prosecutor or Plaintiff in such Proceeding, a Certificate under the Hand of the Lord High Chancellor of Great Britain, or the Lord Keeper of the Great Seal, or of the Speaker of the House of Lords, for the Time being, or of the Clerk of the Parliaments, or of the Speaker of the House of Commons, or of the Clerk of the same House, stating that the Report, Paper, Votes, or Proceedings, as the Case may be, in respect whereof such Civil or Criminal Proceeding shall have been commenced or prosecuted, was published by such Person or Persons, or by his, her, or their Servant or Servants, by Order or under the Authority of the House of Lords or of the House of Commons, as the Case may be, together with an Affidavit verifying such Certificate; and such Court or Judge shall thereupon immediately stay such Civil or Criminal Proceeding, and the same, and every Writ or Process issued therein, shall be and shall be deemed and taken to be finally put an end to, determined, and superseded by virtue of this Act.

s. 2. “And be it enacted, That in case of any Civil or Criminal Proceeding hereafter to be commenced or prosecuted for or on account or in respect of the Publication of any Copy of such Report, Paper, Votes, or Proceedings, it shall be lawful for the Defendant or Defendants at any Stage of the Proceedings to lay before the Court or Judge such Report, Paper, Votes, or Proceedings, and such Copy, with an Affidavit verifying such Report, Paper, Votes, or Proceedings, and the Correctness of such Copy, and the Court or Judge shall immediately stay such Civil or Criminal Proceeding, and the same, and every Writ or Process issued therein, shall be and shall be deemed and taken to be finally put an end to, determined, and superseded by virtue of this Act.

s. 3. “And be it enacted, That it shall be lawful in any Civil or Criminal Proceeding to be commenced or prosecuted for printing any Extract from or Abstract of such Report, Paper, Votes, or Proceedings, to give in Evidence under the General Issue such Report, Paper, Votes, or Proceedings, and to show that such Extract or Abstract was published bonâ fide and without Malice; and if such shall be the Opinion of the Jury a Verdict of Not guilty shall be entered for the Defendant or Defendants.

s. 4. “Provided always, and it is hereby expressly declared and enacted, That nothing herein contained shall be deemed or taken, or held or construed, directly or indirectly, by Implication or otherwise, to affect the Privileges of Parliament in any Manner whatsoever.”

PARLIAMENTARY PROCEEDINGS. See Newspaper Postage.

PASTE BOWL.

A small wooden bowl to hold paste for the use of the press room; it is usually the bowl of an old ball stock.

PEARL.

The name of a type, one size larger than Diamond, and one smaller than Ruby. It is the smallest size that Moxon mentions.--See TYPES.

PEEL.

An article to hang up the wet paper, upon the poles, to dry. The head is made of thin wainscot, and the upper edge is the thinnest, and rounded; the handle is of ash, with a groove cut in the upper end, to receive the head, which is secured to it by wooden pins going through the whole; and that part of the handle which receives the head is planed down, so that at the upper end of it, it is rendered quite thin, that there may be no shoulder to derange the paper. In large offices they have them with handles of different lengths, to suit the heights of the rooms in which paper is hung up to dry.

PELT POT.

Generally a large jar, in which urine is kept, to steep the pelts in previous to making the balls; as also to steep the blankets in, in which the balls are wrapped up at night. This only refers to pelt balls, for where composition balls are used, this offensive article is discarded.

PELTS.

Sheep skins untanned used for ball leathers.--M. The pelts that were used previous to the introduction of composition, were sheep skins, with the wool taken off, dressed with lime, and dried. They are nearly superseded by composition balls and rollers.

When they are wanted for use, they are steeped in urine to soften them, then rubbed through a twisted iron to supple them, and to take out part of the moisture, which is termed currying; and afterwards trodden under foot at the press side, by the pressman who is beating, to expel the superfluous moisture; they are then scraped, to clean the surface, and made up into balls, stuffed with carded wool, having a lining made of a pelt taken from an old ball. This lining keeps the outer skin moist, and makes the ball firmer on the stock.

The softer a pelt is, so long as it is not surcharged with moisture, the better it will cover the surface of the type or engraving with ink: and it will also retain on its surface particles of dust, wool, or other extraneous matter, without parting with them to the letter or engraving; so that the work will be better and clearer of picks, than when the pelt is drier and harder.

In knocking-up balls, it is not necessary to tread the pelts, as is usually done, and which is inconvenient when a man is working at half press: it will answer equally well if the pelts be well curried, and, after the balls are made, well scraped; which may be done by placing the ball on the knees, with its handle against the stomach, to hold it firm; then taking a sharp table knife, the handle of which is held with one hand and the point with the other, and scraping from the stock over the edge of the ball to the centre; by which operation the superfluous moisture will be got rid of, and the ball will work equally well as those that have been trod by the pressman.

It is customary for pressmen to throw aside pelts that are greasy, and not to use them, till the last, in consequence of an opinion general among them, that they will not take ink: but, from repeated experiments that I have made, I could not perceive the least difference between the most greasy pelts and those that were free from grease; the one taking ink and retaining it on its surface, equally as well as the other. Since then I have frequently mentioned the subject to some of the most experienced pressmen, who all allow that a greasy pelt is more durable than one clear of grease.

A greasy pelt requires more currying than one that is not greasy; and it is better to let it remain longer in the pelt pot, currying it occasionally, which act the pressmen term giving it exercise. It is an advantage also to curry, occasionally, any pelts that are in the pelt pot; as it improves their condition, and prevents their spoiling, so soon as they would otherwise do, by being in soak, when not immediately wanted.

In the country I have found it more convenient to get sheep’s skins from the skinners, without any other preparation than having the wool taken off; and these were more durable, and made softer and better balls, than when dressed and dried in the usual way. See CURRYING.

PENULTIMATE.

The last syllable but one of a word.

PERFECTING.

Printing the second form of a sheet; called also working the reiteration.

PERFECT PAPER.

Paper sent in to print on, in which there is an extra quantity, to allow for waste, &c.; thus a bundle consists of 43 quires, or 1032 sheets; and a ream of 21½ quires, or 516 sheets; without any outside quires, and the whole consists of perfect sheets.

PERIOD. See PUNCTUATION.

PERIODICAL PUBLICATIONS. See Newspaper Postage. PUBLICATIONS.

PERMITS (EXCISE.)

2 W. 4. c. 16. s. 2. “And be it further enacted, That the Commissioners of Excise shall cause to be provided Moulds or Frames for the making of Paper to be used in Great Britain and Ireland for Permits, which Paper shall have the Words “Excise Office,” with any other Letters, Figures, Marks, or Devices which the said Commissioners shall direct, visible in the Substance of such Paper, and shall also cause to be provided Plates engraved with such Marks, Stamps, and Devices as to them shall seem meet, and from Time to Time may alter or vary any such Plates, and may also cause to be provided Types cast in any particular Form for the printing, stamping, and marking the said Paper; and all Permits given by the respective Officers of Excise in the United Kingdom for the Removal or Conveyance of any Commodity for the Removal of which a Permit is by Law required shall be printed, stamped, and marked by the said Plate or Plates or Types on Paper so made as aforesaid; which said Paper shall be made and the said Plates engraven and Types cast by such Person or Persons as shall be for that Purpose from Time to Time authorized and appointed by the Commissioners of Excise under their Hands and Seals; and as well the said Paper as the said Plates so engraven and Types so cast shall be kept by such Officer or Officers or other Person as shall from Time to Time be appointed by the said Commissioners for keeping the same; and no Permit shall be printed, stamped, marked, or written, nor shall any Permit be granted, in any Part of the United Kingdom, by any Officer of Excise, but on Paper so provided as aforesaid.

s. 3. “And be it further enacted, That every Person who shall make, or cause or procure to be made, or shall aid or assist in the making, or shall knowingly have in his, her, or their Custody or Possession, not being authorized by the said Commissioners, and without lawful Excuse, the Proof whereof shall lie on the Person accused, any Mould or Frame or other Instrument having therein the Words “Excise Office,” or any other Words, Figures, Marks, or Devices peculiar to and appearing in the Substance of the Paper used by the said Commissioners for Permits, or with any or Part of such Words, Figures, Marks, or Devices, or any of them, intended to imitate or pass for the same; and every Person, except as before excepted, who shall make, or cause or procure to be made, or aid or assist in the making, any Paper in the Substance of which the Words “Excise Office,” or any other Words, Figures, Marks, or Devices peculiar to or appearing in the Substance of the Paper used by the Commissioners of Excise for Permits, or any Part of such Words, Figures, Marks or Devices, or any of them, intended to imitate and pass for the same, shall be visible; and every Person, except as before excepted, who shall knowingly have in his, her, or their Custody or Possession, without lawful Excuse, (the Proof whereof shall lie on the Person accused,) any Paper whatever in the Substance of which the Words “Excise Office,” or any other Words, Figures, Marks, or Devices peculiar to and appearing in the Substance of Paper used by the Commissioners of Excise for Permits, or any Part of such Words, Figures, Marks, or Devices, or any of them, intended to imitate and pass for the same, shall be visible; and every Person, except as before excepted, who shall, by any Art, Mystery, or Contrivance, cause or procure, or aid or assist in causing or procuring, the Words “Excise Office,” or any other Words, Figures, Marks, or Devices peculiar to and appearing in the Substance of the Paper used by the Commissioners of Excise for Permits, or any or Part of such Words, Figures, Marks, or Devices, or any of them, intended to imitate and pass for the same, to appear visible in the Substance of any Paper whatever; and every Person, not authorized or appointed as aforesaid, who shall engrave, cast, cut, or make, or cause or procure to be engraved, cast, cut, or made, or aid or assist in engraving, casting, cutting, or making, any Plate, Type, or other Thing in Imitation of or to resemble any Plate or Type made or used by the Direction of the Commissioners of Excise for the Purpose of marking or printing the Paper to be used for Permits; and every Person, except as before excepted, who shall knowingly have in his or her Custody or Possession, without lawful Excuse, Proof whereof shall lie on the Person accused, any such Plate or Type, shall for every such Offence be adjudged a Felon, and shall be transported for the Term of Seven Years, or shall be imprisoned, at the Discretion of the Court before whom such Person shall be tried, for any Period not less than Two Years.

s. 4. “And be it further enacted, That every Person who shall counterfeit or forge, or cause or procure to be counterfeited or forged, or assist in counterfeiting or forging, any Permit or any Part of any Permit, or shall counterfeit any Impression, Stamp or Mark, Figure or Device, provided or appointed or to be provided or appointed by the Commissioners of Excise to be put on such Permit, or shall utter, give, or make use of any counterfeited or forged Permit, knowing the same or any Part thereof to be counterfeited or forged, or shall utter, give, or make use of any Permit with any such counterfeited Impression, Stamp or Mark, Figure or Device, knowing the same to be counterfeited; or if any Person or Persons shall knowingly or willingly accept or receive any counterfeited or forged Permit, or any Permit with any such counterfeited Impression, Stamp or Mark, Figure or Device thereon, knowing the same to be counterfeited, shall, for every such Offence, be adjudged guilty of a Misdemeanor, and shall be transported for the Term of Seven Years, or fined and imprisoned, at the Discretion of the Court.”

PERSIAN.

The Persians write their characters from the right hand to the left. There are thirty-two Persian letters. The alphabet and following observations are in the Tâleek character.

+--------+--------+-------------------+---------------------+--------+ | | | IV. III. | II. I. | | |Order |Names | FINALS. |INITIALS AND MEDIALS.|Powers | |of the |of the | Connected. | Connected. | of the | |Letters.|Letters.| Unconnected.| Unconnected.|Letters.| +--------+--------+---------+---------+----------+----------+--------+ | 1. |Alif | ـا‎ | ا‎ | ـا‎ | ا‎ | A. | | 2. |Ba | ـب‎ | ب‎ | ـبـ‎ | بـ‎ | B. | | 3. |Pa | ـپ‎ | پ‎ | ـپـ‎ | پـ‎ | P. | | 4. |Ta | ـت‎ | ت‎ | ـتـ‎ | تـ‎ | T. | | 5. |Sa | ـث‎ | ث‎ | ـثـ‎ | ثـ‎ | S. | | 6. |Jeem | ـج‎ | ج‎ | ـجـ‎ | جـ‎ | J. | | 7. |Ché | ـچ‎ | چ‎ | ـچـ‎ | چـ‎ | Ch. | | 8. |Hha | ـح‎ | ح‎ | ـحـ‎ | حـ‎ | Hh. | | 9. |Kha | ـخ‎ | خ‎ | ـخـ‎ | خـ‎ | Kh. | | 10. |Dal | ـد‎ | د‎ | ـد‎ | د‎ | D. | | 11. |Zal | ـذ‎ | ذ‎ | ـذ‎ | ذ‎ | Z. | | 12. |Ra | ـر‎ | ر‎ | ـر‎ | ر‎ | R. | | 13. |Za | ـز‎ | ز‎ | ـز‎ | ز‎ | Z. | | 14. |Zha | ـژ‎ | ژ‎ | ـژ‎ | ژ‎ | Zh. | | 15. |Seen | ـس‎ | س‎ | ـسـ‎ | سـ‎ | S. | | 16. |Sheen | ـش‎ | ش‎ | ـشـ‎ | شـ‎ | Sh. | | 17. |Ssaud | ـص‎ | ص‎ | ـصـ‎ | صـ‎ | Ss. | | 18. |Zzaud | ـض‎ | ض‎ | ـضـ‎ | ضـ‎ | ZZ. | | 19. |To | ـط‎ | ط‎ | ـطـ‎ | طـ‎ | T. | | 20. |Zo | ـظ‎ | ظ‎ | ـظـ‎ | ظـ‎ | Zz. | | 21. |Aine | ـع‎ | ع‎ | ـعـ‎ | عـ‎ | A. | | 22. |Ghine | ـغ‎ | غ‎ | ـغـ‎ | غـ‎ | Gh. | | 23. |Fa | ـف‎ | ف‎ | ـفـ‎ | فـ‎ | F. | | 24. |Kauf | ـق‎ | ق‎ | ـقـ‎ | قـ‎ | K. | | 25. |Kaf | ـﮏ‎ | ک‎ | ـﮑـ‎ | ﮐـ‎ | K. | | 26. |Gaf | ـﮓ‎ | گ‎ | ـﮕـ‎ | ﮔـ‎ | G. | | 27. |Laum | ـل‎ | ل‎ | ـلـ‎ | ـل‎ | L. | | 28. |Meem | ـم‎ | م‎ | ـمـ‎ | مـ‎ | M. | | 29. |Noon | ـن‎ | ن‎ | ـنـ‎ | نـ‎ | N. | | 30. |Vau | ـو‎ | و‎ | ـو‎ | و‎ | V. | | 31. |Ha | ـه‎ | ه‎ | ـهـ‎ | هـ‎ | H. | | 32. |Ya | ـي‎ | ي‎ | ـيـ‎ | يـ‎ | Y,ee,i.| | |Lam-alif| ـلا‎ | لا‎ | ـلا‎ | لا‎ | | +--------+--------+---------+---------+----------+----------+--------+

The second and fourth columns of these letters from the right hand are used only when they are connected with a preceding letter. Every letter should be connected with that which follows it, except these seven; ا‎ alif, د‎ dal, ذ‎ zal, ر‎ ra, ز‎ za, ژ‎ zha, and و‎ vau, which are never joined to the following letter.

The short vowels are expressed by small marks, two of which are placed above the letter, and one below it, as بَ‎ ba or be, بِ‎ be or bi, بُ‎ bo or bu.

The mark ﹾ‎ placed above a consonant shows that the syllable ends with it. The short vowels are very seldom written in the Persian books; and the other orthographical marks are likewise usually suppressed, except Mudda ۤ ‎, _Humza_ٴ ,‎ and Tushdeed ﹼ‎; the two first of which are most common.

The most usual combination of letters are formed with خ‎ ج‎ چ‎ ‎ح‎, which have the singular property of causing all the preceding letters to rise above the line, as بخارا‎ bokhára, نحچير‎ nakhcheer, تصحيح‎ tas-héeh. The letters that precede م‎ m are also sometimes raised. Lam-alif لا‎ is compounded of ل‎ l and ا‎ a.

The Arabic characters, like those of the Europeans, are written in a variety of different hands; but the most common of them are the Nuskhee, the Tâleek , or hanging, and the Shekesteh, or broken. Our books have hitherto been printed in the Nuskhee hand, and all Arabic manuscripts, as well as most Persian and Turkish histories, are written in it; but the Persians write their poetical works in the Tâleek, which answers to the most elegant of our Italic hands. As to the Shekesteh, it is very irregular and inelegant, and is chiefly used by the idle Indians, who will not take time to form their letters perfectly, or even to insert the diacritical points; but this hand, however difficult and barbarous, must be learned by all men of business in India, as the letters from the princes of the country are seldom written in any other manner.

Numbers.--The following are the most common of the Persian numbers:--

+--------+-------------+------------------+ | ۱‎ | yek | one. | | ۲‎ | du | two. | | ۳‎ | seh | three. | | ۴‎ | chehar | four. | | ۵‎ | penge | five. | | ۶‎ | shesh | six. | | ۷‎ | heft | seven. | | ۸‎ | hesht | eight. | | ۹‎ | nuh | nine. | | ۱۰‎ | deh | ten. | | ۱۱‎ | yázdeh | eleven. | | ۱۲‎ | duázdeh | twelve. | | ۱۳‎ | sizdeh | thirteen. | | ۱۴‎ | chehardeh | fourteen. | | ۱۵‎ | panzedeh | fifteen. | | ۱۶‎ | shanzedeh | sixteen. | | ۱۷‎ | hefdeh | seventeen. | | ۱۸‎ | heshdeh | eighteen. | | ۱۹‎ | nuzdeh | nineteen. | | ۲۰‎ | beest | twenty. | | ۲۱‎ | beest u yek | twenty-one. | | ۳۰‎ | see | thirty. | | ۴۰‎ | chehel | forty. | | ۵۰‎ | penjàh | fifty. | | ۶۰‎ | shesht | sixty. | | ۷۰‎ | heftâd | seventy. | | ۸۰‎ | heshtâd | eighty. | | ۹۰‎ | naved | ninety. | | ۱۰۰‎ | sad | a hundred. | | ۲۰۰‎ | dûsad | two hundred. | | ۳۰۰‎ | seesad | three hundred. | | ۴۰۰‎ | cheharsad | four hundred. | | ۵۰۰‎ | pansad | five hundred. | | ۶۰۰‎ | sheshsad | six hundred. | | ۷۰۰‎ | heftsad | seven hundred. | | ۸۰۰‎ | heshtsad | eight hundred. | | ۹۰۰‎ | nuhsad | nine hundred. | | ۱۰۰۰‎ | hezar | a thousand. | | ۱۰۰۰۰‎ | deh hezar | ten thousand. | | | | { a hundred | | ۱۰۰۰۰۰‎ | sad hezar | { thousand, or | | | | { lac. | +--------+-------------+------------------+

Niskhi.--This is the form of writing used by the Arabians, who invented the characters: as every Persian student should acquire a knowledge of the Arabic, it ought therefore to be learned. This hand is frequently employed by the Persians, and the history of Nader Shah was written in it. The Niskhi is the parent of the Tâleek, and of all the other hands in which the Arabic and Persian languages are now written.

Tâleek.--The Tâleek is the most beautiful hand writing used by the Persians. In the manuscripts written in the Tâleek hand, the strokes of the reed are extremely fine, and the initial letters ﺑ‎ ﺗ‎ ز‎ are scarcely perceptible. As the Persians always write their lines of an equal length, they are obliged to place their words in a very irregular manner; if the line be too short, they lengthen it by a fine stroke of the reed; if too long, they write the words one above another. In the Persian poems the transcribers place both members of a couplet on the same line, and not the first above the second, as we do: a Persian would write the following verses in this order:

With ravish’d ears, The monarch hears, Assumes the god, Affects to nod.

It must be confessed, that this irregularity in writing, joined to the confusion of the diacritical points, which are often placed at random, and sometimes omitted, makes it very difficult to read the Persian MSS., till the language becomes familiar to us; but this difficulty, like all others in the world, will be insensibly surmounted by the habit of industry and perseverance, without which no great design was ever accomplished.

Nustaleek.--The character called Nustaleek is compounded of the Niskhi and Tâleek. It differs, however, considerably from the graceful turns and beautiful flourishes of several of the manuscripts. The Nustaleek character may be as easily read by Europeans as the Niskhi.

Shekesteh.--In this inelegant hand all order and analogy are neglected; the points which distinguish ف‎ from ق‎, خ‎ from ‎ج‎, and ب‎ from ت‎, ث‎ and پ‎, &c., are for the most part omitted, and these seven letters ا‎د‎ذ‎ر‎ز‎ژ‎و‎ are connected with those that follow them in a most irregular manner. This is, certainly, a considerable difficulty, which must be surmounted before the learner can translate an Indian letter.

The preceding remarks on the Persian characters are extracted from Sir William Jones’s Grammar of the Persian Language, 4to. 5th edition. London, 1801.

Persian in the British Founderies.

Paragon. V. and J. Figgins; cut under the direction of Sir William Ousley.

English. Caslon and Livermore.

PHRASES.

Latin and French Words and Phrases, with their explanation in English.

Ab initio.--From the beginning.

Ab urbe condita.--From the building of the city; abridged A. U. C.

Ad arbitrium.--At pleasure.

Ad captandum.--To attract.

Ad captandum vulgus.--To ensnare the vulgar.

Ad eundem.--To the same.

Ad infinitum.--To infinity.

Ad interim.--In the meantime.

Ad libitum.--At pleasure.

Ad litem.--For the action (at law).

Ad referendum.--For consideration.

Ad valorem.--According to value.

Affaire de cœur.--A love affair; an amour.

A fin.--To the end.

À fortiori.--With stronger reason.

Aide-de-camp.--Assistant to a general.

A la bonne heure.--At an early hour; in the nick of time.

A-la-mode.--In the fashion.

Alias.--Otherwise.

Alibi.--Elsewhere; or, proof of having been elsewhere.

Alma mater (kind mother).--University.

A mensa et thoro.--From bed and board.

Amor patriæ.--The love of our country.

Anglicè.--In English.

Anno Domini.--In the year of our Lord; abr. A. D.

Anno mundi.--In the year of the world; abr. A. M.

À posteriori.--From a later reason, or from behind.

À priori.--From a prior reason.

À propos.--To the purpose; seasonably; or by-the-by.

Arcana.--Secrets.

Arcana imperii.--State secrets.

Arcanum.--Secret.

Argumentum ad fidem.--An appeal to our faith.

Argumentum ad hominem.--Personal argument.

Argumentum ad judicium.--An appeal to the common sense of mankind.

Argumentum ad passiones.--An appeal to the passions.

Argumentum ad populum.--An appeal to the people.

Argumentum baculinum.--Argument of blows.

Audi alteram partem.--Hear both sides.

Au fond.--To the bottom; or, main point.

Auri sacra fames.--The accursed thirst of gold.

Aut Cæsar aut nullus.--He will be Cæsar or nobody.

Auto-da-fé (Act of faith).--Burning of hereticks.

Bagatelle.--Trifle.

Beau monde (Gay world).--People of fashion.

Beaux esprits.--Men of wit.

Belles lettres.--Polite literature.

Billet doux.--Love letter.

Bon gré.--With a good grace.

Bon jour.--Good day.

Bon mot (A good word).--A witty saying.

Bon ton.--Fashion; high fashion.

Bonâ fide.--In good faith.

Boudoir.--A small private apartment.

Cacoethes carpendi.--A rage for collecting.

Cacoethes loquendi.--A rage for speaking.

Cacoethes scribendi.--Passion for writing.

Cæteris paribus.--Other circumstances being equal.

Caput mortuum (The dead head).--The worthless remains.

Carte blanche (A blank paper).--Unconditional terms; q. d. “There is a sheet of paper: write your own terms.”

Cessio bonorum.--Yielding up of goods.

Château.--Country seat.

Chef-d’œuvre.--Master piece.

Ci-devant.--Formerly.

Comme il faut.--As it should be.

Commune bonum.--A common good.

Communibus annis.--One year with another.

Compos mentis.--Of a sound and composed mind.

Con amore.--Gladly; with love.

Congé d’élire.--Permission to choose, or elect.

Contra.--Against.

Contra bonos mores.--Against good manners or morals.

Coup de grace.--Finishing stroke (Literally the blow of favour; because the bones having been broken separately on the rack, the last blow, which killed the man, was an act of grace to him).

Coup de main.--Sudden enterprize.

Coup d’œil.--View or glance.

Credat Judæus.--A Jew may believe it (but I will not).

Cui bono?--To what good will it tend?

Cui malo?--To what evil will it tend?

Cum multis aliis.--With many others.

Cum privilegio.--With privilege.

Curia advisari vult.--Court wishes to be advised; abr. cur. adv. vult.

Currente calamo.--With a running quill.

Custos rotulorum.--Keeper of the rolls.

Datum.--Point granted.

Debut.--Beginning.

De die in diem.--From day to day.

Dedimus potestatem.--We have given power.

De facto.--In fact.

Dei gratia.--By the grace, or favour, of God.

De jure.--By right.

De mortuis nil nisi bonum.--Of the dead let nothing be said but what is favourable.

De novo.--Anew.

Dénouement (Unravelling).--Finishing, or winding up.

Deo volente.--God willing.

Dépôt.--Store, or magazine.

Dernier ressort.--Last resort or resource.

Desideratum.--A thing desired.

Desunt cætera.--The other things are wanting.

Dieu et mon droit.--God and my right.

Domine dirige nos.--O Lord direct us.

Double entendre.--Double meaning.

Douceur.--Present, or bribe.

Dramatis personæ.--Characters of the drama.

Durante bene placito.--During pleasure.

Durante vita.--During life.

Ecce homo.--Behold the man.

Eclaircissement.--Explanation; clearing up.

Eclat.--Splendour.

Elève.--Pupil.

Embonpoint.--Jolly; in good case.

En flute.--Carrying guns on the upper deck only.

En masse.--In a mass; in a body.

En passant.--By the way; in passing.

Ennui.--Tiresomeness.

Entrée.--Entrance.

Ergo.--Therefore.

Errata.--Errors.

Esto perpetua.--May it last for ever.

Et cætera.--And the rest.

Ex.--Late; as the ex-minister means the late minister.

Ex cathedra (From the chair). Instructions given from a chair of authority.

Ex nihilo nihil fit.--“Nothing can come of nothing.”--_King Lear._

Ex officio.--Officially, or by virtue of an office.

Ex parte.--On the part of, or one side.

Excerpta.--Extracts.

Exempli gratia.--As for example; abr. ex. gr., e. g.

Experto crede.--Believe one who has experience to justify his opinion.

Extempore.--Out of hand; without premeditation.

Fac simile.--Exact copy or resemblance.

Fata obstant.--The fates oppose it.

Faux pas.--Fault, or misconduct.

Felo de se (The felon of himself).--Self murderer.

Festina lente.--Hasten slowly. “Wisely and slow: they stumble that run fast.”--Friar in Romeo and Juliet.

Fête.--A feast or entertainment.

Fiat.--Let it be done, or made.

Finis.--End.

Finis coronat opus.--The end crowns the work.

Flagrante bello.--Whilst the war is raging.

Furor loquendi.--An eagerness for speaking.

Furor scribendi.--An eagerness for writing.

Genus irritabile.--The irritable tribe of poets.

Gratis.--For nothing.

Hauteur.--Haughtiness.

Hic et ubique.--Here and there and every where.

Honi soit qui mal y pense.--May evil happen to him who evil thinks of it.

Hora fugit.--The hour, or time, flies.

Humanum est errare.--It is the lot of humanity to err.

Ibidem.--In the same place; abr. ibid., ib.

Ich dien.--I serve.

Id est.--That is; abr. i. e.

Idem.--The same.

Imperium in imperio.--A government existing in another government.

Imprimatur.--Let it be printed.

Imprimis.--In the first place.

Impromptu.--In readiness.

In cœlo quies.--There is rest in heaven.

In commendam.--For a time; in trust.

In duplo.--Twice as much.

In forma pauperis.--As a pauper, or poor person.

In loco.--In the place.

In petto (in the bosom).--Hid, or in reserve.

In propria persona.--In his own person.

In statu quo.--In the same state or condition in which it was.

In terrorem (In terror).--As a warning.

In terrorem populi.--In terror to the people.

In toto.--Altogether.

In transitu.--On the passage.

In vino veritas.--There is truth in wine.

Incognito.--Disguised, or unknown.

Inter nos.--Between ourselves.

Innuendo.--By signifying.

Ipse dixit (Himself said it).--Mere assertion.

Ipso facto.--By the mere fact.

Ipso jure.--By the law itself.

Item.--Also, or article.

Je ne sais quoi.--I know not what.

Jeu de mots.--Play upon words.

Jeu d’esprit.--Play of wit; a witticism.

Jure divino.--By divine right.

Jure humano.--By human law.

Jus gentium.--The law of nations.

Labor omnia vincit.--Labour overcomes every thing.

L’argent.--Money, or silver.

Lex magna est, et prævalebit.--The law is great, and will prevail.

Lex talionis.--The law of retaliation.

Licentia vatum.--A poetical license.

Linguæ lapsus.--A slip of the tongue.

Locum tenens.--One who supplies the place of another; a substitute; a deputy.

Magna charta.--The great charter of England.

Magna est veritas et prævalebit.--The truth is most powerful; and will ultimately prevail.

Mal à propos.--Unseasonable, or unseasonably.

Malâ fide.--In bad faith.

Malgré.--With an ill grace.

Manu forti.--With a strong hand.

Mauvaise honte.--Unbecoming bashfulness.

Meditatione fugæ.--In contemplation of flight.

Memento mori.--Remember that thou must die.

Memorabilia.--Things to be remembered; matters deserving of record.

Meum et tuum.--Mine and thine.

Minutiæ.--Trifles.

Mirabile dictu.--Wonderful to tell.

Multum in parvo.--Much in a small space.

Mutatis mutandis.--After making the necessary changes.

Ne plus ultra.--No farther, or greatest extent.

Ne quid nimis.--Too much of one thing is good for nothing.

Necessitas non habet legem.--Necessity has no law.

Nemine contradicente.--Unanimously, no one disagreeing; abr. nem. con.

Nemine dissentiente.--Unanimously, or without a dissenting voice; abr. nem. dis.

Nemo me impune lacesset.--Nobody shall provoke me with impunity.

Nisi Dominus frustra.--Unless the Lord be with us, all efforts are in vain.

Nolens volens.--Willing or unwilling.

Nom de guerre.--Assumed name.

Non compos, or Non compos mentis.-- Out of one’s senses.

Non est inventus.--Not found.

Nonchalance.--Indifference.

Nota bene.--Mark well.

Nunc pro tunc.--Now for then.

O tempora, O mores.--O the times, O the manners.

Omnes.--All.

Onus.--Burden.

Onus probandi.--Burden of proof.

Ore tenus.--From the mouth; by word of mouth.

Outré.--Preposterous.

Pari passu.--With an equal pace.

Passim.--Everywhere.

Pax in bello.--Peace in war.

Peccavi.--I have sinned.

Pendente lite.--While the action (at law) is pending, or while it is going on.

Per curiam.--By the court.

Per se.--Alone, or by itself.

Perdue.--Concealed.

Petit maître (Little master).--Fop.

Posse comitatus.--The power of the county.

Pour autre vie.--For the life of another.

Prima facie.--On the first face; at first view; at first sight.

Primum mobile.--The prime mover.

Principiis obsta.--Resist the first innovations.

Pro aris et focîs.--For our altars and our hearths.

Pro bono publico.--For the public good.

Pro et con.--For and against.

Pro forma.--For form’s sake.

Pro hac vice.--For this time.

Pro loco et tempore.--For the place and time.

Pro rege, lege, et grege.--For the king, the constitution, and the people.

Pro re natâ.--For the occasion.

Pro tanto.--For so much.

Pro tempore.--For the time, or for a time.

Protégé.--A person patronised and protected.

Quamdiu se bene gesserit.--As long as he shall have behaved well.

Quantum.--The due proportion.

Quantum meruit.--As much as he deserves.

Quare impedit (Why he hinders).--A law term, and means the writ which a person disturbed.

Quasi dicas.--As though thou shouldst say; abr. q. d.

Quid pro quo.--A mutual consideration.

Quid nunc?--What now?

Quis separabit.--Who shall separate us?

Quo animo.--The intention with which.

Quoad.--As to; as far as.

Quo jure?--By what right?

Quondam.--Formerly.

Re infectâ.--The business not being done.

Regina.--Queen.

Requiescat in pace.--May he (or she) rest in peace.

Res publica.--The common weal.

Resurgam.--I shall rise again.

Rex.--King.

Rouge.--Red, or red paint.

Rus in urbe.--The country in town.

Sang froid (Cold blood).--Coolness.

Sans.--Without.

Savant.--A learned man.

Scandalum Magnatum.--Scandal, or scandalous expressions, against the nobility; abr. scand. mag.

Semper eadem.--Always the same.

Senatus consultum.--A decree of the senate.

Seriatim.--In regular order.

Simplex munditiis.--Simply elegant; free from gaudy ornament.

Sine die.--Without mentioning any particular day.

Sine qua non (Without which, not).--Indispensable requisite, or condition.

Soi-disant (Self-styling).--Pretended.

Spectas et tu spectabere.--You see and you will be seen.

Status quo.--The state in which it was.

Sub pœna.--Under a penalty.

Sui generis.--Singular; unparalleled; of its own kind.

Summum bonum.--Greatest good.

Supra.--Above.

Suum cuique.--Let each man have his own.

Tapis.--Carpet.

Tête-à-tête.--Face to face, or private conversation of two persons.

Toties quoties.--As often as.

Trait.--Feature.

Tria juncta in uno.--Three joined in one.

Ultimus.--The last.

Un bel esprit.--A wit; a virtuoso.

Una voce.--Unanimously.

Unique.--Singular.

Uti possedetis.--As ye possess, or present possession.

Utile dulci.--Utility with pleasure.

Vade mecum (Go with me).--Constant companion.

Vale.--Farewell.

Valet-de-chambre.--A servant who assists his master in dressing.

Veluti in speculum.--As in a looking-glass.

Verbatim.--Word for word.

Versus.--Against.

Veto.--I forbid.

Vi et armis.--By force and arms.

Via.--By the way of.

Vice.--In the room of.

Vice versa.--The terms being exchanged; the reverse.

Vide.--See.

Vide ut supra.--See as above.

Vis poetica.--Poetic genius.

Viva voce.--By the living voice.

Vivant rex et regina.--Long live the king and queen.

Vive la bagatelle.--Success to trifles.

Vive le roi.--Long live the king.

Vox et præterea nihil.--A voice and nothing more.

Vox populi.--The voice of the people.

Vulgo.--Commonly.

PICA.

The name of a type, one size larger than Small Pica, and one smaller than English. In Moxon’s time seventy-five Pica bodies measured a foot. All the sizes of types larger than Canon, are named from the number of Pica bodies contained in their depth, as Four Line Pica, Five Line Pica, and so on indefinitely. Leads or space lines are also cast to proportionate parts of Pica, as four to Pica, six to Pica, &c.

PICK BRUSH.

A hard brush with rather fine hairs; it is used to brush picks or dirt out of a form, when working, and each press is generally supplied with one.

PICKER.

A fine pointed bodkin, or a needle, with which to take picks out of a form.

PICKS.

When either pieces of the skin or film that grows on ink with standing by, or any dirt, get into the hollows of the face of the letter, that film or dirt will fill or choke up the face of the letter, and print black; and is called a pick, because the pressman with the point of a needle picks it out.--M.

PIE.

When a page is broken, those broken letters are called pie. See BROKEN LETTERS.--M. We now call it Pie when the letters are all mixed indiscriminately together.

It is equally the interest of the employer and the workman to prevent the accumulation of pie in a printing office, for it swallows up useful sorts, to the delay, loss, and disappointment of both parties; and if a strict method be not enforced to prevent its increase, a master may be continually casting sorts; and at last it becomes an Herculean task to clear it away. No receptacle for it should ever be accessible to the workmen; and no types should ever be put into the waste metal box but by the person who has the care of the materials, that he may be enabled to prevent any abuse of this kind; for it is too common a practice, both for boys and men, when an accident happens, to throw a great part of the pie into the waste metal box, to save themselves the trouble of distributing it.

PIG.

Pressmen are called pigs by compositors, sometimes by way of sport, and sometimes by way of irritation; in the same way the press room is called a pigstye. When the compositors wish to teaze them, they will grunt when a pressman goes into the composing room; but they rarely venture to do this in the press room. In Moxon’s time they were called Horses. See ANCIENT CUSTOMS.

PIGEON HOLES.

Wide whites between words, are by compositors (in way of scandal) called pigeon-holes, and are by none accounted good workmanship, unless in cases of necessity.--M. Cases of necessity do not make them good workmanship; and the only instances in which they are tolerated are when a page is small, and the type is large in proportion to it, and in columns of table work. In marginal notes they are avoided, by not of necessity spacing every line full out.

PILE OF BOOKS.

When a work is finished at the press, it is gathered, collated, folded, and put into books, pressed, and then piled up in some convenient part of the warehouse, in readiness for delivery.

The piles are erected as a stone mason would build, in layers of four, five, six, or more books to each layer, according to the number printed, and the convenience in the warehouse; the books forming these layers are turned back and fore edge alternately, so that a single copy can be readily got, and in removing them they are less liable to get confused; the upper layer should always be laid in a different order from that below it, so that the book should invariably cross a joining of that under it; and when the pile is high, I would recommend some wrappers to be placed occasionally between the layers, they prevent the sides bulging out, and make the pile firm. It is necessary to wrap up each parcel of the bottom layer in brown paper or wrappers, to preserve the edges and backs of the books clean. For the protection of this bottom layer, the pile should be erected on a stage, or, in default of that, some wrappers and waste paper should be spread on the floor upon which to place it; for the pile should never be raised without something interposed between the books and the floor.

PILE OF PAPER

is made similar to a pile of books; but, as the paper always comes in to a printing office cased in wrappers, the precautions used in keeping a pile of books clean are not necessary. The number of bundles in the foundation will be determined by the quantity received. The warehouseman should invariably mark the wrapper of each bundle with the name of the work it is intended for, before it is piled away.

PILE OF PRINTED PAPER.

During the progress of printing a work, the sheets are, after being dried, placed in piles, generally resting against a wall of the building.

When the sheets are taken down dry from the poles, they are knocked up even, and piled against a wall generally, upon a stage to keep the bottom of the pile out of the way of harm, or, in want of a stage, upon some wrappers and waste paper to keep the bottom sheets from the floor, one wrapper always placed so as to project and turn over about a ream of paper, and turned into the heap, to preserve the edges clean, the first signature being always at the bottom, and the following ones piled in consecutive order upon it; between each signature a label is inserted in front, with the name of the work and the signature. What are called tops are placed on the pile, and some waste paper, to preserve the top sheets from dust and other matters that might soil them. It is usual to place the bottom a few inches from, and to gradually incline it to, the wall, so that the upper part may rest against it: this causes the pile to stand firmer than it would do if piled perpendicularly.

MR. PITT’S MARK.

The printer’s name and residence affixed to printed books or other articles, by the enactment of the act of parliament of 39 Geo. 3. c. 79., was technically so called.

PLANE DOWN.

To make the face of all the types in a form even, by passing the face of the planer over them, and striking the back of it with a mallet.

When the quoins are pushed up with the fingers, previous to locking the form up, I would plane it down gently, striking the back of the planer with the side of my doubled hand, lifting the planer a little up each time it is advanced; after the quoins are tightened round the form, I would plane it down again gently with the mallet; and finally with firmer blows after it is locked up; always lifting the planer clear of the form at every advance that is made with it; if any thing be under the form, it will be perceived when you plane down with the hand; that part should be omitted being struck upon; and when the form is locked up it ought to be lifted, the substance that is under it taken away, the form then laid down again, the quoins of that quarter slackened, and planed down: but types that stand up from any cause should never be planed down while tightly locked up, as it is almost a certainty that they will be destroyed.

PLANER.

A piece of beech wood, planed smooth and even on the face, to plane the types in a form down with, by striking it on the top with a mallet, to prevent any of them from standing up. It is usually made 9 inches long, 4¼ broad, out of 2 inch stuff, a little thicker in the crown, and the edges hollowed the long way, to facilitate the lifting of it about.

PLANETS.

The names of seven planets are used in some instances for the seven days of the week, in the following manner:--

The Sun, Dies Solis, is Sunday.

The Moon, Dies Lunæ, is Monday.

Mars, Dies Martis, is Tuesday.

Mercury, Dies Mercurii, is Wednesday.

Jupiter, Dies Jovis, is Thursday.

Venus, Dies Veneris, is Friday.

Saturn, Dies Saturni, is Saturday.

In the Journals of the House of Lords, they use the term _Dies Sabbati_ for Saturday, that day being the original Sabbath. See ASTRONOMICAL CHARACTERS.

PLANK.

That part of a wooden press which forms the bottom of the coffin; it projects beyond the coffin where the tympan joints are placed, upon which part the gallows sockets are fixed; on the bottom the cramp irons; and to each end the girths, wherewith to run the carriage in and out.

PLATEN.

The platen is commonly made of beechen plank, two inches and an half thick, its length about fourteen inches, and its breadth about nine inches.--M. This is the description of a platen for a two pull press of the old construction: they are now always made of well seasoned hard mahogany for wooden presses, thicker, and sometimes faced with iron.

The platen is that part of the machine which comes down upon the form, and, being acted upon by the spindle, produces the impression. Iron presses have nearly superseded wooden presses, and have of course iron platens; they are all one pull presses, and the platen ought to be made large enough to cover the types of as large a form as the press will contain. Whether they be of wood or of iron, the face of the platen, that is, the under side, which produces the impression, ought to be a true plane, as the least inequality in it produces an unequal impression, which causes a great deal of trouble at press to rectify it, more particularly in fine work.

PLATEN HOOKS.

Four iron hooks screwed into the corners of the platen.--M. To tie it up by to the hose hooks. This is in wooden presses.

PLATEN PAN.

A square pan on the top of the platen, in which the toe of the spindle works.--M. At present it is made round, of bell metal, with a stud of hardened steel in it, for the toe of the spindle to work on, and it fits into the platen plate with a square stem.

PLATEN PLATE.

A square plate of iron inlaid on the top of the platen in wooden presses, in which is placed the platen pan.

PLATE PAPER.

This paper takes a good impression; but, without great care at press, owing to its thickness and softness, it is by the process pressed into the interstices between the lines, which produces an impression of more than the surface, and, of course, of more than is wanted to appear, particularly in engravings on wood: the skill of the artist is thus rendered of little avail; and the delicacy and tone of the engraving are destroyed.

To control this evil, when thick plate paper is used, I would advise that it should be very slightly wetted; when a few impressions only are wanted, putting the pieces into a heap of damp paper for a short time will be sufficient; and to have only one thickness of stout paper in the tympans. See PAPER. WETTING PAPER.

PLAY WITH QUADRATS. See ANCIENT CUSTOMS.--M. Also JEFF, and THROW.

PLURAL.

For the plural number of nouns, See ORTHOGRAPHY.

POINTS.

Two thin pieces of iron, with points or spurs at one end, fixed to the tympan with screws, to make register with. See REGISTER SPUR.

POINTS. See TYPOGRAPHICAL POINTS.

POINT HOLES.

The two holes the points prick in a sheet of paper.--M. These holes are made by the point spurs when the white paper is working, and are for the purpose of making register with when the reiteration is worked by fitting these holes on the spurs, on the opposite side of the sheet of paper.

POINTING.

When the Pressmen are working the reiteration, and have to place the point holes, made when the white paper was worked, on the points, in order to make both sides of the sheet in register, it is frequently termed Pointing.

POINTS.

, ; : . - ? ! ( ’ ) [ * § † and other marks, are all by Printers and Founders called Points.--M. We have now in addition the ‡ ‖ ¶ ☞: but when we speak of points at the present day, it is generally understood to mean those only which are used in punctuation, from the comma to the apostrophe; the parenthesis and crotchet are spoken of by their names; and the others are usually styled marks, or references. For the uses of them, See PUNCTUATION; and each point or reference under its own name.

POINT SCREWS.

Two square headed and square shanked bolts with a screw at the end, that go through the grooves in the tympan, with a nut on the upper side, by which the points are firmly affixed to the tympan.

POLES.

To hang paper on to dry. They are about two inches and a half wide, made of inch white deal, and are placed across the room, about fourteen inches from the ceiling and nine or ten inches apart, resting at each end on a long piece of wood fastened to the walls of the room, in notches to retain them in their situations. They should always be kept clean, and, if they have not had paper hung on them for some time, the warehouseman should see that the dust be brushed off them before any more is hung up. See HANG UP PAPER. PEEL.

POLLING BACKWARD.

There are instances when a piece of work has been in the hands of a companionship, and one of them has obtained a knowledge of the following copy having some fat in it, a short page or a blank page for instance, that he has delayed his own work in order to obtain this fat; and thus lose perhaps two shillings, which he might have earned in the time, to obtain an advantage to the amount of but one shilling. This is termed polling backwards.

POLONAISE. The Polish alphabet consists of twenty-four letters, viz.:--

+--------+------------------------------------------------------------+ | Figure.| Power. | +--------+------------------------------------------------------------+ | A a | ah, as in father, art. | | B b | b, as in bay. | | C c | ts, or the German z. | | D d | d, as in day. | | E e | French e mute. | | F f | f, as in deaf, fine. | | G g | always a hard sound, as in game, gift. | | H h | is always aspirated. | | I i | i in field, ee in bee. | | J j | y consonant. | | K k | k, as in king, kick. | | L l | l, as in ell. | | M m | m, as in gem. | | N n | n, as in pen. | | O o | o, as in more. | | P p | p, as in pay. | | R r | r, as in err. | | S s | ss. | | T t | t, as in task. | | U u | as oo in cook, book, look. | | W w | initial, as v; medial and final as f. | | X x | x, as in six. | | Y y | a more obscure sound than i, which is always very clear.| | Z z | s initial; as zegar (to show) pr. segar. | +--------+------------------------------------------------------------+

In addition the following letters are accented, viz., consonants, b́ ć, ł, ḿ, ń, ṕ, ś, ẃ, ż, ź; vowels, á, é, ó, ą, ę.

When b́, ḿ, ń, ṕ, are accented, it is necessary to soften them a little by adding a very soft i, as drab́ (drab^i).

When ć is accented, it takes the sound of ch French.

Ł, ł, has a peculiar pronunciation of its own, nothing equivalent to it in English.

When ś is accented, it takes the sound of a very feeble French ck.

When ẃ is accented, it takes the sound of f, with a very feeble i added.

When ź is accented, it takes the sound of ś.

ż (pointed) is pronounced as s in pleasure, or French j in jamais.

á is distinguished very little in pronunciation, but it serves to show certain forms in the declensions.

ó is pronounced as oo, or French ou.

é approaches the sound of the mute e in que, je, le.

ą is pronounced as the French nasal on.

ę is pronounced as the French nasal in.

k is used in all those foreign words which have originally a c before the vowels a, o, u.

ẃ is used only at the end of words.

Q and V are used only in foreign proper names, &c. and are not strictly to be considered as Polish letters.--Grammaire Abrégée de la Langue Polonaise, par Jean Séverin Vater. Halle et Strasbourg, 1807.

Some Polish grammarians assert that the q is preferable to the q̦, as being more consistent with the general sound of the letter, and some books have been printed in which the q is substituted, but still q, is by far the most generally used.

POOR LAWS AMENDMENT.

4 & 5 Will. 4. c 76. s. 86. “And be it further enacted, That no Advertisement inserted by or under the Direction of the said Commissioners in the London Gazette or any Newspaper, for the Purpose of carrying into effect any Provisions of this Act, nor any Mortgage, Bond, Instrument, or any Assignment thereof, given by way of Security, in pursuance of the Rules, Orders, or Regulations of the said Commissioners, and conformable thereto, nor any Contract or Agreement, or Appointment of any Officer, made or entered into in pursuance of such Rules, Orders, or Regulations, and conformable thereto, nor any other Instrument made in pursuance of this Act, nor the Appointment of any paid Officer engaged in the Administration of the Laws for the Relief of the Poor, or in the Management or Collection of the Poor Rate, shall be charged or chargeable with any Stamp Duty whatever.”

POOR, RELIEF OF, Ireland. 1 & 2 Vict. c. 56. “An Act for the more effectual Relief of the destitute Poor in Ireland.

s. 96. “And be it enacted, that no Advertisement inserted by or under the Direction of the Commissioners in the London or Dublin Gazette, or any Newspaper, for the Purpose of carrying into effect any Provisions of this Act, nor any Charge, Mortgage, Bond, or Instrument given by way of Security in pursuance of the Orders of the Commissioners, and conformable thereto, nor any Transfer thereof, nor any Contract or Agreement made or entered into in pursuance of such orders, and conformable thereto, nor any Conveyance, Demise, or Assignment respectively, to or by the Commissioners, nor any Receipt for Rate, nor any other Instrument made in pursuance of this Act, nor the Appointment of any paid Officer engaged in the Administration of the Laws for the Relief of the Poor, or in the Management or Collection of the Poor Rate, shall be charged or chargeable with any Stamp Duty whatever.”

PORTUGUESE.

The Portuguese alphabet contains twenty-four letters, being the same as the English, with the exception of K and W, which are not in their alphabet.

The tittle, or little dash, which the Portuguese call til, is set by them over some letters instead of m; as bẽ instead of bem; convẽ instead of convém; hũa instead of huma.

They also set their til ~ over the vowels ao, aa, in the end of words, thus aõ aã.

It may be observed that the curved mark ~ is the most perfect, though it is found necessary, in English types, frequently to substitute the plain ‾ instead of the curved.--Vieyra’s Portuguese Grammar, 9th edit.

POST HORSES.

Penalty for forging Turnpike Tickets. By the Act 4 Geo. 4. c. 62. s. 41. it is enacted, “That if any Person shall falsely make, forge, or counterfeit, or cause or procure to be falsely made, forged, or counterfeited, or wilfully aid or assist in the false making, forging, or counterfeiting, any Ticket or Certificate by this Act authorized or directed to be used, with an Intent to defraud His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, or any Person or Persons, of any of the said Duties, or shall utter or publish as true any false, forged, or counterfeited Ticket or Certificate, with an Intent to defraud His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, or any Person or Persons, of any of the said Duties, every Person so offending in any or either of the Cases aforesaid shall forfeit and pay the Sum of Fifty Pounds.”

PRE-ANTEPENULTIMATE.

The last syllable but three of a word.

PRESS.

The machine by means of which a printed impression of types and engravings in relief is obtained.

It is a curious circumstance, that from the first introduction of the art of printing in Europe, about 1440, till Earl Stanhope made a great improvement, the principle of the press remained the same, and even the construction of it underwent little alteration. The principle is simple; a level surface attached to the end of a screw, by which it is pressed upon the types with a sheet of paper interposed to receive the impression. The improvements that Lord Stanhope introduced were an increased power, by means of a compound lever attached to the screw: this increased power was the means of producing larger presses, which enabled the printers to print larger sheets of paper than before, with one pull, even to the extent of a double royal; and these new presses, being made of iron, produced better workmanship than wooden ones, with less trouble, the wooden platen being subject to be indented, which occasioned the impression to be irregular; this required much time and trouble to equalize it, particularly in fine work. This iron platen wears out types sooner than the wooden platen. Many of our most splendid books were printed with wooden presses. For some account of the most approved iron presses, see under their respective names.

Although there are but few wooden printing presses now made, iron presses having superseded them, yet, as there are many still in being, it may be useful to retain the knowledge of fixing them in a proper manner, on which account I shall give an old pressman’s directions for this purpose.

“To erect a Press.--The feet must be horizontal, and the cheeks perpendicular; then put the cap on the cheeks, and fix the stays as firmly as possible between the cap and a solid wall, or a strong beam: while the joiner is doing this, the pressman rubs well with black lead the tenons of the head and winter, the mortises in the cheeks, and all other parts where friction occurs. Place the winter horizontally, and on it put the carriage which contains the ribs; the joiner shortens or lengthens the fore stay under the carriage till the ribs become horizontal; lay the coffin on the ribs; bed the stone, which is a very particular point, as it must be perfectly horizontal, and ought to be of equal thickness, and as smooth on the under side as on the upper surface, so that if the face should be at any time so indented as not to be fit for work, the same stone will do by turning it over, and occasion very little trouble in bedding it, and will not be so liable to break in working down as a new one. Cartridge paper is the safest bedding, and stout tape laid even under the stone is preferable to cords, as I know it is a preventive to the stone breaking; and after it is bedded, the ends of the tape are easier put between the coffin and the stone than cord.

“The head being put in, and the box with the spindle in it, fix the shelves; then fix the platen; this must be done so exact as to touch the face of all the type at one and the same time: the way to know this, is by cutting four narrow slips of paper about six inches long, and, taking care that there is no dirt on the stone nor on the bottom of the form, plane it well down, place the four slips of paper, one on each of the four corner pages; bring down the platen so gently, that the corners of it may barely touch the slips of paper, with very little pressure; if they all bind alike at one instant, the platen hangs right; if not, alter the fixing till they equally bind.

“The rounce being set, and the upper and under bolsters made, the pressman lays on a heavy form without blank pages, if he can get one; and if it be a new press, he brings down the bar to the near cheek regularly, until the press be properly wrought down. As he goes on, the new scaleboards work close, and cause the press to lose power; the pressman must continue adding more, until there be a sufficient quantity in the head. If it be really necessary, put some scaleboards under the winter, but the fewer the better. Pieces of felt hat are preferable to scaleboards for loading the head of a press.

“I have always found the least slurring in presses that have solid fixed winters, and have often abolished slurring and mackling in old presses, by taking out all the scaleboard from beneath the winter, and substituting solid blocks of wood. The mortises which contain the tenons of the head ought always to be made long enough to contain all the spring that is necessary for a good press.

“Attention being required, and much time lost in working down a new press, two guineas are paid for doing justice to it.”

PRESS BAR.

A curved bar of iron, one end of which goes through an opening in the spindle, and is secured by a screw in general, but sometimes by a square iron bolt which goes through an opening in the end of the bar, and as there is a shoulder that abuts against the square part of the spindle, both these methods draw it tight up, and attach it firmly to the spindle; at the other end there is a long, thick, tapering, wooden handle, through which the bar goes, and it is either secured by a screw, or the bar rivetted at the end with a collar round it. The bar to screw the book press down with is also called a Press Bar.

PRESS BOARDS.

Boards made of deal, beech, elm, or mahogany, to place between paper in the book press. They are made smooth on both sides, and it is preferable to have them without a joint when it is practicable.

PRESS GOES.

When the pressmen are at work, the press is said to go.--M.

PRESS GOES EASY, LIGHT. See EASY PULL.

PRESS GOES HARD, HEAVY. See HARD PULL.--M.

PRESSMAN.

The man who executes printing at the press, and produces impressions from types and engravings in relief.

PRESSMEN’S PRICES. See SCALE.

PRESS PIN.

A small iron bar, wherewith to screw the book press down in the warehouse, till there is some pressure on the paper, when it is wrung down with the press bar.

PRESS PROOF.

A good impression of a sheet of a work, or of a job, to read it carefully by, and to mark the errors, previous to its being put to press.

PRESS STANDS STILL.

When the pressmen are not at work, or have nothing to do, the press is said to stand still.

PRESS STONE.

A stone fitted into the coffin, on which the form is placed to be printed. See PRESS.

PRESSWORK.

Under the articles ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD and FINE PRESSWORK I have gone into detail respecting the manner of producing superior workmanship; it will not therefore be necessary to dwell at any great length upon presswork generally. As the finest presswork is the impression from the face of the types, and the face only, and there being little elastic substance between the platen and the types, those which are new, or not much worn, can only be used for this purpose. But as the greater number of books, and other articles, are printed at a much lower rate, the printer finds it necessary to use types that are often much worn, with the angles rounded off by use; the pressman is then obliged to have more blanket in the tympans, that their elasticity may penetrate between the types, and produce an impression from the rounded parts; he is obliged also to use a weaker ink, which distributes easily and readily; it also requires less beating and rolling; he is thus enabled to make greater despatch. The process of making ready is the same in both, but in this instance is not carried out to so much nicety, for the additional blankets preclude the necessity; still the impression must be pretty equal; the making of register is the same in both cases--page must fall exactly upon page; neither does it require so great a pull; yet it is requisite that the pressman should preserve the work of a proper colour, and that that colour should be uniform.

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 4to. and ½ Sheet of 8vo.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | No. of | 6s. | 6s. 6d. | 7s. | 7s. 6d. | 8s. | | Pages. | | | | | | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 9 | 0 0 9¾ | 0 0 10½ | 0 0 11¼ | 0 1 0 | | 2 | 0 1 6 | 0 1 7½ | 0 1 9 | 0 1 10½ | 0 2 0 | | 3 | 0 2 3 | 0 2 5¼ | 0 2 7½ | 0 2 9¾ | 0 3 0 | | 4 | 0 3 0 | 0 3 3 | 0 3 6 | 0 3 9 | 0 4 0 | | 5 | 0 3 9 | 0 4 0¾ | 0 4 4½ | 0 4 8¼ | 0 5 0 | | 6 | 0 4 6 | 0 4 10½ | 0 5 3 | 0 5 7½ | 0 6 0 | | 7 | 0 5 3 | 0 5 8¼ | 0 6 1½ | 0 6 6¾ | 0 7 0 | | 8 | 0 6 0 | 0 6 6 | 0 7 0 | 0 7 6 | 0 8 0 | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 8s. 6d. | 9s. | 9s. 6d. | 10s. | 10s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 0¾ | 0 1 1½ | 0 1 2¼ | 0 1 3 | 0 1 3¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 11s. | 11s. 6d. | 12s. | 12s. 6d. | 13s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 4½ | 0 1 5¼ | 0 1 6 | 0 1 6¾ | 0 1 7½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 13s. 6d. | 14s. | 14s. 6d. | 15s. | 15s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 8¼ | 0 1 9 | 0 1 9¾ | 0 1 10½ | 1 1 11¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 16s. | 16s. 6d. | 17s. | 17s. 6d. | 18s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 0 | 0 2 0¾ | 0 2 1½ | 0 2 2¼ | 0 2 3 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 4to. and ½ Sheet of 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 18s. 6d. | 19s. | 19s. 6d. | 20s. | 20s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 3¾ | 0 2 4½ | 0 2 5¼ | 0 2 6 | 0 2 6¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 21s. | 21s. 6d. | 22s. | 22s. 6d. | 23s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 7½ | 0 2 8¼ | 0 2 9 | 0 2 9¾ | 0 2 10½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 23s. 6d. | 24s. | 24s. 6d. | 25s. | 25s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 11¼ | 0 3 0 | 0 3 0¾ | 0 3 1½ | 0 3 2¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 26s. | 26s. 6d. | 27s. | 27s. 6d. | 28s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 3 | 0 3 3¾ | 0 3 4½ | 0 3 5¼ | 0 3 6 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 28s. 6d. | 29s. | 29s. 6d. | 30s. | 30s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 6¾ | 0 3 7½ | 0 3 8¼ | 0 3 9 | 0 3 9¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 4to and ½ Sheet of 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 31s. | 31s. 6d. | 32s. | 32s. 6d. | 33s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 10½ | 0 3 11¼ | 0 4 0 | 0 4 0¾ | 0 4 1½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 33s. 6d. | 34s. | 34s. 6d. | 35s. | 35s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 2¼ | 0 4 3 | 0 4 3¾ | 0 4 4½ | 0 4 5¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 36s. | 36s. 6d. | 37s. | 37s. 6d. | 38s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 6 | 0 4 6¾ | 0 4 7½ | 0 4 8¼ | 0 4 9 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 38s. 6d. | 39s. | 39s. 6d. | 40s. | 40s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 9¾ | 0 4 10½ | 0 4 11¼ | 0 5 0 | 0 5 0¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 41s. | 41s. 6d. | 42s. | 42s. 6d. | 43s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 1½ | 0 5 2¼ | 0 5 3 | 0 5 3¾ | 0 5 4½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 4to. and ½ Sheet of 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 43s. 6d. | 44s. | 44s. 6d. | 45s. | 45s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 5¼ | 0 5 6 | 0 5 6¾ | 0 5 7½ | 0 5 8¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 46s. | 46s. 6d. | 47s. | 47s. 6d. | 48s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 9 | 0 5 9¾ | 0 5 10½ | 0 5 11¼ | 0 6 0 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 48s. 6d. | 49s. | 49s. 6d. | 50s. | 50s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 6 0¾ | 0 6 1½ | 0 6 2¼ | 0 6 3 | 0 6 3¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 51s. | 51s. 6d. | 52s. | 52s. 6d. | 53s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 6 4½ | 0 6 5¼ | 0 6 6 | 0 6 6¾ | 0 6 7½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 53s. 6d. | 54s. | 54s. 6d. | 55s. | 55s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 6 8¼ | 0 6 9 | 0 6 9¾ | 0 6 10½ | 0 6 11¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 4to. and ½ Sheet of 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 56s. | 56s. 6d. | 57s. | 57s. 6d. | 58s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 7 0 | 0 7 0¾ | 0 7 1½ | 0 7 2¼ | 0 7 3 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 58s. 6d. | 59s. | 59s. 6d. | 60s. | 60s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 7 3¾ | 0 7 4½ | 0 7 5¼ | 0 7 6 | 0 7 6¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 61s. | 61s. 6d. | 62s. | 62s. 6d. | 63s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 7 7½ | 0 7 8¼ | 0 7 9 | 0 7 9¾ | 0 7 10½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 63s. 6d. | 64s. | 64s. 6d. | 65s. | 65s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 7 11¼ | 0 8 0 | 0 8 0¾ | 0 8 1½ | 0 8 2¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 66s. | 66s. 6d. | 67s. | 67s. 6d. | 68s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 8 3 | 0 8 3¾ | 0 8 4½ | 0 8 5¼ | 0 8 6 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 4to. and ½ Sheet of 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 68s. 6d. | 69s. | 69s. 6d. | 70s. | 70s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 8 6¾ | 0 8 7½ | 0 8 8¼ | 0 8 9 | 0 8 9¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 71s. | 71s. 6d. | 72s. | 72s. 6d. | 73s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 8 10½ | 0 8 11¼ | 0 9 0 | 0 9 0¾ | 0 9 1½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 73s. 6d. | 74s. | 74s. 6d. | 75s. | 75s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 9 2¼ | 0 9 3 | 0 9 3¾ | 0 9 4½ | 0 9 5¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 76s. | 76s. 6d. | 77s. | 77s. 6d. | 78s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 9 6 | 0 9 6¾ | 0 9 7½ | 0 9 8¼ | 0 9 9 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 78s. 6d. | 79s. | 79s. 6d. | 80s. | 80s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 9 9¾ | 0 9 10½ | 0 9 11¼ | 0 10 0 | 0 10 0¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 4to. and ½ Sheet of 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 81s. | 81s. 6d. | 82s. | 82s. 6d. | 83s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 10 1½ | 0 10 2¼ | 0 10 3 | 0 10 3¾ | 0 10 4½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 83s. 6d. | 84s. | 84s. 6d. | 85s. | 85s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 10 5¼ | 0 10 6 | 0 10 6¾ | 0 10 7½ | 0 10 8¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 86s. | 86s. 6d. | 87s. | 87s. 6d. | 88s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 10 9 | 0 10 9¾ | 0 10 10½ | 0 10 11¼ | 0 11 0 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 88s. 6d. | 89s. | 89s. 6d. | 90s. | 90s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 11 0¾ | 0 11 1½ | 0 11 2¼ | 0 11 3 | 0 11 3¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 91s. | 91s. 6d. | 92s. | 92s. 6d. | 93s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 11 4½ | 0 11 5¼ | 0 11 6 | 0 11 6¾ | 0 11 7½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | No. of | 6s. | 6s. 6d. | 7s. | 7s. 6d. | 8s. | | pages. | | | | | | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 4½ | 0 0 5 | 0 0 5¼ | 0 0 5¾ | 0 0 6 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 8s. 6d. | 9s. | 9s. 6d. | 10s. | 10s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 6½ | 0 0 6¾ | 0 0 7¼ | 0 0 7½ | 0 0 8 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 11s. | 11s. 6d. | 12s. | 12s. 6d. | 13s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 8¼ | 0 0 8¾ | 0 0 9 | 0 0 9½ | 0 0 9¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 13s. 6d. | 14s. | 14s. 6d. | 15s. | 15s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 10¼ | 0 0 10½ | 0 0 11 | 0 0 11¼ | 0 0 11¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 16s. | 16s. 6d. | 17s. | 17s. 6d. | 18s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 0 | 0 1 0½ | 0 1 0¾ | 0 1 1¼ | 0 1 1½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 18s. 6d. | 19s. | 19s. 6d. | 20s. | 20s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 2 | 0 1 2¼ | 0 1 2¾ | 0 1 3 | 0 1 3½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 21s. | 21s. 6d. | 22s. | 22s. 6d. | 23s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 3¾ | 0 1 4¼ | 0 1 4½ | 0 1 5 | 0 1 5¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 23s. 6d. | 24s. | 24s. 6d. | 25s. | 25s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 5¾ | 0 1 6 | 0 1 6½ | 0 1 6¾ | 0 1 7¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 26s. | 26s. 6d. | 27s. | 27s. 6d. | 28s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 7½ | 0 1 8 | 0 1 8¼ | 0 1 8¾ | 0 1 9 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 28s. 6d. | 29s. | 29s. 6d. | 30s. | 30s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 9½ | 0 1 9¾ | 0 1 10¼ | 0 1 10½ | 0 1 11 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 31s. | 31s. 6d. | 32s. | 32s. 6d. | 33s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 11¼ | 0 1 11¾ | 0 2 0 | 0 2 0½ | 0 2 0¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 33s. 6d. | 34s. | 34s. 6d. | 35s. | 35s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 1¼ | 0 2 1½ | 0 2 2 | 0 2 2¼ | 0 2 2¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 36s. | 36s. 6d. | 37s. | 37s. 6d. | 38s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 3 | 0 2 3½ | 0 2 3¾ | 0 2 4¼ | 0 2 4½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 38s. 6d. | 39s. | 39s. 6d. | 40s. | 40s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 5 | 0 2 5¼ | 0 2 5¾ | 0 2 6 | 0 2 6½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 41s. | 41s. 6d. | 42s. | 42s. 6d. | 43s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 6¾ | 0 2 7¼ | 0 2 7½ | 0 2 8 | 0 2 8¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 43s. 6d. | 44s. | 44s. 6d. | 45s. | 45s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 8¾ | 0 2 9 | 0 2 9½ | 0 2 9¾ | 0 2 10¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 46s. | 46s. 6d. | 47s. | 47s. 6d. | 48s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 10½ | 0 2 11 | 0 2 11¼ | 0 2 11¾ | 0 3 0 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 48s. 6d. | 49s. | 49s. 6d. | 50s. | 50s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 0½ | 0 3 0¾ | 0 3 1¼ | 0 3 1½ | 0 3 2 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 51s. | 51s. 6d. | 52s. | 52s. 6d. | 53s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 2¼ | 0 3 2¾ | 0 3 3 | 0 3 3½ | 0 3 3¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 53s. 6d. | 54s. | 54s. 6d. | 55s. | 55s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 4¼ | 0 3 4½ | 0 3 5 | 0 3 5¼ | 0 3 5¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 56s. | 56s. 6d. | 57s. | 57s. 6d. | 58s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 6 | 0 3 6½ | 0 3 6¾ | 0 3 7¼ | 0 3 7½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 58s. 6d. | 59s. | 59s. 6d. | 60s. | 60s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 8 | 0 3 8¼ | 0 3 8¾ | 0 3 9 | 0 3 9½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 61s. | 61s. 6d. | 62s. | 62s. 6d. | 63s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 9¾ | 0 3 10¼ | 0 3 10½ | 0 3 11 | 0 3 11¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 63s. 6d. | 64s. | 64s. 6d. | 65s. | 65s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 3 11¾ | 0 4 0 | 0 4 0½ | 0 4 0¾ | 0 4 1¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 66s. | 66s. 6d. | 67s. | 67s. 6d. | 68s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 1½ | 0 4 2 | 0 4 2¼ | 0 4 2¾ | 0 4 3 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 68s. 6d. | 69s. | 69s. 6d. | 70s. | 70s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 3½ | 0 4 3¾ | 0 4 4¼ | 0 4 4½ | 0 4 5 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 71s. | 71s. 6d. | 72s. | 72s. 6d. | 73s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 5¼ | 0 4 5¾ | 0 4 6 | 0 4 6½ | 0 4 6¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 73s. 6d. | 74s. | 74s. 6d. | 75s. | 75s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 7¼ | 0 4 7½ | 0 4 8 | 0 4 8¼ | 0 4 8¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 76s. | 76s. 6d. | 77s. | 77s. 6d. | 78s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 9 | 0 4 9½ | 0 4 9¾ | 0 4 10¼ | 0 4 10½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 78s. 6d. | 79s. | 79s. 6d. | 80s. | 80s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 4 11 | 0 4 11¼ | 0 4 11¾ | 0 5 0 | 0 5 0½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 81s. | 81s. 6d. | 82s. | 82s. 6d. | 83s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 0¾ | 0 5 1¼ | 0 5 1½ | 0 5 2 | 0 5 2¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 83s. 6d. | 84s. | 84s. 6d. | 85s. | 85s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 2¾ | 0 5 3 | 0 5 3½ | 0 5 3¾ | 0 5 4¼ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 86s. | 86s. 6d. | 87s. | 87s. 6d. | 88s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 4½ | 0 5 5 | 0 5 5¼ | 0 5 5¾ | 0 5 6 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 88s. 6d. | 89s. | 89s. 6d. | 90s. | 90s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 6½ | 0 5 6¾ | 0 5 7¼ | 0 5 7½ | 0 5 8 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 91s. | 91s. 6d. | 92s. | 92s. 6d. | 93s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 8¼ | 0 5 8¾ | 0 5 9 | 0 5 9½ | 0 5 9¾ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 93s. 6d. | 94s. | 94s. 6d. | 95s. | 95s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 5 10¼ | 0 5 10½ | 0 5 11 | 0 5 11¼ | 0 5 11¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 8vo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 96s. | 96s. 6d. | 97s. | 97s. 6d. | 98s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 6 0 | 0 6 0½ | 0 6 0¾ | 0 6 1¼ | 0 6 1½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 98s. 6d. | 99s. | 99s. 6d. | 100s. | 100s. 6d.| +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 6 2 | 0 6 2¼ | 0 6 2¾ | 0 6 3 | 0 6 3½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 101s. | 101s. 6d.| 102s. | 102s. 6d.| 103s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 6 3¾ | 0 6 4¼ | 0 6 4½ | 0 6 5 | 0 6 5¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | No. of | 8s. | 8s. 6d. | 9s. | 9s. 6d. | 10s. | | pages. | | | | | | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 4 | 0 0 4¼ | 0 0 4½ | 0 0 4¾ | 0 0 5 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 10s. 6d. | 11s. | 11s. 6d. | 12s. | 12s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 5¼ | 0 0 5½ | 0 0 5¾ | 0 0 6 | 0 0 6¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 13s. | 13s. 6d. | 14s. | 14s. 6d. | 15s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 6½ | 0 0 6¾ | 0 0 7 | 0 0 7¼ | 0 0 7½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 15s. 6d. | 16s. | 16s. 6d. | 17s. | 17s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 7¾ | 0 0 8 | 0 0 8¼ | 0 0 8½ | 0 0 8¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 18s. | 18s. 6d. | 19s. | 19s. 6d. | 20s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 9 | 0 0 9¼ | 0 0 9½ | 0 0 9¾ | 0 0 10 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 20s. 6d. | 21s. | 21s. 6d. | 22s. | 22s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 10¼ | 0 0 10½ | 0 0 10¾ | 0 0 11 | 0 0 11¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 23s. | 23s. 6d. | 24s. | 24s. 6d. | 25s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 11½ | 0 0 11¾ | 0 1 0 | 0 1 0¼ | 0 1 0½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 25s. 6d. | 26s. | 26s. 6d. | 27s. | 27s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 0¾ | 0 1 1 | 0 1 1¼ | 0 1 1½ | 0 1 1¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 28s. | 28s. 6d. | 29s. | 29s. 6d. | 30s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 2 | 0 1 2¼ | 0 1 2½ | 0 1 2¾ | 0 1 3 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 30s. 6d. | 31s. | 31s. 6d. | 32s. | 32s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 3¼ | 0 1 3½ | 0 1 3¾ | 0 1 4 | 0 1 4¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 33s. | 33s. 6d. | 34s. | 34s. 6d. | 35s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 4½ | 0 1 4¾ | 0 1 5 | 0 1 5¼ | 0 1 5½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 35s. 6d. | 36s. | 36s. 6d. | 37s. | 37s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 5¾ | 0 1 6 | 0 1 6¼ | 0 1 6½ | 0 1 6¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 38s. | 38s. 6d. | 39s. | 39s. 6d. | 40s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 7 | 0 1 7¼ | 0 1 7½ | 0 1 7¾ | 0 1 8 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 40s. 6d. | 41s. | 41s. 6d. | 42s. | 42s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 8¼ | 0 1 8½ | 0 1 8¾ | 0 1 9 | 0 1 9¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 43s. | 43s. 6d. | 44s. | 44s. 6d. | 45s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 9½ | 0 1 9¾ | 0 1 10 | 0 1 10¼ | 0 1 10½ |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 45s. 6d. | 46s. | 46s. 6d. | 47s. | 47s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 10¾ | 0 1 11 | 0 1 11¼ | 0 1 11½ | 0 1 11¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 12mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 48s. | 48s. 6d. | 49s. | 49s. 6d. | 50s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 0 | 0 2 0¼ | 0 2 0½ | 0 2 0¾ | 0 2 1 |

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 50s. 6d. | 51s. | 51s. 6d. | 52s. | 52s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 2 1¼ | 0 2 1½ | 0 2 1¾ | 0 2 2 | 0 2 2¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | No. of | 9s. | 9s. 6d. | 10s. | 10s. 6d. | 11s. | | pages. | | | | | | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 3 | 0 0 3¼ | 0 0 3½ | 0 0 3½ | 0 0 3¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 11s. 6d. | 12s. | 12s. 6d. | 13s. | 13s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 4 | 0 0 4 | 0 0 4¼ | 0 0 4½ | 0 0 4½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 14s. | 14s. 6d. | 15s. | 15s. 6d. | 16s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 4¾ | 0 0 5 | 0 0 5 | 0 0 5¼ | 0 0 5½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 16s. 6d. | 17s. | 17s. 6d. | 18s. | 18s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 5½ | 0 0 5¾ | 0 0 6 | 0 0 6 | 0 0 6¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 19s. | 19s. 6d. | 20s. | 20s. 6d. | 21s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 6½ | 0 0 6½ | 0 0 6¾ | 0 0 7 | 0 0 7 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 21s. 6d. | 22s. | 22s. 6d. | 23s. | 23s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 7¼ | 0 0 7½ | 0 0 7½ | 0 0 7¾ | 0 0 8 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 24s. | 24s. 6d. | 25s. | 25s. 6d. | 26s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 8 | 0 0 8¼ | 0 0 8½ | 0 0 8½ | 0 0 8¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 26s. 6d. | 27s. | 27s. 6d. | 28s. | 28s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 9 | 0 0 9 | 0 0 9¼ | 0 0 9½ | 0 0 9½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 29s. | 29s. 6d. | 30s. | 30s. 6d. | 31s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 9¾ | 0 0 10 | 0 0 10 | 0 0 10¼ | 0 0 10½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 31s. 6d. | 32s. | 32s. 6d. | 33s. | 33s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 10½ | 0 0 10¾ | 0 0 11 | 0 0 11 | 0 0 11¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 34s. | 34s. 6d. | 35s. | 35s. 6d. | 36s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 0 11½ | 0 0 11½ | 0 1 11¾ | 0 1 0 | 0 1 0 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 36s. 6d. | 37s. | 37s. 6d. | 38s. | 38s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 0¼ | 0 1 0½ | 0 1 0½ | 0 1 0¾ | 0 1 1 |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 39s. | 39s. 6d. | 40s. | 40s. 6d. | 41s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 1 | 0 1 1¼ | 0 1 1½ | 0 1 1½ | 0 1 1¾ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 41s. 6d. | 42s. | 42s. 6d. | 43s. | 43s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 2 | 0 1 2 | 0 1 2¼ | 0 1 2½ | 0 1 2½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 44s. | 44s. 6d. | 45s. | 45s. 6d. | 46s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 2¾ | 0 1 3 | 0 1 3 | 0 1 3¼ | 0 1 3½ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 46s. 6d. | 47s. | 47s. 6d. | 48s. | 48s. 6d. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 3½ | 0 1 3¾ | 0 1 4 | 0 1 4 | 0 1 4¼ |

TABLE OF THE PRICE OF PAGES. 18mo.--continued.

+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | | 49s. | 49s. 6d. | 50s. | 50s. 6d. | 51s. | +--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 1 | 0 1 4½ | 0 1 4½ | 0 1 4¾ | 0 1 5 | 0 1 5 |

PRICES CURRENT. See Newspaper Postage.

PRINTING

is the art of producing impressions from the surface of engravings in relief, whether those engravings are letters, diagrams, or pictorial engravings.

This explanation applies to letterpress printing, to which this work is confined, in contradistinction to copperplate printing. The details of the practice are diffused through the whole book, and may be referred to under their respective names.

The art of printing is the most important invention that was ever introduced to the world, in its effects on the human mind, and of consequence on all civilized society;--it preserves and disseminates all discoveries and improvements in the arts and sciences; it commemorates all other inventions; it hands down to posterity every important event; it immortalizes the actions of the great and good; and, above all, it extends and diffuses the word of God to all mankind;--and yet this very art has left its own origin enveloped in mystery and obscurity.

31 Hen. 8. c. 14. intituled, “An Act for abolishing of diuersitie of opinions in certaine Articles concerning christian religion.”

s. 4.----“It is therefore ordeined and enacted by the King our Souereigne Lord, the Lords spirituall and temporal, and the Commons in this present parliament assembled, and by authority of the same, That if any person or persons within this Realme of England, or any other the king’s dominions, after the xii. day of July next coming, by word, writing, imprinting, ciphering, or in any otherwise, doe publish, preach, teach, say, affirme, declare, dispute, argue, or hold any opinion, that in the blessed Sacrament of the Altar, vnder the forme of bread and wine (after the Consecration thereof) there is not present really, the naturall body and blood of our Sauiour Jesu Christ, conceiued of the Virgin Mary, or that after the said consecration there remaineth any substance of bread or wine, or any other substance but the substance of Christ, God and man: or after the time aboue said, publish, preach, teach, say, affirme, declare, dispute, argue, or hold opinion, that in the flesh, vnder forme of bread is not the very blood of Christ: or that with the blood vnder the forme of wine, is not the very flesh of Christ, aswel apart as though they were both together: or by any the means abouesaid, or otherwise, preach, teach, declare, or affirme the said Sacrament to be of other substance than is abouesayd, or by any meanes contemne, depraue, or despise the said blessed Sacrament: that then every such person and persons so offending, their aiders, comforters, counsellers, consentors, and abettors therein, being thereof convicted in forme vnderwritten by the authority abouesaid, shall be deemed and adjudged heretikes. And that euery such offence shall be iudged manifest heresie: and that euery such offender and offenders shall therefore haue and suffer iudgement, execution, paine and paines of death, by way of burning without any abiuration, Clergie or Sanctuary, to be therfore permitted, had, allowed, admitted or suffered: and also shall therefore forfeit and lose to the Kings highnes, his heires and successors, all his or their honors, manors, castles, lands, tenements, rents, reuersions, seruices, possessions, and all other his or their hereditaments, goods, and chattels, farmes and freeholds, whatsoeuer they be, which any such offender or offenders shall haue at the time of any such offence or offences committed or done, or at any time after, as in cases of high treason.”

s. 6. “Also bee it enacted by the authoritie aforesaid, That if any person or persons after the said twelfth day of July, by word, writing, printing, ciphering, or otherwise then as aboue rehearsed, publish, declare, or hold opinion, that the said communion of the blessed Sacrament in both kinds aforesaid, is necessary for the health of mans soule to bee given or ministered in both kindes, and so ought or should bee given and ministred to any person, or ought or should bee so in both kindes receiued or taken by any person, other than by Priests being at Masse, and so consecrating the same as is aforesaid: or that any man after the order of Priesthood receiued as is aforesaid, may marrie or may make contract of matrimonie: or that any man or woman which aduisedly hath made or shall make avow to God of chastitie or widowhood, may marrie, or make contract of matrimony: or that priuate Masses be not lawfull or not laudable, or should not be celebrated, had, or vsed, nor be agreeable to the lawes of God: or that auricular confession is not expedient and necessary to be reteined and continued, vsed and frequented in the Church of God, euery person being for any such offence duely conuicted or attainted by the lawes vnderwritten, shall forfeit and lose to the King our Souereigne Lord all his goods and chattels for euer, and also the profits of all his lands, tenements, annuities, fees, and offices during his life, and all his benefices and Spiritual promotions shall bee vtterly voyd, and also shall suffer imprisonment of his body at the will and pleasure of our said Souereign Lord the King. And if any such person or persons being once conuict of any the offences mentioned in this Article as is abouesaid, doe afterward eftsoones offend in any of the same, and be thereof accused, indicted or presented, and conuict againe by authority of the lawes underwritten, that then euery such person and persons so being twice conuict and attainted of the said offences, or any of them, shall be adjudged a felon and felons, and shall suffer iudgement, execution, and paines of death, losse and forfeiture of lands and goods, as in cases of felonie, without any priviledge of Clergie, or Sanctuary to be in any wise permitted, admitted or allowed in that behalfe.”

21 Jac. 1. c. 3. s. 10. “Provided also, and be it enacted, That this Act, or any Declaration, Provision, Disablement, Penalty, Forfeiture, or other Thing before-mentioned, shall not extend to any Letters Patents, or Grants of Privilege heretofore made, or hereafter to be made, of, for, or concerning Printing, nor to any Commission, Grant, or Letters Patents heretofore made, or hereafter to be made, for or concerning the Digging, Making or Compounding of Salt-petre or Gunpowder, or the Casting or Making of Ordnance, or Shot for Ordnance, nor to any Grant or Letters Patents heretofore made, or hereafter to be made, of any Office or Offices heretofore erected, made, or ordained, and now in Being, and put in Execution, other than such Offices as have been decried by any of his Majesty’s Proclamation or Proclamations: But that all and every the same Grants, Commissions, and Letters Patents, and all other Matters and Things tending to the Maintaining, Strengthening and Furtherance of the same, or any of them, shall be and remain of the like Force and Effect, and no other, and as free from the Declarations, Provisions, Penalties and Forfeitures contained in this Act, as if this Act had never been had nor made, and not otherwise.”

Ireland. 43 Geo. 3. c. 21. s. 70. “And be it further enacted, That from and after the Twenty-fifth Day of March One thousand eight hundred and three, no Person or Persons shall keep any Printing Press or Types for printing in Ireland, without first taking out a Licence for that Purpose from the said Commissioners of Stamp Duties; and that from and immediately after the passing of this Act, and from thenceforth as often as they shall be applied to, the said Commissioners for the Time being, or any One or more of them, shall, under their Hands and Seals, or Hand and Seal, grant such Licence for keeping Printing Presses or Types, to such Person or Persons who shall apply for the same, and who shall have performed the Requisites which shall by any Law then in Force in Ireland be necessary to be performed; which Licence shall state the House where such Presses or Types are to be used; and every Person or Persons who shall keep or use a Printing Press or Types for printing, without having obtained such Licence, shall forfeit such Printing Press and Types, and the Sum of One hundred Pounds Irish currency.”

55 Geo. 3. c. 101. “An Act to regulate the Collection of Stamp Duties on Matters in respect of which Licences may be granted by the Commissioners of Stamps in Ireland.

s. 13. “And be it further enacted, That no Person or Persons shall keep any Printing Press, or Types for printing in Ireland, without having first taken out a Licence for that Purpose, from the said Commissioners of Stamps, and that the said Commissioners shall, from time to time, under their Hands and Seals, grant such Licence for keeping Printing Presses or Types to such Person or Persons as shall apply for the same, and who shall have performed the Requisites which shall by any Act or Acts from time to time in force in Ireland, be necessary to be performed previous to the granting thereof, which Licence shall state the House where such Press or Presses, or Types, are to be used; and every Person or Persons who shall keep or use such Press, or a Printing Press or Types for printing, without having obtained such Licence, or in any other House save the House so mentioned in such Licence, shall forfeit such Printing Press and Types, and the Sum of Forty Pounds.”

Restrictions.--Ever since the introduction of printing into Europe, the press has been subjected to great restrictions. To show the nature of those restrictions in England, I have inserted two decrees of the Star Chamber, in the time of Queen Elizabeth, and the act 13 & 14 Charles 2. c. 33.; the principle of these was revived, with some modification, by the Act 39 Geo. 3. c. 79.

To the 9th volume of the Statutes at Large is prefixed a Preface, or Address from the Editor, Owen Ruffhead, to the Reader, from which the following is on Extract.

“What next claims our Observation is the memorable Act of 13 Car. 2. c. 33. intitled ‘An Act for preventing Abuses in printing seditious, treasonable and unlicensed Books and Pamphlets; and for regulating Printing and Printing Presses.’ By this Act Printers are forbidden to publish any heretical, seditious, schismatical or OFFENSIVE* Books, and all Books and Pamphlets are to be licensed by particular Licensers appointed according to the Nature of the Subject, and the Number of Printing Presses are hereby limited.

[* “The Word OFFENSIVE is a Word of dangerous Latitude: But the Words are copied literatim from the Star Chamber Decree, of which mention will be made hereafter.]

“The Troubles which had subsisted in the late Reign, had given Birth to a free Spirit of political Inquiry, which this Statute was calculated to suppress: And it is observable, that this Act is founded on a decree of the Star Chamber†, made in the Year 1637, which it copies without any material Variation, except that by the Decree, Offenders are to be punished as by the Honourable Court of Star Chamber, or the High Commission Court, shall be thought fit; whereas by the Act they are to be punished by Disability to exercise their Profession, and such farther Punishment, not extending to Life or Limb, as the Justices of the King’s Bench, or of Oyer and Terminer, &c. shall think fit. It is remarkable, also, that the Preamble to this Decree of the Star Chamber takes Notice of divers Decrees and Ordinances made for regulating Printers and Printing in the Reign of Queen Elizabeth, which are said to have been defective in some Particulars. From hence we may see what early Attempts were made to restrain this invaluable Liberty. So intolerant is the Nature of Power, wherever lodged, that they who have loudest exclaimed against such Restriction as a Badge of Slavery, were no sooner invested with full Sway, than they began to work on the same Principles of Oppression. About the Year 1644, the Parliament made Ordinances for restraining the Press, which were framed on the Plan of the above Star Chamber Decree; and against which Milton published a Treatise called Areopagitica.‡

[† “This Decree is so scarce, that it is imagined there is only one Copy extant, which is preserved in a private Library.

‡ “There is an Edition of the Areopagitica published by _A. Millar_ in 1738, with a sensible and spirited Preface, by Mr. Thomson, Author of the Seasons.]

“This Act was last continued by 1 Jac. 2. c. 17. for seven Years from June, 1685; but being incompatible with the noble Principles of the Revolution, it has never since been, and it is to be hoped never will be, revived.”§

[§ “It is impossible, however, on this Occasion, to avoid lamenting the many flagrant Instances wherein the Liberty of the Press has been lately abused by such wanton and indiscriminate Scurrility, as tends to make publick Censure lose its Effect, and render Men callous to the Stings of Reproof.”]

_Decrees of the Lords in the Star Chamber, touching Printers, Stationers, &c. 23 Junii, Eliz. 28. 1585. Orders for them sent to Archbishop Whitgift._

Whereas sundrie decrees and ordinances have, upon grave advice and deliberation, been made and published for the repressing of such great enormities and abuses as of late (most men in tyme past) have been commonlye used and practised by diverse contemptuouse and disorderly persons, professing the arte or misterie of printing and selling of books; and yet, notwithstanding, the said abuses and enormities are nothing abated, but (as is found by experience) doe rather more and more increase, to the wilful and manifest breach and contempt of the saide ordinances and decrees, to the great displeasure and offence of the queen’s moste excellent majestie; by reason whereof sundrie intolerable offences, troubles, and disturbances, have happened, as well in the church as in the civile government of the state and commonweale of this realme, which seem to have growen, because the paynes and penalties, conteyned and sett downe in the said ordinances and decrees, have been too light and small for the correction and punishment of so grievouse and heynouse offences, and so the offenders and malefactors in that behalfe have not been so severely punished as the qualitie of their offences hath deserved; her majestie, therefore, of her moste godlie and gracious disposicion, being careful that speedie and due reformacion be had of the abuses and disorders aforesaid, and that all persons using or professing the arte, trade, or mysterie of printing, or selling of books, should from henceforth be ruled and directed therein by some certeyn and knowen rules or ordinances, which should be inviolablie kept and observed, and the breakers and offenders of the same to be severely and sharplie punished and corrected, hathe straytly charged and required the most reverend father-in-God, the archbishop of Canterburie, and the right honourable the lordes, and others of her majesties privy council, to see her majesties said most gracious and godlie intention and purpose to be dulie and effectuallie executed and accomplished. Whereupon the said most reverend father, and the whole present in this honourable cowrte, this 23rd day of June, in the twenty-eighth year of her majesties reign, upon grave and mature deliberation, have ordeyned and decreed that the ordinances and constitutions, rules and articles, hereafter following, shall, from henceforth, by all persons, be duly and inviolablie kept and observed, according to the tenor, purporte, and true intent and meaning of the same, as they tender her majesties high displeasure, and as they wyll aunswere to the contrarie at their uttermoste peril. Videlicet.

Imprimis, That every printer, and other person, or persons whatsoever, which at this tyme present hath erected, or set up, or hereafter shall erect, set up, keepe, mainteyn, or have anye printing-presse, rowle, or other instrument, for imprinting of books, chartes, ballades, pourtrayctures, paper called damask-paper, or any such matters or things whatsoever, shall bring a true note, or certificate of the saide presses, or other printing instruments allreadie erected, within tenne days next coming, after the publication hereof; and of the saide presses, or other printing instruments hereafter to be erected, or set up, from tyme to tyme, within tenn dayes next after the erecting, or setting up thereof, unto the master and wardens of the companie of stacioners, of the cittie of London, for the tyme being, upon payne that everye person fayling, or offending herein, shall have all and everie the said presses, and other instruments, utterlye defaced and made unserviceable for imprinting for ever; and shall also suffer twelve moneths imprisonment without bayle or maynprise.

2. Item, That no printer of bookes, nor any other person or persons whatsoever, shall set up, keepe, or mayntain, any presse or presses, or any other instrument, or instruments, for imprinting of bookes, ballades, chartes, pourtrayctures, or any other thing or things whatsoever, but onelye in the cittie of London, or the suburbs thereof (except one presse in the universitie of Cambridge, and one other presse in the universitie of Oxforde, and no more) and that no person shall hereafter erect, sett up, or maynteyne in any secrett, or obscure corner, or place, any such presse or instrument before expressed; but that the same shall be in suche open place or places, in his or their house or houses, as the wardeins of the saide Companie of Stationers, for the tyme being, or suche other person, or persons, as by the saide wardeins shall be thereunto appointed, may from tyme to tyme have readie accesse unto, to search for and viewe the same; and that no printer or other person, or persons, shall at any time hereafter withstande, or make resistance to, or in, any suche view or search, nor denye, or keepe secrett any suche presse, or other instrument, for imprinting, upon payne that every person offending in any thing contrarie to this article, shall have all the saide presses, and other printing instruments, defaced, and made unserviceable for imprinting for ever; and shall also suffer imprisonment one whole year, without bayle, or maynprise, and to be disabled for ever to keepe any printing-presse, or other instrument for printing, or to be master of any printing-howsse, or to have any benefite thereby, other than onelye to worke as a journeyman for wages.

3. Item, That no printer, nor other person or persons whatsoever, that hath sett up anye presse, or instruments for imprinting within six moneths last past, shall hereafter use, or occupie the same, nor any person or persons shall hereafter erect, or sett up any presse, or other instrument of printing, till the excessive multitude of printers, having presses alreadie sett up, be abated, diminished, and by death given over, or otherwise brought to so small a number of masters, or owners of printing-howses, being of abilitie and good behaviour, as the archbishopp of Canterburie and bishopp of London, for the tyme being, shall thereupon think it requisite, and convenient, for the good service of the realme, to have some more presses, or instruments for printing erected, and sett up; and that when, and as often as the said archbishopp and bishopp, for the tyme being, shall so think it requisite and convenient, and shall signifie the same to the said master and wardeins of the said companie of Stationers, for the tyme being; that then, and so often, the saide master and wardeins, shall (within convenient tyme after) call the assistants of the saide companie before them, and shall make choice of one, or more (as by the opinion of the saide archbishopp and bishopp, for the tyme being, need shall require) of suche persons being free stationers, as for theyr skill, abilitie, and good behaviour, shall be thought by the saide master, wardeins, and assistants, or the more parte of them, meet to have the charge and government of a presse, or printing-house; and that within fowerteen dayes next after suche election, and choice, the saide master, wardeins, and fower other at the least of the assistants of the saide companie, shall present before the high commissioners in causes ecclesiastical, or sixe or more of them, whereof the saide archbishopp, or bishopp, to be one, to allowe, and admitt everie suche person so chosen and presented, to be master and governoure of a presse, and printing-housse, according to the same election and presentment, upon payne that everie person offending contrary to the intent of this article, shall have his presse, and instruments for printing, defaced, and made unserviceable, and allso suffer imprisonment, by the space of one whole yeare, without bayle, or maynprise. Provided allwayes, that this article, or any thing therein conteyned, shall not extend to the office of the queene’s majesties printer for the service of the realme; but that the said office, and offices, shall be, and continue at the pleasure and disposicion of her majestie, her heires, and successors, at all tymes, upon the death of her highnes’s printer, or otherwise.

4. Item, That no person, or persons, shall imprint, or cause to be imprinted, or suffer by any meanes to his knowledge, his presse, letters, or other instruments, to be occupied in printing of any booke, worke, coppie, matter, or thing whatsoever, except the same booke, worke, coppie, matter, or any thing hath bene heretofore allowed, or hereafter shall be allowed, before the imprinting thereof, according to the order appointed by the queene’s majesties injunctions, and be first seene and perused by the archbishopp of Canterburie, and bishopp of London, for the tyme being, or one of them (the queene’s majesties printer for some special service by her majestie, or by some of her highnes privie councell thereunto appoynted; and suche are, or shal be priviledged to print the bookes of the common lawe of this realme, for suche of the same books, as shal be allowed of by the two cheefe justices, and cheefe barons, for the tyme being, or any two of them, onelye excepted) nor shall imprint, or cause to be imprinted, any booke, worke, or coppie, against the forme and meaning of any restraynte, or ordinance conteyned, or to be conteyned, in any statute, or lawes of this realme, or in any injunction made, or sett forthe by her majestie, or her highness privie counsell, or againste the true intent and meaning of any letters patent, commissions, or prohibicions, under the great seale of Englande; or contrarie to any allowed ordinaunce, sett downe for the good governaunce of the Company of Stationers, within the cittie of London; upon payne to haue all suche presses, letters, and instruments, as in or about the imprinting of any suche bookes, or copies, shall be imployed or used, to be defaced, and made unserviceable for imprinting for ever; and upon payne allso, that everye offender, and offenders, contrarie to this present article, or ordinaunce, shal be disabled (after any suche offence) to use, or exercise, or take benefite by using, or exercising of the arte, or feate of imprinting; and shall moreover susteyne sixe moneths imprisonment without bayle, or maynprise.

5. Item, That every suche person, as shall sell, utter, or putt to sale wittingly, bynde, stitch, or sowe; or wittinglie cause to be solde, uttered, put to sale, bounde, stitched, or sowed, any bookes, or copies whatsoever, printed contrarie to the intent and true meaning of any ordinaunce, or article aforesaid, shall suffer three moneths imprisonment for his, or their offence.

6. Item, That it shall be lawfull for the Wardeins of the saide companye, for the tyme being, or any two of the saide companie thereto deputed, by the saide Wardeins, to make searche in all work-howses, shopps, ware-howses of printers, booke-sellers, booke-bynders, or where they shall haue reasonable cause of suspition; and all bookes, copies, matters, and things printed, or to be printed; contrarie to the intent and meaning of these present ordinances, to seaze and take to her majesties use, and the same to carrie into the Stacioners-hall in London; and the partie, or parties, offending in printing, selling, uttering, bynding, stitching, or sowing any such bookes, copies, matters, or things, to arrest, bring, and present before the said highe commissioners in causes ecclesiasticall, or some three, or more of them, whereof the said archbishop of Canterburie, or bishopp of London, for the tyme being, to be one.

7. Item, That it shall be lawfull to and for the aforesaide wardeins, for the tyme being, or any two by them appoynted, without lett, or interruption of any person, or persons whatsoever, to enter into any howsse, work-howsse, ware-howsse, shopp, or other place, or places; and to seaze, take, and carrie away all presses, letters, and other printing instruments, sett up, used, or imployed, contrarie to the true meaning hereof, to be defaced, and made unserviceable, as aforesaid; and that the saide wardeins shall so often as need shall require, call the assistants of the saide companie or the more parte of them into their saide hall, and there take order for the defacing, burning, breaking, and destroying of all the saide letters, presses, and other printing instruments aforesaide; and thereupon shall cause all suche printing presses, or other printing instruments, be defaced, melted, sawed in pieces, broken, or battered, at the smythes forge, or otherwise to be made unserviceable; and the stuffe of the same so defaced, shall redelyver to the owners thereof agayne, within three moneths next after the taking, or seazing thereof, as aforesayde.

8. Item, That for the avoyding of the excessive number of printers within this realme, it shall not be lawfull for any person or persons, being free of the Companie of Stacioners, on using the trade or mysterie of printing, booke-selling, or booke-bynding, to have, take, and keepe hereafter, at one tyme, any greater number of apprentizes, than shall be hereafter expressed; that is to say, every person that hath been or shall be master, or upper wardein of the companie, whereof he is free, to keepe three apprentizes at one tyme, and not above; and every person that is, or shall be under wardein, or of the liverie of the companie whereof he is free, to keep two apprentizes, and not above; and every person that is, or shall be of the yeomanrie of the companie whereof he is, or shall be free, to keep one apprentise (if he himself be not a journeyman) and not above. Provided allwayes, that this ordinaunce shall not extend to the queen’s majesties printer for the tyme being, for the service of her majestie, and the realme, but that he be at libertie to keepe and have apprentizes, to the number of sixe at any one tyme.

9. Item, That none of the printers in Cambridge, or Oxford, for the tyme being, shall be suffered to have any more apprentizes, than one at one tyme at the moste. But it is, and shall be lawfull, to, and for the saide printers, and either of them, and their successors, to have, and use the help of anye journeyman, being freemen of the cittie of London, without contradiction; any lawe, statute, or commaundement, contrarie to the meaning and due execution of those ordinaunces, or any of them, in any wise notwithstanding.

July 11, 1637.--“A decree of the Star Chamber concerning printing,” was published by authority, restricting the number of printers to twenty, besides his majesty’s printer, and the printers allowed for the universities. The letter-founders were at the same time restricted to four.

The allowed printers at this time were, Felix Kingstone, Adam Islip, Thomas Purfoot, Miles Flesher, Thomas Harper, John Beale, John Legat, Robert Young, John Haviland, George Miller, Richard Badger, Thomas Cotes, Bernard Alsop, Richard Bishop, Edward Griffin, Thomas Purslow, Richard John Raworth, Marmaduke Hodkinsonne, John Dawson, John Parsons.

The letter-founders were, John Grismand, Arthur Nichols, Thomas Wright, Alexander Fifeild.

13 & 14 Charles 2. c. 33. intituled “An Act for preventing Abuses in Printing Seditious, Treasonable and Unlicensed Books and Pamphlets, and for Regulating of Printing and Printing Presses.

“Whereas the well government and regulating of Printers and Printing-Presses is matter of publick care, and of great concernment, especially considering, that by the general Licentiousness of the late Times, many evil-disposed Persons have been encouraged to Print and sell Heretical, Schismatical, Blasphemous, Seditious and Treasonable Books, Pamphlets and Papers, and still do continue such their unlawful and exorbitant practice, to the high dishonour of Almighty God, the indangering the Peace of these Kingdoms, and raising a disaffection to his most excellent Majesty and his Government: For prevention whereof, no surer means can be advised, than by reducing and limiting the number of Printing-Presses, and by ordering and settling the said Art or Mystery of Printing by Act of Parliament, in manner as herein after is expressed:

s. 2. “The King’s most excellent Majesty, by and with the consent and advice of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons in this present Parliament assembled, doth therefore ordain and enact, and be it ordained and enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That no person or persons whatsoever shall presume to Print, or cause to be Printed, either within this Realm of England, or any other his Majesty’s Dominions, or in the Parts beyond the Seas, any Heretical, Seditious, Schismatical or offensive Books or Pamphlets, wherein any Doctrine or Opinion shall be asserted or maintained, which is contrary to the Christian Faith, or the Doctrine or Discipline of the Church of England, or which shall or may tend, or be to the scandal of Religion, or the Church, or the Government or Governors of the Church, State or Common-wealth, or of any Corporation or particular person or persons whatsoever; nor shall Import, Publish, Sell or Disperse any such Book or Books, or Pamphlets, nor shall cause or procure any such to be published or put to sale, or to be Bound, Stitched, or Sewed together.

s. 3. “And be it further ordained and enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That no private person or persons whatsoever shall at any time hereafter Print or cause to be Printed any Book, or Pamphlet whatsoever, unless the same Book and Pamphlet, together with all and every the Titles, Epistles, Prefaces, Proems, Preambles, Introductions, Tables, Dedications, and other matters and things thereunto annexed, be first Entred in the Book of the Register of the Company of Stationers in London, Except Acts of Parliament, Proclamations, and such other Books and Papers as shall be appointed to be Printed by virtue of any Warrant under the King’s Majesties Sign-Manual, or under the Hand of one or both of his Majesties Principal Secretaries of State; and unless the same Book and Pamphlet, and also all and every the said Titles, Epistles, Prefaces, Proems, Preambles, Introductions, Tables, Dedications, and other matters and things whatsoever thereunto annexed, or therewith to be Imprinted, shall be first lawfully Licensed and Authorized to be Printed by such Person and Persons only as shall be constituted and appointed to License the same, according to the Direction and true meaning of this present Act herein after expressed, and by no other; (that is to say) That all Books concerning the Common-Laws of this Realm, shall be Printed by the special Allowance of the Lord-Chancellor, or Lord Keeper of the Great-Seal of England for the time being, the Lords Chief-Justices, and Lord Chief-Baron for the time being; or one or more of them, or by their, or one or more of their appointments; And that all Books of History concerning the State of this Realm, or other Books concerning any Affairs of State, shall be Licensed by the Principal Secretaries of State for the time being, or one of them, or by their, or one of their appointments; And that all Books to be Imprinted concerning Heraldry, Titles of Honour, and Arms, or otherwise concerning the Office of Earl-Marshal, shall be Licensed by the Earl-Marshal for the time being, or by his appointment, or in case there shall not then be an Earl-Marshal, shall be Licensed by the three Kings of Arms, Garter, Clarencieux, and Norroy, or any two of them, whereof Garter Principal King of Arms to be one; And that all other Books to be Imprinted or Reprinted, whether of Divinity, Physick, Philosophy, or whatsoever other Science or Art, shall be first Licensed and allowed by the Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, and Lord Bishop of London, for the time being, or one of them, or by their or one of their Appointments, or by either of the Chancellors, or Vice-Chancellors of the Universities of this Realm for the time being; Provided always, that the said Chancellors, or Vice-Chancellors of either of the said Universities shall only License such Books as are to be Imprinted or Reprinted within the Limits of the said Universities respectively, but not in London or elsewhere, not medling either with Books of Common-Laws, or matters of State or Government, nor any Book or Books, the right of Printing whereof doth solely and properly belong to any particular Person or Persons, without his or their Consent first obtained in that behalf.

s. 4. “And be it enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That every person or persons who by virtue of this present Act are, or shall be appointed, or authorised to License the Imprinting of Books, or Reprinting thereof with any Additions or Amendments, as aforesaid, shall have one written Copy of the same Book or Books which shall be so Licensed to be Imprinted or Reprinted with the Titles, Epistles, Prefaces, Tables, Dedications, and all other things whatsoever thereunto annexed; which said Copy shall be delivered by such Licencer or Licencers to the Printer or Owner after the Imprinting thereof, and shall be solely and intirely returned by such Printer or Owner after the imprinting thereof, unto such Licencer or Licencers, to be kept in the publick Registries of the said Lord Archbishop, or Lord Bishop of London respectively, or in the Office of the Chancellor or Vice-Chancellor of either of the said Universities, or with said Lord-Chancellor or Lord-Keeper of the Great Seal for the time being, or Lord Chief-Justices, or Chief-Baron, or one of them, or the said Principal Secretaries of State, or with the Earl-Marshal, or the said Kings of Arms, or one of them, of all such Books as shall be Licensed by them respectively; and if such Book so to be Licensed shall be an English-Book, or of the English-Tongue, there shall be two written Copies thereof delivered to the Licencer or Licencers (if he or they shall so require), one Copy whereof so Licensed shall be delivered back to the said Printer or Owner, and the other Copy shall be reserved and kept as is aforesaid, to the end such Licencer or Licencers may be secured, that the Copy so Licensed shall not be altered without his or their privity; And upon the said Copy Licensed to be Imprinted, he or they who shall so Licence the same, shall testifie under his or their Hand or Hands, That there is not any thing in the same contained that is contrary to the Christian Faith, or the Doctrine or Discipline of the Church of England, or against the State or Government of this Realm, or contrary to good Life, or good Manners, or otherwise as the nature and subject of the Work shall require; Which Licence or Approbation shall be printed in the beginning of the same Book, with the Name or Names of him or them that shall Authorize or License the same, for a Testimony of the Allowance thereof.

s. 5. “And be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That every Merchant of Books, and Person or Persons whatsoever, who doth, or hereafter shall Import or bring any Book or Books into this Realm from any Parts beyond the Seas, shall Import the same in the Port of London only, and not elsewhere, without the special Licence of the Archbishop of Canterbury, and Bishop of London for the time being, or one of them, who are hereby authorized to grant Licences for that purpose, and shall before such time as the same Book or Books, or any of them be delivered forth, or out of his or their hand or hands, or exposed to Sale, give and present a true Note or Catalogue in writing of all and every such Book or Books, unto the Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, and Lord Bishop of London for the time being, or to one of them, and no Merchant or other Person or Persons whatsoever which shall import or bring any Book or Books into the Port of London aforesaid, from any Parts beyond the Seas, shall presume to open any Dry-Fats, Bales, Packs, Maunds, or other Fardles of Books, or wherein Books are, nor shall any Searcher, Waiter, or other Officer, belonging to the Customhouse, upon pain of losing his or their Place or Places, suffer the same to pass, or to be delivered out of his or their hands or custody, before such time as the Lord Archbishop of Canterbury and the Lord Bishop of London for the time being, or one of them, shall have appointed some Scholar or Learned Man, with one or more of the said Company of Stationers, and such others as they shall call to their Assistance, to be present at the opening thereof, and to view the same; And if there shall happen to be found any Heretical, Seditious, Scandalous, Schismatical, or other dangerous or offensive Book or Books, or any part of such Book or Books printed in English, they shall forthwith be brought to the said Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, and Lord Bishop of London for the time being, or to one of them, or to some publick place to be assigned and chosen by the said Lord Archbishop, and Lord Bishop for the time being, to the end the person and persons which Importeth, or causeth the said offensive Books to be Imported, may be proceeded against as an Offender against this present Act; And also that such further course may be taken concerning the same Offensive Book or Books, as by the said Lord Archbishop and Bishop for the time being, shall be thought fitting for the suppressing thereof.

s. 6. “And be it further enacted by the authority aforesaid, That no person or persons shall within this Kingdom, or elsewhere, Imprint or cause to be Imprinted, nor shall Import or bring in, or cause to be Imported or brought into this Kingdom from or out of any other his Majesties Dominions, nor from any other Parts beyond the Seas, any Copy or Copies, Book or Books, or part of any Book or Books, or Forms of Blank-bills or Indentures for any his Majesties Islands, printed beyond the Seas, or elsewhere, which any person or persons by force or virtue of any Letters-Patents granted or assigned, or which shall hereafter be granted or assigned to him or them, or (where the same are not granted by any Letters-Patent) by force or virtue of any Entry or Entries thereof duly made or to be made in the Register-Book of the said Company of Stationers, or in the Register-Book of either of the Universities respectively, have or shall have the Right, Priviledge, Authority, or Allowance, solely to Print, without the consent of the Owner or Owners of such Book or Books, Copy or Copies, Form or Forms of such Blank-bills, nor shall Bind, Stitch, or put to Sale any such Book or Books, or part of any Book or Books, Form or Forms, without the like consent, upon pain of loss and forfeiture of the same, and of being proceeded against as an Offender against this present Act, and upon the further penalty and forfeiture of Six shillings eight pence for every such Book or Books, or part of such Book or Books, Copy or Copies, or Form or Forms of any such Blank-bills or Indentures so Imprinted or Imported, Bound, Stitched, or put to Sale; The moiety of which said forfeiture and forfeitures shall be to the use of our Sovereign Lord the King, his Heirs and Successors, and the other moiety to the use of the Owner or Owners, Proprietors of such Copy or Copies, Book or Books, or Form of such Blank-bills or Indentures, if he or they shall sue for the same within Six Months next after such Imprinting, Importing, Binding, Stitching, or putting to Sale; And in default of such Suit by the Owner or Owners, Proprietor or Proprietors, commenced within the said Six Months, Then the same moiety shall be to the use and behoof of such other person and persons as within the space of one Year next after the said Offence committed, shall sue for the same, to be recovered by Action of Debt, Bill, Plaint or Information, in any of his Majesties Courts of Record held at Westminster, called the King’s-Bench, Common-Pleas, or Exchequer, wherein no Essoign, Wager of Law, or Protection shall be allowed to the Defendant or Defendants.

s. 7. “And be it further enacted and declared, That every person and persons that shall hereafter Print, or cause to be Printed any Book, Ballad, Chart, Pourtracture, or any other thing or things whatsoever, shall thereunto, or thereon, Print and set his or their own Name or Names, and also shall declare the Name of the Author thereof, if he be thereunto required by the Licencer under whose Approbation the Licensing of the said Book, Ballad, Chart, or Pourtracture shall be Authorized, and by and for whom any such Book or other thing is or shall be Printed, upon pain of forfeiture of all such Books, Ballads, Charts, Pourtractures, and other thing or things Printed contrary to the Tenor hereof; And the Presses, Letters, and other Instruments for Printing, wherewith such Book, Ballad, Pourtracture, or other thing or things shall be so Imprinted, or set or prepared for the Printing thereof, to be defaced and made unserviceable; And that no person or persons shall hereafter Print, or cause to be Imprinted, nor shall forge, put or counterfeit in or upon any Book or Pamphlet, the Name, Title, Mark, or Vinnet of any person or persons which hath or shall have lawful Priviledge, Authority or Allowance of sole Printing the same, without the free consent of the person or persons so Priviledged first had and obtained, upon pain that every person and persons so offending, shall forfeit and lose all such Books and Pamphlets, upon which such counterfeit Name or Mark shall be Imprinted, and shall further be proceeded against as an Offender against this present Act.

s. 8. “And be it further enacted, by the Authority aforesaid, that no Haberdasher of Small-wares, Iron-monger, Chandler, Shop-keeper, or other person or persons, whatsoever, not being Licensed in that behalf by the Lord Bishop of the Diocese wherein such Book or Books shall be, nor having been Seven years Apprentice to the Trade of Book-seller, Printer or Book-binder, nor being a Freeman of the City of London by Patrimonial Right, as Son of a Book-seller, Printer, or Book-binder, nor being a Member of the said Company of Stationers, shall within the City or Suburbs of London, or any other Market-Town, or elsewhere, receive, take or buy, to barter, sell again, change or do away any Bibles, Testaments, Psalm-books, Common-Prayer-books, Primers, Abcees, Licensed Almanacks, Grammar, School-books, or other Book or Books whatsoever, upon pain of forfeiture of the same.

s. 9. “And for that Printing is, and for many years hath been an Art and Manufacture of this Kingdom, Therefore for the better encouraging thereof, and the prevention of divers Libels, Pamphlets, and Seditious Books Printed beyond the Seas in English, and thence Transported into this Realm, Be it further enacted and ordained by the authority aforesaid, That no Merchant, Book-seller, or other person or persons whatsoever, shall Imprint, or cause to be Imprinted beyond the Seas, nor shall Import or bring, nor knowingly assist, or consent to the Importation or bringing from beyond the Seas into this Realm, any English Book or Books, or part of any Book which is or shall be, or the greater part thereof is or shall be English, or of the English Tongue, whether the same Book, Books, or part of such Book have been here formerly Printed or not, upon pain of forfeiture of all such English Books so Imprinted or Imported contrary to the tenor hereof: And that no Alien or Foreigner whatsoever shall hereafter bring in, or be suffered to vend here within this Realm, any Book or Books printed beyond the Seas in any Language whatsoever, either by himself, or his Factor or Factors, except such only as be Free-printers or Stationers, of London, or such as have been brought up in that profession, without the special Licence, of the Archbishop of Canterbury, and Bishop of London for the time being, or one of them, who are hereby authorized to grant Licences for that purpose, upon like pain of forfeiture of all such Books as shall be so Imprinted or Vended contrary to the purport and true intent hereof.

s. 10. “And be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That no person or persons within the city of London, or of the Liberties thereof, or elsewhere, shall erect or cause to be erected any Press or Printing-House, nor shall knowingly demise or let, or willingly suffer to be held or used any House, Vault, Cellar, or other Room whatsoever, to or by any person or persons for a Printing-House, or Place to Print in, unless he or they who erect such Press, or shall so knowingly demise or let such House, Cellar, Vault, or Room, or willingly suffer the same to be used, shall first give notice to the Master or Wardens of the said Company of Stationers for the time being, of the erecting of such Press, or of such demise or suffering to Work or Print in such House, Vault, Cellar or Room, And that no Joyner, Carpenter, or other Person shall make any Printing-Press, no Smith shall forge any Iron-work for a Printing-Press, no Founder shall cast any Letters which may be used for Printing for any person or persons whatsoever; neither shall any person or persons bring or cause to be brought in from any Parts beyond the Seas, any Letters Founded or Cast, nor shall buy any such Letters for Printing, Printing-Presses, or other Materials belonging unto Printing, unless he or they respectively shall first acquaint the said Master and Wardens of the said Company of Stationers for the time being, or some or one of them, for whom the said Presses, Iron-work or Letters are to be made, forged, cast, brought or imported, upon pain that every person who shall erect any such Printing-Press, or shall demise or let any House or Room, or suffer the same to be held or used, and every person who shall make any Printing-Press, or any Iron-work for a Printing-Press, or shall make, import, or buy any Letters for Printing, without giving notice, as aforesaid, shall forfeit for every such Offence the sum of Five pounds, the one moiety whereof shall be to the use of our Sovereign Lord the King, his Heirs and Successors, and the other moiety to the use of such person or persons as shall sue for the same.

s. 11. “And be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That for the time to come no Man shall be admitted to be a Master-Printer, until they who are now actually Master-Printers, shall be by death or otherwise, reduced to the number of Twenty, and from thenceforth the number of Twenty Master Printers shall be continued, and no more, besides the King’s Printers, and the Printers allowed for the Universities, to have the use and exercise of Printing of Books at one time, and but Four Master-Founders of Letters for Printing; The which said Master-Printers, and four Master-Founders of Letters for Printing, shall be nominated, appointed and allowed by the Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, and the Lord Bishop of London for the time being; And in case of Death of any one of the said Four Master-Founders of Letters, or of the said Master-Printers, or of Forfeiture, or Avoidance of any of their places and priviledges to Print by virtue of this Act, for any Offence contrary to the same, or otherwise, That then the Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, and the Lord Bishop of London for the time being, or one of them, shall nominate and appoint such other fit person or persons to succeed and supply the place of such Master-Printer, or Founder of Letters as shall be void by Death, Forfeiture or otherwise, as aforesaid; And every person and persons which shall hereafter be allowed or permitted to have the use of a Printing-Press or Printing-House, upon or before such his allowance obtained, shall become bound with Sureties to his Majesty in the Court of King’s-Bench, or before some one or more of the Justices of Assize or the Justices of the Peace at their several Quarter-Sessions, in the sum of Three hundred pounds, not to Print, or suffer to be Printed in his House or Press any Book or Books whatsoever, but such as shall from time to time be lawfully Licensed.

s. 12. “And be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That none of the said Master-Printers to be allowed from time to time, as aforesaid, shall keep above Two Printing-Presses at once, unless he hath been Master or Upper-Warden of the Company, who are hereby allowed to keep Three Presses and no more, unless for some great and special occasion for the Publick he or they have for a time leave of the said Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, or Lord Bishop of London for the time being, to have or use one or more above the aforesaid Number, as their Lordships or either of them shall think fit.

s. 13. “And be it also enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That no Printer or Printers, (except the King’s Printers) nor Founder or Founders of Letters for Printing, shall take or retain any more or greater number of Apprentices, than is herein after limited and appointed, (that is to say) Every Master-Printer, and Master-Founder of Letters for Printing, that is or hath been Master or Upper-Warden of his Company, may have Three Apprentices at one time and no more; And every Master-Printer, and Master-Founder of Letters for Printing, that is of the Livery of his Company, may have two Apprentices at one time and no more; And every Master-Printer, and Master-Founder of Letters for Printing, of the Yeomanry of his Company, may have one Apprentice at one time and no more, neither by Co-partnership, binding at the Scriveners, nor any other way whatsoever; Neither shall it be lawful for any Master-Printer or Master-Founder of Letters, when any Apprentice or Apprentices shall run or be put away, to take another Apprentice or other Apprentices in his or their place or places, unless the name or names of him or them so gone away, be rased out of the Hall-Book, and never admitted again.

s. 14. “And because a great part of the secret Printing in Corners hath been caused for want of Orderly Imployment for Journeymen-Printers, The said several Master-Printers, and Master-Founders of Letters for Printing so to be allowed as aforesaid, are hereby required to take special Care, That all Journeymen-Printers, and Journeymen Founders of Letters for Printing, who are lawfully free of the said respective Mysteries, be set on Work, and Imployed in their respective Trades; And if any such Journeyman-Printer, and Journeyman-Founder of Letters, being of honest and good behaviour, and able in his Trade, do want Imployment, he shall repair to any of the said Master-Printers, or Master-Founders of Letters respectively for the time being, who thereupon shall receive him or them into Work, if such Master-Printer or Master-Founder of Letters have not a Journeyman already, although such Master-Printer or Master-Founder of Letters respectively, with his Apprentice or Apprentices be able without the help of the said Journeyman to discharge his own Work, upon pain that every Master-Printer, and Master-Founder of Letters respectively, refusing to receive such Journeyman repairing to him, as aforesaid, shall forfeit Five pounds, to be recovered by Bill, Plaint or Information in any Court of Record, wherein no Essoign, Wager at Law, Priviledge or Protection shall be admitted; the one moiety of which forfeiture shall go to the King’s Majesty, his Heirs and Successors, and the other moiety to the Informer who shall sue for the same within six months nex after the said Offence committed; And if any Journeyman, or Journeymen-Printers, or Founders of Letters for Printing, shall refuse Imployment, being offered to him or them by any Master-Printer, or Master-Founder of Letters respectively, or neglect it when he or they have undertaken it, he or they so refusing or neglecting, shall suffer three months Imprisonment at the least, without Bail or Mainprize, upon conviction of such his said refusal or neglect by two Witnesses, before any one or more Justice or Justices of the Peace, who are hereby impowered to hear and examine the said Offence, and to commit the said Offender and Offenders to the Common Gaol of the County where he or they shall be apprehended: And no Master-Printer, or Master-Founder of Letters for Printing, shall from henceforth imploy either to work at the Case or Press, or otherwise about his Printing, any person or persons than such only as are Englishmen and Freemen, or the Sons of Freemen, or Apprentices to the said Trades or Mysteries of Printing, or Founding of Letters for Printing respectively.

s. 15. “And for the better discovering of Printing in Corners without Licence, Be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That one or more of the Messengers of his Majesties Chamber, by Warrant under his Majesties Sign-Manual, or under the Hand of one or more of his Majesties Principal Secretaries of State, or the Master and Wardens of the said Company of Stationers, or any one of them, shall have power and authority with a Constable, to take unto them such assistance as they shall think needful, and at what time they shall think fit, to search all Houses and Shops where they shall know, or upon some probable reason suspect any Books or Papers to be printed, bound or stitched, especially Printing-houses, Book-sellers Shops and Warehouses, and Book-binders Houses and Shops, and to view there what is imprinting, binding or stitching, and to examine whether the same be Licensed, and to demand a sight of the said Licence; and if the said Book so imprinting, binding or stitching, shall not be Licensed, then to seize upon so much thereof, as shall be found imprinted, together with the several Offenders, and to bring them before one or more Justices of the Peace, who are hereby authorised and required to commit such Offenders to Prison, there to remain until they shall be tried and acquitted, or convicted and punished for the said Offences: And in case the said Searchers shall upon their said Search, find any Book or Books, or part of Books unlicensed, which they shall suspect to contain matters therein contrary to the Doctrine or Discipline of the Church of England, or against the State and Government; Then upon such Suspicion to seize upon such Book or Books, and to bring the same unto the said Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, and Lord Bishop of London for the time being, or one of them, or to the Secretaries of State, or one of them respectively, who shall take such further course for the suppressing thereof, as to them or any of them shall seem fit.

s. 16. “And be it Ordained and Enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That all and every Printer and Printers of Books, Founder and Founders of Letters for Printing, and all and every other person and persons working in or for the said Trades, who from and after the Tenth day of June, in the year, One thousand six hundred sixty and two, shall offend against this present Act, or any Article, Clause or Thing herein contained, and shall be thereof convicted by Verdict, Confession, or otherwise, shall for the first Offence be disenabled from exercising his respective Trade for the space of three years, And for the second Offence shall for ever thenceafter be disabled to use or exercise the Art or Mystery of Printing, or of Founding Letters for Printing, and shall also have and receive such further punishment by Fine, Imprisonment or other Corporal Punishment, not extending to Life or Limb, as by the Justices of the Court of King’s Bench, or Justices of Oyer and Terminer, or Justices of Assize in their several Circuits, or Justices of the Peace in their several Quarter-Sessions shall be thought fit to be inflicted; The which said Justices of the Peace in their several Quarter-Sessions shall have full power and authority to hear and determine all and every Offence and Offences that shall be committed against this Act, or against any branch thereof, upon Indictment or Information by any person or persons to be taken before them in their Sessions of Peace respectively, and shall yearly certifie into the Court of Exchequer, as in other like cases they are bound to do, the Fines by them imposed for any of the Offences aforesaid, and shall and may also by virtue hereof award process and execution for the taking or punishing such Offenders, as in any other case they lawfully may do by any the Laws and Statutes of this Realm.

s. 17. “And be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That every Printer shall reserve three printed Copies of the best and largest Paper of every Book new printed, or reprinted by him with Additions, and shall before any publick Vending of the said Book bring them to the Master of the Company of Stationers, and deliver them to him, one whereof shall be delivered to the Keeper of his Majesties Library, and the other two to be sent to the Vice-Chancellors of the two Universities respectively, for the use of the Publick Libraries of the said Universities.

s. 18. “Provided always, That nothing in this Act contained, shall be construed to extend to the prejudice or infringing of any the just Rights and Priviledges of either of the two Universities of this Realm, touching and concerning the Licensing or Printing of Books in either of the said Universities.

s. 19. “Provided always, That no Search shall at any time be made in the House or Houses of any of the Peers of this Realm, or of any other person or persons not being free of, or using any of the Trades in this Act before mentioned, but by special Warrant from the King’s Majesty, under his Sign-Manual, or under the hand of one or both of his Majesties Principal Secretaries of State, or for any other Books than such as are in printing, or shall be printed after the Tenth of June, 1662; any thing in this Act to the contrary thereof in any wise notwithstanding.

s. 20. “Provided also, That neither this Act, nor any thing therein contained, shall extend to prohibit any Bookseller who hath served seven years, and is free of the Company of Stationers, London, from Importing or Bringing into this Realm any Books ready bound not formerly prohibited, which have been printed ten years before the said Importation; any thing in this or any other Act to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 21. “Provided also, and be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That neither this Act, nor any thing therein contained, shall be construed to prohibit any person or persons to sell Books or Papers, who have sold Books and Papers within Westminster-Hall, the Palace of Westminster, or in any Shop or Shops within twenty yards of the great Gate of Westminster-Hall aforesaid, before the Twentieth day of November, One thousand six hundred sixty and one; but they and every of them may sell Books and Papers as they have or did before the said Twentieth day of November, One thousand six hundred sixty one, within the said Hall, Palace, and Twenty yards aforesaid, but not elsewhere; any thing in this Act to the contrary in any wise notwithstanding.

s. 22. “Provided also, That neither this Act, nor any thing therein contained, shall extend to prejudice the just Rights and Priviledges granted to his Majesty, or any of his Royal Predecessors, to any person or persons, under his Majesties Great Seal, or otherwise, but that such person or persons may exercise and use such Rights and Priviledges, as aforesaid, according to their respective Grants; any thing in this Act to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 23. “Provided also, That neither this Act, nor any thing therein contained, shall extend to prohibit John Streater Stationer, from Printing Books and Papers, but that he may still follow the Art and Mystery of Printing, as if this Act had never been made; any thing therein to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 24. “Provided also, That neither this Act, nor any thing therein contained, shall extend to restrain the keeping and using of a Printing-press in the City of York, so as all Books of Divinity there printed, be first Licensed by the Archbishop of York for the time being, or such person or persons whom he shall appoint, and all other Books whatsoever there printed, be first Licensed by such persons respectively to whom the Licensing thereof doth or shall appertain by the Rules herein before-mentioned, and so as no Bibles be there printed, nor any other Book, whereof the Original Copy is or shall be belonging to the Company of Stationers in London, or any Member thereof; and so as the Archbishop or Lord Mayor of York for the time being, do execute within the said City (which they are hereby impowered to do) all the Powers and Rules in this Act concerning Searches for unlicensed Books, and impose and levy the said penalties in the like cases, any thing in this Act to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 25. “Provided, That this Act shall continue and be in force for two years, to commence from the Tenth of June, One thousand six hundred and sixty and two, and no longer.”

PRINTING INK.

By 2 & 3 Will. 4. c. 84. printing ink pays a duty of Ten Shillings a cwt. on being imported into this country. See ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD. FINE PRESSWORK. INK.

PROOF.

An impression of a sheet of a work, or of a job, to be examined to see that it be correct.

Proofs are termed, according to circumstances, FIRST PROOF; CLEAN PROOF; ITS OWN PAPER; and REVISE; for a description of which see each article.

PROOF PAPER.

A low-priced paper, of which a stock is kept in printing offices to pull proofs on, as well as to use for common jobs. A quire or two, according to the extent of business, is always wetted ready for use in the press room, where it is generally placed under a paper board upon a table or bulk, sometimes in the heap that is working, to keep it in better condition. It ought to be a hard sized, tough paper, and should bear writing ink on it without allowing it to sink through.

PROOF PRESS.

See EMPTY PRESS.--M. A press set apart to pull proofs at. It is generally an old press, that has become from age and wear unfit for regular business: the tympans are replaced by a thin iron frame, pierced with holes, within which is stretched a blanket, drawn tight by the edges and laced through these holes. This press is commonly so inefficient, that when a good proof is wanted, it is necessary to pull it at a press that is in working order. Some large establishments have good presses to pull proofs at, and, where the composing rooms are not on the same floor, have one in each room.

PSALM BOOKS.

For the allowance of the duty on paper used in the printing of psalm books, see PAPER.

PUBLIC MEETINGS ON THE LORD’S DAY.

21 Geo. 3. c. 49. s. 3. “And for the better preventing Persons assembling on the Lord’s Day for such irreligious Purposes as aforesaid, be it further enacted by the Authority aforesaid, That any Person advertising, or causing to be advertised, any public Entertainment or Amusement, or any public Meeting for debating on any Subject whatsoever, on the Lord’s Day, to which Persons are to be admitted by the Payment of Money, or by Tickets sold for Money, and any Person printing or publishing any such Advertisement, shall respectively forfeit the Sum of Fifty Pounds for every such Offence, to any Person who will sue for the same.”

PUBLICATIONS, PERIODICAL.

60 Geo. 3. c. 9. “An Act to subject certain Publications to the Duties of Stamps upon Newspapers, and to make other Regulations for restraining the Abuses arising from the Publication of blasphemous and seditious Libels.

“Whereas Pamphlets and printed Papers containing Observations upon public Events and Occurrences, tending to excite Hatred and Contempt of the Government and Constitution of these Realms as by Law established, and also vilifying our Holy Religion, have lately been published in great Numbers, and at very small Prices; and it is expedient that the same should be restrained: May it therefore please Your Majesty that it may be enacted; and be it enacted by the King’s most Excellent Majesty, by and with the Advice and Consent of the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and Commons, in this present Parliament assembled, and by the Authority of the same, That from and after Ten Days after the passing of this Act, all Pamphlets and Papers containing any Public News, Intelligence or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State; printed in any Part of the United Kingdom for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days between the Publication of any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers, where any of the said Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers respectively, shall not exceed Two Sheets, or shall be published for Sale for a less Sum than Sixpence, exclusive of the Duty by this Act imposed thereon, shall be deemed and taken to be Newspapers within the true Intent and Meaning of an Act of Parliament passed in the Thirty-eighth Year of the Reign of his present Majesty, intituled ‘An Act for preventing the Mischiefs arising from the printing and publishing Newspapers and Papers of a like Nature, by Persons not known, and for regulating the Printing and Publication of such Papers in other respects;’ and of another Act of Parliament, passed in the Fifty-fifth Year of the Reign of His present Majesty, intituled ‘An Act to provide for the Collection and Management of Stamp Duties upon Pamphlets, Almanacks, and Newspapers, in Ireland;’ and of another Act passed in the Fifty-fifth Year of the Reign of His present Majesty, intituled ‘An Act for repealing the Stamp Office Duties on Advertisements, Almanacks, Newspapers, Gold and Silver Plate, Stage Coaches, and Licences for keeping Stage Coaches, now payable in Great Britain; and for granting new Duties in lieu thereof;’ and of an Act passed in the Fifty-sixth Year of the Reign of His present Majesty, intituled ‘An Act to repeal the several Stamp Duties in Ireland, and also several Acts for the Collection and Management of the said Duties, and to grant new Stamp Duties in lieu thereof, and to make more effectual Regulations for calculating and managing the said Duties;’ and all other Acts of Parliament in force relating to Newspapers; and be subject to such and the same Duties of Stamps, with such and the same Allowances and Discounts, as Newspapers printed in Great Britain and Ireland respectively, now are subject unto under and by virtue of the said recited Acts of Parliament, and shall be printed, published, and distributed under and subject to all such and the like Rules, Regulations, Restrictions, Provisions, Penalties, and Forfeitures, as are contained in the said recited Acts, or either of them, or in any other Act or Acts of Parliament now in force in Great Britain or Ireland respectively, relating to Newspapers printed, published, dispersed, or made public in the United Kingdom; and the said recited Acts of Parliament, and all other Acts of Parliament now in force in Great Britain or Ireland respectively, relating to the printing, publishing, dispersing, or making public in Great Britain or Ireland respectively, any Newspapers, or containing any Regulations relating thereto, and all the Clauses, Provisions, Regulations, Restrictions Penalties, and Forfeitures therein respectively contained, and in force at the passing of this Act, shall (except where the same may be altered by this Act) be applied and put in force in relation to all such Pamphlets and printed Papers aforesaid, as fully and effectually as if all such Clauses, Provisions, Regulations, Restrictions, Penalties, and Forfeitures were respectively, severally, and separately re-enacted in and made Part of this Act; and the said recited Acts, and all other such Acts of Parliament as aforesaid, and this Act, shall, as to all the Purposes of carrying this Act into Execution, be construed as one Act.

s. 2. “And be it further enacted, That no Quantity of Paper less than a Quantity equal to Twenty-one Inches in Length and Seventeen Inches in Breadth, in whatever Way or Form the same may be made, or may be divided into Leaves, or in whatever Way the same may be printed, shall be deemed or taken to be a Sheet of Paper within the Meaning and for the Purposes of this Act.

s. 3. “And be it further enacted, That no Cover or Blank Leaf, or any other Leaf upon which any Advertisement or other Notice shall be printed, shall, for the Purposes of this Act, be deemed or taken to be a Part of any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part or Number aforesaid.

s. 4. “And be it further enacted, That all Pamphlets and Papers containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any such Remarks or Observations as aforesaid, printed for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals exceeding Twenty-six Days between any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers, and which said Pamphlets, Papers, Parts or Numbers respectively, shall not exceed Two Sheets, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence, shall be first published on the First Day of every Calendar Month, or within Two Days before or after that Day, and at no other Time; and that if any Person or Persons shall first publish or cause to be published any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part or Number aforesaid, on any other Day or Time, he or they shall forfeit for every such Offence the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 5. “And be it further enacted, That upon every Pamphlet or Paper containing any Public News, Intelligence or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon or upon any Matter in Church or State, printed in any Part of the United Kingdom for Sale, and published periodically, or in Parts or Numbers, at Intervals not exceeding Twenty-six Days between the Publication of any Two such Pamphlets or Papers, Parts or Numbers, and upon every Part or Number thereof, shall be printed the full Price at which every such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number shall be published for Sale, and also the Day on which the same is first published; and if any Person shall publish any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part, or Number, without the said Price and Day being printed thereon, or if any Person shall at any Time within Two Months after the Day of Publication printed thereon as aforesaid, sell or expose to Sale any such Pamphlet, Paper, Part or Number, or any Portion or Part of such Pamphlet, Paper, Part or Number, upon which the Price so printed as aforesaid shall be Sixpence, or above that Sum, for a less Price than the Sum of Sixpence, every such Person shall for every such Offence forfeit and pay the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 6. “Provided always, and be it further enacted, That nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be construed to extend to subject any Person publishing any Pamphlet or Paper to any Penalty for any Allowance in Price made by the Person for whom and on whose Behalf, and for whose Profit, Benefit or Advantage, the same shall have been first published, to any Bookseller or Distributor, or other Person to whom the same shall be sold for the Purpose of retailing the same.

s. 7. “And be it further enacted, That all Pamphlets and Papers which are by this Act declared to be subject to the Stamp Duties upon Newspapers, shall be freed and discharged from all the Stamp Duties and Regulations contained in any Act of Parliament relating to Pamphlets.

s. 8. “And be it further enacted, That no Person, from and after Thirty Days after the passing of this Act shall print or publish for Sale, any Newspaper, or any Pamphlet or other Paper containing any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, which shall not exceed Two Sheets, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence, until he or she shall have entered into a Recognizance before a Baron of the Exchequer, in England, Scotland, or Ireland respectively, as the Case may be, if such Newspaper or Pamphlet, or other Paper aforesaid, shall be printed in London or Westminster, or in Edinburgh or Dublin, or shall have executed in the Presence of, and delivered to some Justice of the Peace for the County, City, or Place where such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or other Paper shall be printed, if printed elsewhere, a Bond to His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, together with Two or Three sufficient Sureties, to the Satisfaction of the Baron of the Exchequer taking such Recognizance, or of the Justice of the Peace taking such Bond, every Person printing or publishing any such Newspaper or Pamphlet, or Paper aforesaid, in the Sum of Three hundred Pounds, if such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or Paper shall be printed in London or within Twenty Miles thereof, and in the Sum of Two hundred Pounds, if such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or Paper shall be printed elsewhere in the United Kingdom, and his or her Sureties in a like Sum in the whole, conditioned that such Printer or Publisher shall pay to His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors, every such Fine or Penalty as may at any Time be imposed upon at adjudged against him or her, by reason of any Conviction for printing or publishing any blasphemous or seditious Libel, at any Time after the entering into such Recognizance or executing such Bond; and that every Person who shall print or first publish any such Newspaper, Pamphlet, or other Paper, without having entered into such Recognizance, or executed and delivered such Bond with such Sureties as aforesaid, shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 9. “Provided always, and be it further enacted, That in every Case in which any Surety or Sureties in any such Recognizance or Bond shall have been required to pay and shall have paid the whole or any Part of the Sum for which he, she, or they shall have become Surety; or in case any such Surety or Sureties shall become Bankrupt, or be discharged under any Insolvent Act; then and in every such Case the Person for whom such Surety or Sureties shall have been bound, shall not print or publish any Newspaper or Pamphlet, or other Paper aforesaid, until he or she shall, upon being required so to do by the Commissioners of Stamps for Great Britain and Ireland respectively, have entered into a new Recognizance, or executed a new Bond, with sufficient Sureties, in the Manner and to the Amount aforesaid; and in case he or she shall print or publish any such Newspaper or Pamphlet, or other Paper aforesaid, without having entered into such new Recognizance, or executed such new Bond as aforesaid, having been required so to do as aforesaid, he or she shall forfeit for every such Offence the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 10. “Provided always, and be it further enacted, That if any Surety or Sureties shall be desirous of withdrawing from such Recognizance or Bond, it shall and may be lawful to and for him or them so to do, upon giving Twenty Days previous Notice in Writing to the said Commissioners of Stamps respectively, or to the Distributor of Stamps of and for the District where the Printer or Publisher for whom he or they is or are Surety or Sureties shall reside, and also to such Printer or Publisher; and that in any such Case, every such Surety or Sureties, from and after the Expiration of such Notice, shall not be liable upon the said Bond or Recognizance, other than and except for any Penalty or Penalties before that Time imposed or incurred, and for which he or they would otherwise have been liable under the said Recognizance or Bond; and then and in every such Case, the Person for whom such Surety or Sureties shall have been bound, shall not print or publish any Newspaper or Pamphlet, or other Paper aforesaid, until he or she shall have entered into a new Recognizance, or executed a new Bond, with sufficient Sureties, in the Manner and to the Amount aforesaid; and in case he or she shall print or publish any such Newspaper or Pamphlet, or other Paper aforesaid, without having entered into such new Recognizance or Bond as aforesaid, he or she shall for every such Offence forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 11. “Provided always, and be it further enacted, That no such Bond as aforesaid shall be subject or liable to any Stamp Duty; any thing in any Act or Acts of Parliament to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 12. “And be it further enacted, That Lists of all the Recognizances which shall have been entered into in the respective Courts of Exchequer in England, Scotland, or Ireland, shall, Four Times in each Year, be transmitted to the Commissioners managing the Stamp Duties in Great Britain and Ireland respectively, as the Case may be, by the respective Officers recording such Recognizances in such respective Courts; and all Bonds executed under the Provisions of this Act, shall, within Ten Days at the furthest after the Execution thereof, be transmitted to the Commissioners respectively, by the Justices of the Peace to whom the same shall have been respectively delivered.

s. 13. “And whereas the Printer or Publisher of any Newspaper, and of any Pamphlet and Paper hereby enacted to be deemed and taken to be a Newspaper, will, after the passing of this Act, be bound, under and by virtue of the Provisions contained in the said Acts made and passed in the Thirty-eighth and Fifty-fifth Years of His Majesty’s Reign respectively, to deliver to the Commissioners of Stamps in Great Britain and Ireland respectively, or some Distributor of Stamps or other Officer, on the Day on which the same is published, or within a certain Time afterwards, One of the Newspapers, Pamphlets, or Papers so published, signed as in the said Acts is respectively directed: And whereas it is expedient that the same or similar Provisions and Regulations should extend and be applied to all Pamphlets and Papers, whether published periodically or not, and which shall contain any Public News, Intelligence, or Occurrence, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or upon any Matter in Church or State, and which shall not exceed Two Sheets as aforesaid, or which shall be published for Sale at a less Price than Sixpence; be it therefore enacted, That from and after Ten Days after the passing of this Act, the Printer or Publisher of any Pamphlet or other Paper for Sale, containing any public News, Intelligence, or Occurrences, or any Remarks or Observations thereon, or on any Matter in Church or State, shall, upon every Day upon which the same shall be published, or within Six Days after, deliver to the Commissioners of Stamps for Great Britain and Ireland respectively, at their Head Offices, or to some Distributor or Officer to be appointed by them to receive the same, and whom they are hereby required to appoint for that Purpose, One of the Pamphlets or Papers so published upon each such Day, signed by the Printer or Publisher thereof, in his Hand-writing, with his Name and Place of Abode; and the same shall be carefully kept by the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer as aforesaid, in such Manner as the said Commissioners shall direct; and such Printer or Publisher shall be entitled to demand and receive from the Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer, the Amount of the Retail Price of such Pamphlet or Paper so delivered; and in every Case in which the Printer and Publisher of such Pamphlet or Paper shall neglect to deliver One such Pamphlet or Paper in the Manner herein-before directed, such Printer and Publisher shall, for every such Neglect respectively, forfeit and lose the Sum of One hundred Pounds.

s. 14. “Provided always, and be it further enacted, That in case the said Commissioners, or such Distributor or Officer aforesaid, shall refuse to receive or pay for any Copy of such Pamphlet or Paper offered to be delivered to them or him as aforesaid, for or on account of the same not being within the true Intent and Meaning of this Act, such Commissioners, Distributor, or Officer shall, if required so to do, give and deliver to such Printer or Publisher a Certificate in Writing that a Copy of such Pamphlet or Paper had been by him duly offered to be delivered; and such Printer or Publisher shall thereupon be freed and discharged from any Penalty for not having delivered such Copy as aforesaid.

s. 15. “And be it further enacted, That if any Person shall sell or expose to sale any Pamphlet or other Paper not being duly stamped, if required to be stamped, such Person shall, for every such Offence, forfeit the Sum of Twenty Pounds.

s. 16. “And be it declared and enacted, That it shall be lawful for any of His Majesty’s Courts of Record at Westminster or Dublin, or of Great Session in Wales, or any Judge thereof respectively, or for any Court of Quarter or General Sessions of the Peace, or for any Justice of the Peace before whom any Person charged with having printed or published any blasphemous, seditious, or malicious Libel, shall be brought for the Purpose of giving Bail upon such Charge, to make it a Part of the Condition of the Recognizance to be entered into by such Person and his or her Bail, that the Person so charged shall be of good Behaviour during the Continuance of such Recognizance.

s. 17. “And be it further enacted, That all Fines, Penalties, and Forfeitures by this Act imposed, shall be recovered by Action of Debt, Bill, Plaint, or Information in any of His Majesty’s Courts of Record at Westminster or Dublin, or the Courts of Great Session in the Principality of Wales, or the Courts of the Counties Palatine of Chester, Lancaster, and Durham, or in the Court of Session or Court of Exchequer in Scotland (as the Case shall require), wherein no Essoign, Privilege, Protection, Wager of Law, or more than One Imparlance shall be allowed; or before any Two Justices of the Peace of the County, Riding, Stewartry, City, or Place where the Offence shall be committed: Provided always, that no larger Amount in the Whole than One hundred Pounds shall be recoverable or recovered before any Justices of the Peace, for any such Penalties incurred in any One Day; any thing in this Act, or any other Acts of Parliament contained to the contrary notwithstanding.

s. 18. “And be it further enacted, That it shall be lawful for any Two or more Justices of the Peace, in all Cases in which they are authorized to hear and determine any Offence or Offences which shall be committed against this Act, or any other Act or Acts of Parliament which are by this Act required to be construed therewith as Part thereof, upon Information exhibited or Complaint made in that Behalf, within Three Months after any such Offence committed, to summon the Party accused, and also the Witnesses on either Side; and upon the Appearance, or Contempt of the Party accused in not appearing, to proceed to the Examination of the Witness or Witnesses upon Oath (which Oath they are hereby empowered to administer), and to give Judgment for the Penalty or Penalties incurred; and in case the Party shall not immediately pay the said Penalty or Penalties, to commit the Offender to Prison, there to remain for any time not exceeding Six Months, unless such pecuniary Penalty or Penalties shall be sooner paid and satisfied; and if any Party shall find himself or herself aggrieved by the Judgment of any such Justices, then he, she, or they may, upon giving Security to the Amount or Value of the Penalty or Penalties adjudged, together with such Costs as may be awarded in case such Judgment shall be affirmed, appeal to the Justices of the Peace at the next Quarter or General Sessions of the Peace for the County, Riding, Division, or Place wherein such Offence shall be committed, who are hereby empowered to summon and examine Witnesses upon Oath, and finally to bear and determine the same; and in case the Judgment shall be affirmed, it shall be lawful for such Justices to order the Person or Persons making such Appeal, to pay such Costs occasioned by such Appeal, as to them shall seem meet: Provided nevertheless, that it shall and may be lawful for the said respective Justices, where they shall see Cause, to mitigate or lessen any such Penalty or Penalties, in such Manner as they in their Discretion shall think fit; the reasonable Costs and Charges of the Officers or Informers being always allowed over and above such Mitigation; and so as such Mitigation does not reduce the Penalty to less than One Fourth Part thereof, over and above the said Costs and Charges.

s. 19. “And be it further enacted, That if any Person shall be summoned as a Witness to give Evidence before such Justices of the Peace, touching any such Offence, either on the Part of the Prosecutor or of the Person or Persons accused, and shall neglect or refuse to appear at the Time and Place to be for that Purpose appointed, without a reasonable Excuse for such his or her Neglect or Refusal, to be allowed of by the Justices before whom the Prosecution shall be depending, or appearing shall refuse to give Evidence, then every such Person shall forfeit for every such Offence any Sum not exceeding Twenty Pounds, to be levied and paid in such Manner and by such Means as is in this Act directed as to other Penalties.

s. 20. “And be it further enacted, That the Justices before whom any Offender shall be convicted as aforesaid, shall cause the said Conviction to be made out in the Manner and Form following, or in any other Form of Words to the like Effect, mutatis mutandis, that is to say,

‘County of ______ to wit.

‘Be it remembered, That on ______ at ______ A. B. of ______ was duly convicted before us, ______ of His Majesty’s Justices of the Peace for ______ in pursuance of an Act passed in the Sixtieth Year of the Reign of His present Majesty, intituled An Act [Title of this Act]; for that the said A. B. on the ______ Day of ______ now last past, did, [here state the Offence, as the Case may happen to be] contrary to the Form of the Statute in that Case made and provided; for which Offence we do adjudge that the said A. B. hath forfeited the Sum of ______ ; and [if the ______ Justices mitigate the Penalty] which Sum of ______ we do hereby mitigate to the Sum of ______. Given under our Hands and Seals, this ______ Day of ______.’

s. 21. “And be it further enacted, That no Order or Conviction made in pursuance of this Act by any Justices of the Peace, shall be removed by Certiorari, Advocation, or Suspension into any Court whatever; and that no Writ of Certiorari, Advocation, or Suspension shall supersede Execution or other Proceedings upon any such Order or Conviction, but that Execution and other Proceedings shall be had thereupon, any such Writ or Writs or Allowance thereof notwithstanding.

s. 22. “And be it further enacted, That it shall not be lawful for any Person or Persons whatsoever to commence, prosecute, enter, or file, or cause or procure to be commenced, prosecuted, entered, or filed, any Action, Bill, Plaint, or Information in any of His Majesty’s Courts, or before any Justice or Justices of the Peace, against any Person or Persons, for the Recovery of any Fine, Penalty, or Forfeiture made or incurred by virtue of this Act, unless the same be commenced, prosecuted, entered, or filed in the Name of His Majesty’s Attorney General in that Part of Great Britain called England, or in the Name of His Majesty’s Attorney General in Ireland, or His Majesty’s Advocate for Scotland (as the Case may be respectively), or in the Name of the Solicitor or some other Officer of His Majesty’s Stamp Duties in that Part of Great Britain called England, or in Scotland or Ireland respectively; and if any Action, Bill, Plaint, or Information shall be commenced, prosecuted, entered, or filed in the Name or Names of any other Person or Persons than is or are in that Behalf before mentioned, the same and every Proceeding thereupon had, are hereby declared, and the same shall be null and void to all Intents and Purposes.

s. 23. “And be it further enacted, That for the better and more effectually levying and collecting the said Duties, the same shall be under the Government, Care, and Management of the Commissioners for the Time being appointed in Great Britain and Ireland respectively, to manage the Duties on Stamped Vellum, Parchment, and Paper; who, or the major Part of them, in Great Britain and Ireland respectively, are hereby required and empowered to do all other Things necessary to be done for putting this Act into Execution, with relation to the said Duties hereby granted, in the like and in as full and ample a Manner as they or the major Part of them were authorized to put in Execution any Law or Laws concerning Stamped Vellum, Parchment and Paper.

s. 24. “And be it further enacted, That the said Duties shall be and are hereby made payable to His Majesty, His Heirs and Successors; and the said Duties, and the several Allowances, Discounts, and Sums of Money, for or in respect of the same, shall and may be respectively raised, levied, collected, answered, paid, recovered, adjudged, accounted for, and applied and appropriated, mitigated and allowed, in such and the like Manner, and in or by any or either of the general or special Ways, Means, or Methods, by which the Duties upon Newspapers, and Discounts and Allowances in respect thereof, under the Management of the said Commissioners of stamped Vellum, Parchment, or Paper, are or may be raised, levied, collected, answered, paid, recovered, adjudged, mitigated, and allowed; and the several Persons, and also all such Pamphlets and Papers, of what Nature or Kind soever, by this Act made liable to the Payment of Duty, or entitled to any Discount or Allowance, shall be and the same are hereby made subject and liable to all and every the Conditions, Regulations, Rules, and Restrictions, to which such Persons and Newspapers are generally or specially subject and liable by any Act or Acts of Parliament in force before the passing of this Act; and all and every Pain, Penalty, Fine or Forfeiture for any Offence whatever committed against or in Breach of any Act or Acts of Parliament now in force for securing the Duties under the Management of the said Commissioners of Stamped Vellum, Parchment, and Paper, upon Newspapers, or for the Regulation or Improvement of the said Duties, and the several Clauses, Powers, Provisions, Directions, Matters, and Things therein contained, shall (except as the same or any of them are by this Act altered or repealed), and are hereby directed and declared to extend to, and shall be respectively applied, practised, and put in Execution for and in respect of the several Duties charged, imposed, and allowed, in as full and ample a Manner, to all Intents and Purposes whatsoever, as if all and every the said Clauses, Provisions, Restrictions, Directions, Fines, Pains, Penalties, or Forfeitures, Matters and Things, were particularly repeated and re-enacted in the Body of this Act.

s. 25. “And be it further enacted, That the Monies arising from the Duties hereby granted shall be paid into the Receipt of the Exchequer at Westminster and Dublin respectively, and shall be carried to and made Part of the Consolidated Fund of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland.

s. 26. “Provided always, and be it further enacted, That nothing in this Act shall extend to Acts of Parliament, Proclamations, Orders of Council, Forms of Prayer and Thanksgiving, and Acts of State, ordered to be printed by His Majesty, His Heirs or Successors, or his or their sufficient and authorized Officer; or to any printed Votes or other Matters by Order of either House of Parliament; or to Books commonly used in the Schools of Great Britain or Ireland, or Books or Papers containing only Matters of Devotion, Piety, or Charity; or daily Accounts; or Bills of Goods imported and exported; or Warrants or Certificates for the Delivery of Goods; and the weekly Bills of Mortality; or to Papers containing any Lists of Prices Current, or of the State of the Markets, or any Account of the Arrival, Sailing, or other Circumstances relating to Merchant Ships or Vessels; or of any other Matter wholly of a Commercial Nature; provided such Bills, Lists, or Accounts do not contain any other Matter than what hath been usually comprised therein; or to the Printers or Publishers of the foregoing Matters, or any or either of them.

s. 27. “Provided also, and be it further enacted, That nothing in this Act contained shall extend or be construed to extend to charge with Stamp Duties any Work reprinted and republished in Parts or Numbers, whether such Work shall be wholly reprinted or shall be republished in an abridged Form; provided that the Work so reprinted and republished shall have been first printed and published Two Years at the least previous to such Reprinting and Republication, and provided the said Work was not first published in Parts or Numbers.

s. 28. “And be it further enacted, That this Act may be altered, amended, or repealed, by any Act to be passed in the present Session of Parliament.”

So much of this act was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. “as subjects any Newspaper or other Paper or Pamphlet to any Stamp Duty.” See NEWSPAPERS.

So much also of the acts 38 Geo. 3. c. 78., 55 Geo. 3. c. 80., 55 Geo. 3. c. 185., and 56 Geo. 3. c. 56. was repealed by 6 & 7 Will. 4. c. 76. “as subjects any Newspaper or other Paper or Pamphlet to any Stamp Duty.”--See Newspaper Postage.

PULL.

See EASY PULL; also HARD PULL.--M. The act of printing an impression at the press is called pulling.

PULL A PROOF.

To print an impression of a job, or a sheet of a work, either to read as a first proof, to send out to the author, &c., or to read for press. For the first purpose it is called a First Proof or Foul Proof; for the others it is termed a Clean Proof. See PROOF.

PUNCTUATION.

The Greeks and Romans were unacquainted with grammatical punctuation. With them it was for the most part only oratorical, since it referred, excepting a point at the end of a sentence and at some pauses, almost only to the elocution and pronunciation of the words. The first very imperfect beginning of our punctuation occurs in the time of Charlemagne, when a period of three points, and a stroke, were made use of, yet without following any definite rule. About the end of the fifteenth century, punctuation obtained a greater compass and a more settled character through the learned Venetian printer Manucci, so that he may be considered as the author of it. But still much time elapsed before the marks of punctuation collectively came generally into use as at present.

Through the introduction of these marks it has become possible to read a book with facility, and to recite a poem with a musical cadence. But still we feel too often, that our grammatical marks are far from sufficient for the purposes of declamation, seeing that we are sometimes obliged to make oratorical pauses where no grammatical points are applicable, and sometimes to double the pause for one and the same grammatical mark. Thus we read this passage in Wieland’s “Goldene Spiegel,” pt. 1. p. 121.:--

“Diese Methode bildete gleisnerische Schurken, welche ausgelernte Meister in der Kunst waren, ihre Leidenschaften zu verbergen, ihre schlimmen Neigungen in schöne Masken zu vermummen, die Unverständigen durch eine Tugend und Religion tödtende Phraseologie zu täuschen.”--“This method created hypocritical rascals, who were accomplished masters in the art of dissembling their emotions, of disguising their evil propensities under fine masks, and of deceiving the heedless by a virtue and religion killing phraseology.”

Here we readily perceive that after the word Methode, and also after eine, a pause must be made in reading, although no grammatical point is employed. And we have for this purpose no other mark than the dash (--). In like manner, every reader will perceive that the grammatical pause after Schurken must be made much longer than after waren, because this last is so closely connected with the word immediately following, that the voice glides over it rapidly. Heinsius, German Grammar.

The knowledge of punctuation being essential equally to the master printer, the reader, and the compositor, I have extracted this article from Murray’s English Grammar, as being perspicuous, and of high authority.

“Punctuation is the art of dividing a written composition into sentences, or parts of sentences, by points or stops, for the purpose of marking the different pauses which the sense, and an accurate pronunciation require.

“The Comma represents the shortest pause; the Semicolon, a pause double that of the comma; the Colon, double that of the semicolon; and the Period, double that of the colon.

“The precise quantity or duration of each pause cannot be defined; for it varies with the time of the whole. The same composition may be rehearsed in a quicker or a slower time; but the proportion between the pauses should be ever invariable.

“In order more clearly to determine the proper application of the points, we must distinguish between an imperfect phrase, a simple sentence, and a compound sentence.

“An imperfect phrase contains no assertion, or does not amount to a proposition or sentence: as, ‘Therefore; in haste; studious of praise.’

“A simple sentence has but one subject, and one finite verb, expressed or implied: as ‘Temperance preserves health.’

“A compound sentence has more than one subject, or one finite verb, either expressed or understood; or it consists of two or more simple sentences connected together: as, ‘Good nature mends and beautifies all objects;’ ‘Virtue refines the affections, but vice debases them.’

“In a sentence, the subject and the verb, or either of them, may be accompanied with several adjuncts: as, the object, the end, the circumstance of time, place, manner, and the like: and the subject or verb may be either immediately connected with them, or mediately; that is, by being connected with something which is connected with some other, and so on: as, ‘The mind, unoccupied with useful knowledge, becomes a magazine of trifles and follies.’

“As sentences themselves are divided into simple and compound, so the members of sentences may be divided likewise into simple and compound members: for whole sentences, whether simple or compounded, may become members of other sentences, by means of some additional connexion; as in the following example: ‘The ox knoweth his owner, and the ass his master’s crib; but Israel doth not know, my people do not consider.’ This sentence consists of two compounded members, each of which is subdivided into two simple members, which are properly called clauses.

“Of the Comma.

“The comma usually separates those parts of a sentence, which, though very closely connected in sense and construction, require a pause between them.

“RULE I. With respect to a simple sentence, the several words of which it consists have so near a relation to each other, that, in general, no points are requisite, except a full stop at the end of it: as, ‘The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.’ ‘Every part of matter swarms with living creatures.’

“A simple sentence, however, when it is a long one, and the nominative case is accompanied with inseparable adjuncts, may admit of a pause immediately before the verb: as, ‘The good taste of the present age, has not allowed us to neglect the cultivation of the English language:’ ‘To be totally indifferent to praise or censure, is a real defect in character.’

“RULE II. When the connexion of the different parts of a simple sentence is interrupted by an imperfect phrase, a comma is usually introduced before the beginning, and at the end of this phrase: as, ‘I remember, with gratitude, his goodness to me:’ ‘His work is, in many respects, very imperfect. It is, therefore, not much approved.’ But when these interruptions are slight and unimportant, the comma is better omitted: as, ‘Flattery is certainly pernicious;’ ‘There is surely a pleasure in beneficence.’

“In the generality of compound sentences, there is frequent occasion for commas; as will appear from the following view of the different occasions to which they are adapted.

“RULE III. When two or more nouns occur in the same construction, they are parted by a comma: as, ‘Reason, virtue, answer one great aim:’ ‘The husband, wife, and children, suffered extremely*:’ ‘They took away their furniture, clothes, and stock in trade:’ ‘He is alternately supported by his father, his uncle, and his elder brother.’

* “As a considerable pause in pronunciation, is necessary between the last noun and the verb, a comma should be inserted to denote it. But, as no pause is allowable between the last adjective and the noun, under Rule IV., the comma is there properly omitted. See WALKER’S Elements of Elocution.

“From this rule there is mostly an exception, with regard to two nouns closely connected by a conjunction: as, ‘Virtue and vice form a strong contrast to each other:’ ‘Libertines call religion bigotry or superstition;’ ‘There is a natural difference between merit and demerit, virtue and vice, wisdom and folly.’ But if the parts connected are not short, a comma may be inserted, though the conjunction is expressed: as, ‘Romances may be said to be miserable rhapsodies, or dangerous incentives to evil;’ ‘Intemperance destroys the strength of our bodies, and the vigour of our minds.’

“RULE IV. Two or more adjectives belonging to the same substantive are likewise separated by commas: as, ‘Plain, honest truth, wants no artificial covering;’ ‘David was a brave, wise, and pious man;’ ‘A woman, gentle, sensible, well-educated, and religious;’ ‘The most innocent pleasures are the sweetest, the most rational, the most affecting, and the most lasting.’

“But two adjectives, immediately connected by a conjunction, are not separated by a comma: as, ‘True worth is modest and retired;’ ‘Truth is fair and artless, simple and sincere, uniform and consistent.’ ‘We must be wise or foolish; there is no medium.’

“RULE V.. Two or more verbs, having the same nominative case, and immediately following one another, are also separated by commas: as, ‘Virtue supports in adversity, moderates in prosperity:’ ‘In a letter, we may advise, exhort, comfort, request, and discuss.’

“Two verbs immediately connected by a conjunction, are an exception to the above rule: as, ‘The study of natural history expands and elevates the mind;’ ‘Whether we eat or drink, labour or sleep, we should be moderate.’

“Two or more participles are subject to a similar rule, and exception: as, ‘A man, fearing, serving, and loving his Creator;’ ‘He was happy in being loved, esteemed, and respected;’ ‘By being admired and flattered, we are often corrupted.’

“RULE VI. Two or more adverbs immediately succeeding one another, must be separated by commas: as, ‘We are fearfully, wonderfully framed;’ ‘Success generally depends on acting prudently, steadily, and vigorously, in what we undertake.’

“But when two adverbs are joined by a conjunction, they are not parted by the comma: as, ‘Some men sin deliberately and presumptuously;’ ‘There is no middle state; we must live virtuously or vitiously.’

“RULE VII. When participles are followed by something that depends on them, they are generally separated from the rest of the sentence by a comma: as, ‘The king, approving the plan, put it in execution;’ ‘His talents, formed for great enterprises, could not fail of rendering him conspicuous;’ ‘All mankind compose one family, assembled under the eye of one common Father.’

“RULE VIII. When a conjunction is divided by a phrase or sentence from the verb to which it belongs, such intervening phrase has usually a comma at each extremity: as, ‘They set out early, and, before the close of the day, arrived at the destined place.’

“RULE IX. Expressions in a direct address, are separated from the rest of the sentence by commas: as, ‘My son, give me thy heart;’ ‘I am obliged to you, my friends, for your many favours.’

“RULE X. The case absolute, and the infinitive mood absolute, are separated by commas from the body of the sentence: as, ‘His father dying, he succeeded to the estate;’ ‘At length, their ministry performed, and race well run, they left the world in peace;’ ‘To confess the truth, I was much in fault.’

“RULE XI. Nouns in apposition, that is, nouns added to other nouns in the same case, by way of explication or illustration, when accompanied with adjuncts, are set off by commas: as, ‘Paul, the apostle of the Gentiles, was eminent for his zeal and knowledge;’ ‘The butterfly, child of the summer, flutters in the sun.’

“But if such nouns are single, or only form a proper name, they are not divided: as, ‘Paul the apostle;’ ‘The emperor Antoninus wrote an excellent book.’

“RULE XII. Simple members of sentences connected by comparatives, are for the most part distinguished by a comma: as, ‘As the hart panteth after the water brooks, so doth my soul pant after thee;’ ‘Better is a dinner of herbs with love, than a stalled ox and hatred with it.’

“If the members in comparative sentences are short, the comma is, in general, better omitted: as, ‘How much better is it to get wisdom than gold!’ ‘Mankind act oftener from caprice than reason.’

“RULE XIII. When words are placed in opposition to each other, or with some marked variety, they require to be distinguished by a comma: as,

‘Tho’ deep, yet clear; tho’ gentle, yet not dull; Strong, without rage; without o’erflowing, full.’

‘Good men, in this frail, imperfect state, are often found, not only in union with, but in opposition to, the views and conduct of one another.’

“Sometimes when the word with which the last preposition agrees, is single, it is better to omit the comma before it: as, ‘Many states were in alliance with, and under the protection of Rome.’

“The same rule and restriction must be applied when two or more nouns refer to the same preposition: as, ‘He was composed both under the threatening, and at the approach, of a cruel and lingering death;’ ‘He was not only the king, but the father of his people.’

“RULE XIV. A remarkable expression, or a short observation, somewhat in the manner of a quotation, may be properly marked with a comma: as, ‘It hurts a man’s pride to say, I do not know;’ ‘Plutarch calls lying, the vice of slaves.’

“RULE XV. Relative pronouns are connective words, and generally admit a comma before them: as, ‘He preaches sublimely, who lives a sober, righteous, and pious life;’ ‘There is no charm in the female sex, which can supply the place of virtue.’

“But when two members, or phrases, are closely connected by a relative, restraining the general notion of the antecedent to a particular sense, the comma should be omitted: as, ‘Self-denial is the sacrifice which virtue must make;’ ‘A man who is of a detracting spirit, will misconstrue the most innocent words that can be put together.’ In the latter example, the assertion is not of ‘a man in general,’ but of ‘a man who is of a detracting spirit;’ and therefore they should not be separated.

“The fifteenth rule applies equally to cases in which the relative is not expressed, but understood: as, ‘It was from piety, warm and unaffected, that his morals derived strength.’ ‘This sentiment, habitual and strong, influenced his whole conduct.’ In both of these examples, the relative and verb which was, are understood.

“RULE XVI. A simple member of a sentence, contained within another, or following another, must be distinguished by the comma: as, ‘To improve time, whilst we are blessed with health, will smooth the bed of sickness.’ ‘Very often, while we are complaining of the vanity, and the evils of human life, we make that vanity, and we increase those evils.’

“If, however, the members succeeding each other, are very closely connected, the comma is unnecessary: as, ‘Revelation tells us how we may attain happiness.’

“When a verb in the infinitive mood, follows its governing verb, with several words between them, those words should generally have a comma at the end of them: as, ‘It ill becomes good and wise men, to oppose and degrade one another.’

“Several verbs in the infinitive mood, having a common dependence, and succeeding one another, are also divided by commas: as, ‘To relieve the indigent, to comfort the afflicted, to protect the innocent, to reward the deserving, is a humane and noble employment.’

“RULE XVII. When the verb to be is followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, which, by transposition, might be made the nominative case to it, the former is generally separated from the latter verb, by a comma: as, ‘The most obvious remedy is, to withdraw from all associations with bad men.’ ‘The first and most obvious remedy against the infection, is, to withdraw from all associations with bad men.’

“RULE XVIII. When adjuncts or circumstances are of importance, and often when the natural order of them is inverted, they may be set off by commas: as, ‘Virtue must be formed and supported, not by unfrequent acts, but by daily and repeated exertions.’ ‘Vices, like shadows, towards the evening of life, grow great and monstrous.’ ‘Our interests are interwoven by threads innumerable;’ ‘By threads innumerable, our interests are interwoven.’

“RULE XIX. Where a verb is understood, a comma may often be properly introduced. This is a general rule, which, besides comprising some of the preceding rules, will apply to many cases not determined by any of them: as, ‘From law arises security; from security, curiosity; from curiosity, knowledge.’ In this example, the verb ‘arises’ is understood before ‘curiosity’ and ‘knowledge;’ at which words a considerable pause is necessary.

“RULE XX. The words, nay, so, hence, again, first, secondly, formerly, now, lastly, once more, above all, on the contrary, in the next place, in short, and all other words and phrases of the same kind, must generally be separated from the context by a comma: as, ‘Remember thy best and first friend; formerly, the supporter of thy infancy, and the guide of thy childhood; now, the guardian of thy youth, and the hope of thy coming years.’ ‘He feared want, hence, he over-valued riches.’ ‘His conduct may heal the difference, nay, it may constantly prevent any in future.’ ‘Finally, I shall only repeat what has been often justly said.’ ‘If the spring put forth no blossoms, in summer there will be no beauty, and in autumn, no fruit; so, if youth be trifled away without improvement, riper years may be contemptible, and old age miserable.’

“In many of the foregoing rules and examples, great regard must be paid to the length of the clauses, and the proportion which they bear to one another. An attention to the sense of any passage, and to the clear, easy communication of it, will, it is presumed, with the aid of the preceding rules, enable the student to adjust the proper pauses, and the places for inserting the commas.

“Of the Semicolon.

“The semicolon is used for dividing a compound sentence into two or more parts, not so closely connected as those which are separated by a comma, nor yet so little dependent on each other, as those which are distinguished by a colon.

“The semicolon is sometimes used, when the preceding member of the sentence does not of itself give a complete sense, but depends on the following clause: and sometimes when the sense of that member would be complete without the concluding one: as in the following instances: ‘As the desire of approbation, when it works according to reason, improves the amiable part of our species in every thing that is laudable; so nothing is more destructive to them when it is governed by vanity and folly.’

“‘Experience teaches us, that an entire retreat from worldly affairs, is not what religion requires; nor does it even enjoin a long retreat from them.’

“‘Straws swim upon the surface, but pearls lie at the bottom.’

“‘Philosophers assert, that Nature is unlimited in her operations; that she has inexhaustible treasures in reserve; that knowledge will always be progressive; and that all future generations will continue to make discoveries, of which we have not the least idea.’

“Of the Colon.

“The colon is used to divide a sentence into two or more parts, less connected than those which are separated by a semicolon; but not so independent as separate distinct sentences.

“The colon may be properly applied in the three following cases.

“1. When a member of a sentence is complete in itself, but followed by some supplemental remark, or further illustration of the subject: as, ‘Nature felt her inability to extricate herself from the consequences of guilt: the gospel reveals the plan of Divine interposition and aid.’ ‘Nature confessed some atonement to be necessary: the gospel discovers that the necessary atonement is made.’

“2. When several semicolons have preceded, and a still greater pause is necessary, in order to mark the connecting or concluding sentiment: as, ‘A divine legislator, uttering his voice from heaven; an almighty governor, stretching forth his arm to punish or reward; informing us of perpetual rest prepared hereafter for the righteous, and of indignation and wrath awaiting the wicked: these are the considerations which overawe the world, which support integrity, and check guilt.’

“3. The colon is commonly used when an example, a question, or a speech is introduced: as, ‘The Scriptures give us an amiable representation of the Deity, in these words: “God is love.”’ ‘He was often heard to say: “I have done with the world, and I am willing to leave it.”’

“The propriety of using a colon, or semicolon, is sometimes determined by a conjunction’s being expressed, or not expressed: as, ‘Do not flatter yourselves with the hope of perfect happiness: there is no such thing in the world.’ ‘Do not flatter yourselves with the hope of perfect happiness; for there is no such thing in the world.’

“Of the Period.

“When a sentence is complete and independent, and not connected in construction with the following sentence, it is marked with a period.

“Some sentences are independent of each other, both in their sense and construction: as, ‘Fear God. Honour the king. Have charity towards all men.’ Others are independent only in their grammatical construction: as, ‘The Supreme Being changes not, either in his desire to promote our happiness, or in the plan of his administration. One light always shines upon us from above. One clear and direct path is always pointed out to man.’

“A period may sometimes be admitted between two sentences, though they are joined by a disjunctive or copulative conjunction. For the quality of the point does not always depend on the connective particle, but on the sense and structure of sentences: as, ‘Recreations, though they may be of an innocent kind, require steady government, to keep them within a due and limited province. But such as are of an irregular and vicious nature, are not to be governed, but to be banished from every well-regulated mind.’

“‘He who lifts himself up to the observation and notice of the world is, of all men, the least likely to avoid censure. For he draws upon himself a thousand eyes, that will narrowly inspect him in every part.’

“The period should be used after every abbreviated word: as, ‘M.S. P.S. N.B. A.D. O.S. N.S.’ &c.

“Of the Dash, Notes of Interrogation and Exclamation, &c.

“THE DASH.--The Dash, though often used improperly by hasty and incoherent writers, may be introduced with propriety, where the sentence breaks off abruptly; where a significant pause is required; or where there is an unexpected turn in the sentiment: as, ‘If thou art he, so much respected once--but, oh! how fallen! how degraded!’ ‘If acting conformably to the will of our Creator;--if promoting the welfare of mankind around us;--if securing our own happiness;--are objects of the highest moment:--then we are loudly called upon, to cultivate and extend the great interests of religion and virtue.’

“‘Here lies the great--False marble, where? Nothing but sordid dust lies here.’

“Besides the points which mark the pauses in discourse, there are others, which denote a different modulation of voice, in correspondence to the sense. These are,

“The Interrogative point, ? “The Exclamation point, ! “The Parenthesis, ( )

“INTERROGATION.--A note of Interrogation is used at the end of an interrogative sentence; that is, when a question is asked: as, ‘Who will accompany me?’ ‘Shall we always be friends?’

“Questions which a person asks himself in contemplation, ought to be terminated by points of interrogation: as, ‘Who adorned the heavens with such exquisite beauty?’ ‘At whose command do the planets perform their constant revolutions?’

“A point of interrogation is improper after sentences which are not questions, but only expressions of admiration, or of some other emotion.

“‘How many instances have we of chastity and excellence in the fair sex!’

“‘With what prudence does the son of Sirach advise us in the choice of our companions!’

“A note of interrogation should not be employed, in cases where it is only said a question has been asked, and where the words are not used as a question. ‘The Cyprians asked me, why I wept.’ To give this sentence the interrogative form, it should be expressed thus: ‘The Cyprians said to me, “Why dost thou weep?”’

“EXCLAMATION.--The note of Exclamation is applied to expressions of sudden emotion, surprise, joy, grief, &c. and also to invocations or addresses: as, ‘My friend! this conduct amazes me!’ ‘Bless the Lord, O my soul! and forget not all his benefits!’

“‘Oh! had we both our humble state maintain’d, And safe in peace and poverty remain’d!’

“‘Hear me, O Lord! for thy loving kindness is great!’

“It is difficult, in some cases, to distinguish between an interrogative and exclamatory sentence; but a sentence, in which any wonder or admiration is expressed, and no answer either expected or implied, may be always properly terminated by a note of exclamation: as, ‘How much vanity in the pursuits of men!’ ‘Who can sufficiently express the goodness of our Creator!’ ‘What is more amiable than virtue!’

“The interrogation and exclamation points are indeterminate as to their quantity or time, and may be equivalent in that respect to a semicolon, a colon, or a period, as the sense may require. They mark an elevation of the voice.

“The utility of the points of interrogation and exclamation, appears from the following examples, in which meaning is signified and discriminated solely by the points.

“‘What condescension!’

“‘What condescension?’

“‘How great was the sacrifice!’

“‘How great was the sacrifice?’

“PARENTHESIS.--A parenthesis is a clause containing some necessary information, or useful remark, introduced into the body of a sentence obliquely, and which may be omitted without injuring the construction: as,

“‘Know then this truth; (enough for man to know,) Virtue alone is happiness below.’ “‘And was the ransom paid? It was; and paid (What can exalt his bounty more?) for thee.’

“‘To gain a posthumous reputation, is to save four or five letters (for what is a name besides?) from oblivion.’ ‘Know ye not, brethren, (for I speak to them that know the law,) how that the law hath dominion over a man as long as he liveth?’

“If the incidental clause is short, or perfectly coincides with the rest of the sentence, it is not proper to use the parenthetical characters. The following instances are therefore improper uses of the parenthesis. ‘Speak you (who saw) his wonders in the deep.’ ‘Every planet (as the Creator has made nothing in vain) is most probably inhabited.’ ‘He found them asleep again; (for their eyes were heavy;) neither knew they what to answer him.’

“The parenthesis marks a moderate depression of the voice, and may be accompanied with every point which the sense would require, if the parenthetical characters were omitted. It ought to terminate with the same kind of stop which the member has, that precedes it; and to contain that stop within the parenthetical marks. We must, however, except cases of interrogation and exclamation: as, ‘While they wish to please, (and why should they not wish it?) they disdain dishonourable means.’ ‘It was represented by an analogy, (Oh, how inadequate!) which was borrowed from,’” &c.

Q.

QUADRATS.

Pieces of type metal, of the depth of the body of the respective sizes to which they are cast, and lower than types, so as to leave a blank space on the paper, when printed, where they are placed: an en quadrat is half as thick as its depth; an em quadrat is equal in thickness and depth, and, being square on its surface, is the true quadrat, from quadratus, squared; a two em quadrat is twice the thickness of its depth; a three em three times; and a four em four times, as their names specify. Four ems are the largest quadrats that are cast. They are used to fill out short lines; to form white lines; and to justify letters, figures, &c., in any part of a line or page.

Four em quadrats are rarely cast larger than Pica; English and Great Primer do not exceed three ems; nor does Double Pica exceed two ems.

QUARTER.

A gutter behind the tympan, under the joints, to carry the water away beyond the farther side of the coffin that descends from the tympan. It is about an inch higher on the near than on the off side, and projects beyond the coffin about three inches.--M. It is not now used, nor is it necessary, as we do not wet the tympan so much as to cause the water to run off.

QUARTERS.

Quartos, octavos, and twelves forms are imposed in quarters. They are called Quarters, not from their equal divisions, but because they are imposed and locked up apart. Thus half the short cross in a twelves form is called a Quarter, though it be indeed but one sixth part of the form.--M. When both the crosses are in a chase, it is divided into four parts; for some sizes, such as twelves and eighteens, they are unequal; yet still each division is called a Quarter, whether it contain more or less than the proportionate number of pages.

QUARTO.

A sheet of paper folded into four leaves or eight pages is styled a Quarto.

QUI.

The established custom of the printing business in London is, for a workman when he intends to leave his situation to give a fortnight’s notice of his intention to quit; it is also the custom for the employer, when he finds it necessary to part with a workman, to give him a fortnight’s notice, except under particular circumstances of neglect or dishonesty, when the discharge is instanter: this is termed having got the Bullet; the fortnight’s notice to quit is termed having got the Qui. The word appears to be a contraction of Quietus [est], which, being granted to a sheriff, discharged him of all accounts due to the king. See BULLET.

QUIRE.

A Quire of paper, for all usual purposes, consists of twenty-four sheets, but for newspapers a Quire consists of twenty-five sheets, and a ream of twenty Quires makes 500 sheets. This is done, I believe, for the convenience of the Stamp Office.--See PAPER.

QUOIN-DRAWER.

A drawer in the frame of the imposing stone, in which quoins are kept; it is generally the right-hand top drawer, when you stand at the front of the stone.

QUOIN A FORM.

The fitting of the Quoins in a form, so that when it is locked-up they shall, in the most efficacious manner, wedge up and secure the types. See IMPOSING.

QUOINS.

Short pieces of beech wood, made of the same height as furniture, and tapering in their width, to wedge the pages up with in a chase. They are made of a variety of widths, from about two inches to less than a quarter of an inch, for the convenience of having every gradation in quoining a form.

QUOTATION.

A quotation “ ”. Two inverted commas are generally placed at the beginning of a phrase or a passage, which is quoted or transcribed from the speaker or author in his own words; and two commas, in their direct position, are placed at the conclusion: as,

“The proper study of mankind is man.”--Murray.

Murray’s “direct” commas are superior commas, and consequently what are technically called apostrophes.

We derive the use of inverted commas from France, where one Guillemet was the author of them, to exclude the use of Italick from quotations: as an acknowledgement for which improvement, his countrymen called these inverted commas after his name, Guillemets; whereas the Germans made a jest of their figure, and gave them the name of Gaenseaugen, or Geese-eyes. See APOSTROPHE.

QUOTATION QUADRATS

are cast the height of the Quotation. They are cast of different bodies, that the Compositor may have choice of them to justify his notes or quotations exactly against the designed line of the page--M. They are now cast to correspond with a piece of broad furniture one way, and with a narrow the other way, with spaces of both widths cast to different thicknesses; these spaces are called Justifiers, and the Quotation Quadrats are simply called Quotations.

R.

RACKS,

to hang paper on.--M. Now called poles. See BOARD RACK, CASE RACK, POLES.

RAG.

When letter cast has a bur on any of its edges, that bur is called a Rag.--M.

RAILS. See HIND POSTS.

RALPH. See SPIRIT.

RANKS.

From the frames in a composing room being placed in a row, the Compositors are said to be in the ranks; thus, if a compositor has been selected for a reader, or overseer, and he afterwards works at case as a compositor, it is said, he is come to the ranks again.

RAT.

A compositor, or pressman, who executes work at less than the regular prices, or for less than the generality of the trade think it deserves, or for less than the chapel decides it ought to be paid, or for less than others are paid for it, becomes what is termed a rat; the most miserable situation, perhaps, that a workman can be placed in. He is hooted at and despised by the rest of the workmen in every house where he may obtain employment; and this feeling towards him does not subside, for the opprobrious epithet accompanies him for life.

READER.

A person whose duty it is to read proofs in a printing office, for the purpose of correcting the errors, that are unavoidable from the nature of the process of arranging the types into words, lines, and pages.

After the compositor has corrected these errors in the form, a clean proof is pulled by the pressman, which, with the first proof, comes, in the regular routine of the business, to the reader again, to revise; that is, to compare the two carefully, to see that the errors that were first marked have been corrected, and to notice such as may have escaped the compositor’s attention, as well as any additional ones that may have been made. The corrected proof is then sent to the author or editor, and if he makes many alterations, it is again corrected in the form; another proof is then pulled, which comes again to the reader, who revises the author’s corrections, and reads it very carefully for press, to detect any errors that may have escaped the first reading, and also the author’s notice; when it is laid on, the pressman pulls a revise, which is passed to the reader, who again carefully revises it, to see that all the errors are corrected, and that the margin and the workmanship are right, previous to the sheet being printed off.

This is the usual routine in printing books; but in small establishments, the duties of a reader are performed generally by the overseer.

In large establishments, where there are several readers, I would invariably have the first proofs of any given work read by one and the same reader, and the press proofs also by one and the same but a different reader; in this case there would be an arrangement made between the readers, either orally or tacitly, with regard to the use of capitals, the orthography, compound words, the division of words, and the punctuation; an experienced compositor would consequently very soon fall into the method, and, knowing how the work was to be done, would have very little trouble with his proofs; and the whole would proceed with regularity and uniformity, and be more correct, than if the proofs had been indiscriminately given to any of the readers who might happen to be disengaged at the moment.

If this plan were followed, much injury to the work as well as vexation to the compositor would be avoided; for where the second proofs fall into the hands of different readers, it must necessarily happen that marks will be multiplied, from the different views which men entertain on the same points where there are no positive laws to refer to, but where arbitrary private judgment decides instead: thus, one reader differs from another with respect to the use of the capitals, as to the division of words, the orthography, and the punctuation; thus harassing and teazing the compositor, who is never certain under these circumstances what plan to follow, for what is right to-day may be wrong to-morrow, and vice versá, besides the pecuniary loss he suffers in making these alterations, in addition to the deterioration of the work, from the want of uniformity and consistency.

Many readers betray a want of remembrance of the sensitiveness of authors, by endeavouring, with the best intentions, to improve their language, and thus making unauthorized alterations in the proofs: this causes an unpleasant feeling, and I have known the reader accused of hypercriticism, and the original words restored; in other instances I have known the reader to have been told that he did not understand the author’s meaning, with a request that for the future he would literally follow the copy, and leave it to the author to make any alterations he might think proper. After a long experience I have invariably found it the most satisfactory plan, when I perceived a mistake, or met with a passage that I did not understand, or that I thought incorrect, to draw a line under the words, and insert a query in the margin, thus drawing the author’s attention to the part; if he altered the passage, it was well, if he did not, the responsibility was his; thus the author’s feelings were not wounded, and in most cases he expressed his satisfaction at this method; but I never knew an instance where any censure was expressed.

In making these general observations, I am actuated only by the motive that printers should combine the desire to be correct with the principle of conciliating the kind feelings of the author or editor.

REAM.

A ream of paper consists of twenty quires, each of twenty-four sheets, with the exception of the two quires at the outside of each ream, called Outside Quires or Corded Quires, which consist of twenty sheets each, all damaged, torn, or imperfect, more or less: this is the state in which paper is uniformly delivered by the paper-maker from the mill. For private use it may be obtained from the stationers made up with twenty inside quires, that is, of quires of perfect paper; a ream in this state consists of 480 sheets. For the purpose of printing, it is always sent to printing offices in a state technically styled perfect, made up into bundles, each bundle containing forty-three quires; thus a ream will consist of twenty-one quires and a half, or 516 sheets; this surplus allows for accidents in wetting, at press, and in the warehouse, as well as waste, and enables the printer to deliver to the publisher the full count. The outside quires are generally sold to bookbinders, but those of writing-paper are used by stationers in making copy books and memorandum books.

RECORDS.

In the year 1800, the House of Commons voted an Address to His Majesty King George III. on the state of the Public Records of this kingdom, and the necessity of providing for the better arrangement, preservation, and more convenient use of the same; and humbly represented that the Public Records of the kingdom are in many offices unarranged, undescribed, and unascertained; that many of them are exposed to erasure, alteration, and embezzlement, and are lodged in buildings incommodious and insecure, and that it would be beneficial to the public service that the records and papers contained in many of the principal offices and repositories should be methodized, and that certain of the more antient and valuable amongst them should be printed; and humbly besought His Majesty, that He would be graciously pleased to give such directions thereupon, as He in His wisdom should think fit.

The first commission, bearing date the 19th of July 1800, states, “that We, considering the premises, and earnestly desiring more effectually to provide for the better arrangement, preservation, and more convenient use of the said records and papers, and reposing great trust and confidence in your fidelity, discretion, and integrity;--

“Have authorized and appointed, and by these presents do authorize and appoint you the said William Henry Cavendish Duke of Portland, William Windham Baron Grenville, Henry Dundas, Henry Addington, William Pitt, Sir Richard Pepper Arden, Frederick Campbell (commonly called Lord Frederick Campbell), Sylvester Douglas, Sir John Mitford, Sir William Grant, Robert Dundas, and Charles Abbot, and any three or more of you, to make a diligent and particular inquiry into the several matters which our faithful Commons have, in the above-mentioned report of their proceedings, represented as fitting to be provided for by our royal authority.

“And to the end that Our royal will and pleasure in the premises may be executed with the greater regularity and expedition, We farther by these presents will and command, and do hereby give full power and authority to you or any three or more of you, to nominate and appoint from time to time such person of ability, care, and diligence, as ye shall think fit, to be and act as your Clerk or Secretary, for the purpose of aiding you in the execution of these presents; and also to nominate and appoint in like manner such several persons of ability, care, and diligence, as ye may think fit, to be Sub-Commissioners, to be employed under your direction and controul in the premises; and more especially to methodize, regulate, and digest the records, rolls, instruments, books, and papers, in any of Our public offices and repositories; and to cause such of the said records, rolls, instruments, books, and papers as are decayed and in danger of being destroyed, to be bound and secured; and to make exact calendars and indexes thereof; and to superintend the printing of such calendars and indexes, and original records and papers as ye shall cause to be printed.”

The Commissioners have in consequence published several volumes of the Records, which contain documents of the highest importance to the owner of landed property, to the family historian, and to the topographical writer, as well as assist in the elucidation of the manners and customs of the times to which they belong; while to the general historian they are invaluable, as opening new sources of the most valuable and authentic information, which previously had been virtually closed against his researches.

The portions of the Records already published have been printed literally from the originals, with all their abbreviations and peculiarities preserved. This renders them difficult to be read by the inexperienced in ancient manuscripts; and since county historians and other topographical writers make frequent extracts from these ancient records, to establish facts concerning persons, places, and property, I have thought it useful to give a detailed article on this subject, which may be equally useful in the library as in the printing-office.

The Commissioners have also published several volumes of Calendars and Indexes to many classes of Records.

To enter into a history, however brief, of the various public Records, would be foreign to the objects of the present work: for such information the reader is referred to publications that treat especially upon the subject. It is sufficient for the purpose to state, that each of the King’s Courts of judicature registers its acts and proceedings upon rolls of parchment, which are called the Records of the court to which they belong; for instance, the Chancery Rolls, which contain the registration of all matters which pass under the great seal of England, are divided into classes; particular rolls being appropriated to the entry of particular matters. Thus, the Norman Rolls contain entries chiefly relating to Norman affairs; the Scotch Rolls comprehend those which regard Scotland generally; the Parliament Rolls embrace matters touching the Parliament; the Fine Rolls, entries respecting fines paid to the king for grants of liberties and privileges. The Close Rolls preserve copies of letters directed to individuals for their sole guidance and inspection, which, being private, are for this reason folded up, and closed with a seal; while the Patent Rolls, on the contrary, contain copies of letters which, though bearing a seal on their lower margin as a mark of authenticity, are not closed, but remain patent or open, to be shown to all men: these convey directions or commands of general obligation, or are given to individuals for their particular protection, profit, or personal advantage. A few only of the Chancery Records have been here enumerated; but sufficient has been stated to show the reader that each species of roll has its distinguishing characteristic.

A Chancery roll is composed of a number of skins of parchment so connected that the top of the second is attached to the bottom of the first, the top of the third to the bottom of the second, and so on; the whole being rolled up in the manner of a piece of cloth in a draper’s shop, or of carpet in the warehouse of the manufacturer.

The reader will, from this description, readily understand that the word “roll” (rotulus, à rotare, to turn round) is but a synonym of the word “volume” (volumen, à volvere, to roll), and that, from the longitudinal connexion of its component skins, a reference made from any entry upon it, to a preceding or succeeding one, will be literally and properly expressed by the words vide SUPRA and vide INFRA. He will likewise clearly comprehend that not only the interior, or intus, of the roll, upon which the characteristic entries have been made, will necessarily be kept clean and free from atmospheric influence, but also the greater part of the exterior, which is denominated the dors. This circumstance afforded the scribes an opportunity, which they readily embraced, of using the dors for entries and memoranda that were frequently very different in their character from those contained on the intus of the roll.

The Rolls of the courts of King’s Bench, Common Pleas, and Exchequer, contain the proceedings of those Courts; and they differ from those of the Chancery, not only in the nature of their contents, but also in the form in which they are made up. A roll of these courts consists of an indefinite number of skins sewn or attached together with a strong ligature of parchment at the top, and the subject is written both on the intus and dors, precisely in the same way as a book or letter is written; after the intus is filled, the subject is continued on the dors. In using this kind of roll, each skin, when perused, is turned back over the head of the rest, and brought down immediately after that which just before had been the last of the series; until, the whole having been thus in their order revolved, the first skin is again brought into its original position. The entire mass, being unprotected by pasteboard or other unyielding covers, is perfectly flexible, and, having been rolled up in the manner of a quire of paper, which it is desired to reduce to its smallest compass, is confined in its position by a piece of tape or other adequate ligature.

For every regnal year of a King’s reign there is one or more of each class of rolls appropriated; according to the quantity of business done, so is the number of each class of rolls: for instance, the Patent Rolls of the 1st of Edward the Fourth, extending to six rolls or parts, as they are called, contain the enrolment of all the Letters Patent made during that year; the Charter Rolls of the same year, all the Charters granted in that year; as the Close Rolls do all the Letters Close issued in that year.

In quoting an entry from a roll, it is usual for writers to state first the name of the roll on which it is to be found: as, Rot. Pat. (Rotulus Patentium), Rot. Claus. (Rotulus Clausarum), the word “Litterarum” being understood in the two preceding cases; Rot. Fin. (Rotulus Finium), &c. Then follows the year of the king’s reign. Should the roll be divided into parts, the part also is specified; as, p. 1. or pars 1., p. 2. or pars 2. The next circumstance noticed is the particular skin or membrane on which the entry occurs; as, m. 23. If the entries on the skin have numbers attached to them, the number also (n. 1., &c.) is cited: and if the entry is made on the back or dors of the roll, that circumstance is expressed by adding d. or in dorso (i. e. “on the back”) to the quotation; for, should this be omitted, the entry will very naturally be sought for upon the intus of the roll. Citing, then, an entry, from the Patent Rolls for instance, we will suppose the quotation to run in the following form, “Rot. Pat. 13 Edw. III. p. 2. m. 23.;” which would be thus rendered in English: “On the twenty-third skin of the second part of the Patent Roll of the thirteenth year of Edward the Third.”

Before quitting this part of the subject, it may not be unimportant to state that, on examining a roll, it is not an unfrequent circumstance to meet with entries which are cancelled, or crossed out with the pen; but, to prevent suspicion that this has been unfairly done, the reason for the cancellation is generally added at the side: as, “Quia supra,”--“Because it has already been entered above;” “Quia alias inferius,”--“Because it has been re-entered in other words below;” “Quia in Rot. Fin.”--“Because it is entered on the Fine Roll” (to which roll it more properly belongs); &c. This kind of cancellation, which was performed, as of course, by the person who discovered the error, must not be confounded with a cancellation by judgment; which latter was a function of the Lord Chancellor, who, when Letters Patent or Charters were adjudged void, was the person who condemned or cancelled them.

The terms cancellation, erasure, expunging or expunction, obliteration, elision, and deletion,--words each employed to denote a different method adopted to prevent faulty passages or minor errors from standing as parts of a composition,--having been frequently used indiscriminately one for another, the reader may not be displeased to be here reminded of their original significations. To treat, then, of each in the order in which it has been named;--

Cancellation denotes the drawing a pen several times obliquely across a passage, first from right to left, and then from left to right, in the manner of lattice-work. (The word is derived from cancella, a lattice.)

Erasure implies the removal of a faulty portion by the application of the knife. (From erado, I scrape out.)

Expunging or expunction (both derivations from the same verb, expungo, I prick or dot out,) was a method by which the clerk neatly expressed that a word, or part of a word, was to be omitted; as “sentenṭẹṇce.” Leaving out, then, the under-dotted, or expuncted letters, the amended word will be sentence.

Obliteration is the slovenly method, still frequently employed, of completely covering the error with ink, so that not a letter thereof can be traced. (From oblitero, I blot out.)

Elision is the act of striking out the erroneous matter by a simple dash of the pen. (From elido, I strike or dash out.)

Deletion is the wiping away the ink while it is yet wet, and then continuing the writing over the space which had been in the first instance occupied by the error. (From deleo, I wipe out.)

After this short, but, it is hoped, satisfactory explanation of the nature and circumstances of a roll, the reader will proceed to an analysis of the contracted language in which records have been composed.

The marks placed above letters to denote omissions are either a right line (¯), or a circumflex (~). The former of these marks above a vowel denotes that an immediately subsequent m or n has been omitted; as, vēdāt for vendant, bonū for bonum, terrā for terram: the latter mark, when seen above or through a letter, whether in the middle or at the end of a word, signifies that some letter other than m or n is to be supplied, as ṽl for vel, ip̃e for ipse; or that more letters than one are required, as aĩa for anima, al̃r for aliter, Wintoñ for Wintonia, nob̃ for nobis, mand̃ for mandatum. The circumflex is sometimes continued over or through two letters; as, occo͠e for occasione, nll͠m for nullum. Some persons, however, employ the straight line through a consonant, instead of the circumflex, to denote the omission of one or more letters; as, vob̵ for vobis, qd̵ for quod.

A small letter placed above the line (hence called a superior letter) indicates an omission of which such letter forms a part; as, don^c for donec, p^{i}us for prius, q^{o}s for quos, s^a for supra, t^i for tibi.

The four following double characters occur in Sir Francis Palgrave’s “Parliamentary Writs,” in each of which the superior immediately surmounts its subjacent letter, having been cast with it by the founder as if they had been but one character:--ṁ, for mihi; ṅ, for nisi; q̇, used for qui and quia; ṫ, for tibi.

The apostrophe is sometimes used as a mark of abbreviation, generally after an initial capital, but sometimes also in other parts of the word.

A point or dot, placed after a letter, is frequently used as a sign of final abbreviation; as, ass. no. diss, for assisæ novæ disseisinæ, di. t̃ fi. s. for dilecto et fideli suo, e. for est, plurib. for pluribus.

The signification of the following characters is fixed and positive:--

Ɂ This symbol, sometimes called the c cursive, or c reversed, denotes com or con: as, Ɂmitto, committo; Ɂtra, contra. Before the adoption of the present elegant type, this character was represented in printing by an old-fashioned figure of 9; as, 9mune, commune. In the “Parliamentary Writs,” a turned c supplies its place; as, ↄpetere, competere.

[#] This represents the es plural and is possessive in the termination of Old English nouns: in later times it was much used for the is final of Latin genitives. In the extract from Richard of Devizes, immediately to be given, it has been uniformly thus employed.

ę This character, which resembles the cedilla of the French (ç), is sometimes employed as the representative of the diphthong æ in particular records; as, terrę, terræ.

[#] or [#] Each of these characters represents est, simple or in composition; as, simple, [#] est; in composition, inter[#] interest.

ẽ or e̚ These also denote est: they sometimes stand for ess; as, ẽe, esse; e̚et, esset.

&, 7, and t̃ are abbreviated forms of the conjunction et. They were not, however, used indiscriminately, as in the subsequent praxis, but are peculiar to MSS. of very different periods of time.

t̃c̃. et cætera.

&̄ etiam.

ƪ This ascending recurved flourish, which is sometimes cast separately by the founder, that it may be placed after a simple consonant, but which is most frequently cast with it, both forming together one compound character, denotes the omission of er or re: as, cƪno or c̉no, cerno: gƪens or g̉ens, gerens: gƪgis or g̉gis, gregis: camƪa or cam̉a, camera: remunƪo or remun̉o, remunero: pƪter or p̉ter, præter (Note.--Per, which has its specific symbol, is never represented by this character): sƪviens or s̉viens, serviens: tƪra or t̉ra, terra: tƪmens or t̉mens, tremens: fuƪit or fủit, fuerit: vƪsus or v̉sus, versus: duxƪit or dux̉it, duxerit;--x̉ stands also for xor, as uxƪem or ux̉em, uxorem. When er is omitted after one of the ascending letters b, d, or h, its absence is generally denoted by the circumflex line drawn across the upright stem of the letter: as tab̃na, taberna; consid̃atum, consideratum; h̃es, hæres.

Đ This character, when alone, represents De, when the word begins a sentence.

đ The small đ, when alone, likewise denotes de; and in accounts it represents one of the cases of denarius. It may also be used arbitrarily; and then, like all letters standing alone, its meaning must be discovered by an examination of the context.

ɱ A contracted form of manucaptor or manerium. It is an arbitrary sign, and may represent other words, the sense of which must be sought from the context.

⅌ or p̵ This is the specific representative of per: but it sometimes also denotes par and por; as, p̵te, parte; temp̵e, tempore.

⅊ This character uniformly represents pro.

ɋ This, annexed to a word, denotes the postpositive conjunction que.

q̵ quod.

Q₂ or q₂ quia.

℞ Rex and its cases; also Regina and its cases.

ꝝ This character, which is found at the end only of a word, usually represents the rum of plural genitives: it is sometimes, however, used as a general termination; as, Alienoꝝ for Alienoram, Eboꝝ for Eborum or Eboracum, Windesoꝝ for Windesores.

ʄ This character, which occurs mostly in Old French, represents, in composition, the syllable ser; as, ʄvaunt, servaunt: alone it means sire; with a superior ^r, ʄ^r, seigneur.

þ th Saxon: as, þƪ, ther; þ^t, that.

ð Another form of the Saxon th.

ꝰ This symbol is the representative of the final us, except, as an almost general rule, when terminating datives: as, Augꝰti, Augusti; Deꝰ, Deus; mandamꝰ, mandamus; priꝰ, prius. It also denotes os or ost in the preposition post; thus, pꝰ or pꝰt

ʒ The usual function of this abbreviation is that of denoting the us final of datives; as, tribʒ, tribus; omnibʒ, omnibus: but it likewise represents the final et; as, debʒ, debet; habʒ, habet: and sometimes stands for a general termination; as, quilʒ, quilibet; scilʒ, scilicet. For the last purpose it is still in ordinary use, but under a disguised form; as viz. for viʒ.

Xp̃c Latin names derived from the Greek are usually printed with the Roman letters which most nearly resemble in their form those of the original language: thus X stands for the Greek chi (Χ), p for the rho (Ρ), and c for the sigma (Σ). Xp̃c consequently represent the word “Christus”: by substituting the required letter for the c, we shall have the various cases of the noun; as, Xp̃i, Xp̃o; Christi, Christo, &c.

✠ The cross is met with in some records and charters, and in such cases generally precedes the subscription of his name by a bishop. It is not used as a word, but apparently as a compendious profession of faith, or else as a silent invocation of the Divine aid. This was also the sign by which persons who could not write were accustomed to attest instruments, their names being added by those who could. An imitation of this mark is still in use among uneducated persons; as, “John [his X mark.] Thomas,”

The following points are met with in ancient MSS.

, the comma; sometimes also used as a period.

; the ancient colon, or semicolon: used frequently as a full stop.

[#] This character denotes the commencement of a paragraph in Domesday-book.

[#] and [#] These marks are, in some records, placed at the commencement of sections and of independent lines.

The necessity of printing records in the most literal manner having been for a long time generally admitted, Editors have been constrained to invent characters by which to denote erasures, cancellations, interlineations, and other peculiarities which occur upon the face of them. These characters, though strictly editorial, are nevertheless deserving of notice here.

Cancellations, using the term in a comprehensive sense, are denoted by Sir F. Palgrave, in his “Parliamentary Writs,” by placing an upright trefoil (trèfle--the club of the French playing-cards) at the commencement of the elided passage, the conclusion of which he indicates by a reversed trefoil: thus, T. ℞ ap̃ ♣ap̃d[#] Westm̃.

Interlineations are expressed by their being included between brackets: [ ].

Words written upon erasures, or apparently added to the text after it had been originally written, are placed between inverted commas: “ ”.

Sir Francis likewise employs critical marks, by which he directs attention to evident as well as apparent errors in the original, as also to the point at which an apparent deficiency exists.

Doubtful readings, and words which are apparently clerical errors, are preceded by the upright parallel, ‖.

Readings which are evidently erroneous are stigmatized by the obelisk or dagger, †.

And apparent deficiencies are denoted by the insertion of an asterisk, *, at the point where the omission appears to have taken place.

∿ and • These two characters occur also in the last-named work, the meaning of which is by no means clear. They appear to be imperfect imitations of private marks made by the writers of the documents.

Mr. Hardy, in his “Close Rolls,” has adopted a system somewhat different from that of Sir F. Palgrave.

All errors, whether of commission or omission, the first-named gentleman denotes by drawing a line under the wrong word, or under the interspace in which the omission should have been inserted; leaving the ascertainment of the kind of error to the discrimination of the reader.

Elisions of one or a few words are represented in his work by means of thin wire placed over the surface of these words, which are grooved by a file for the purpose of its reception, and which, when thus printed, have the appearance of having been dashed out with a pen. Cancellations of greater extent are indicated by including the cancelled matter between two thick perpendicular lines, curved at their extremities and formed like the printer’s brace, but without its receding middle. These, for convenience, are here exhibited in the horizontal position ╭╌╮ ╰╌╯.

Words written on an erasure are printed between these marks ` ´.

To assist the reader in comprehending the foregoing explanations, and as an exercise to his ingenuity, an interesting tale, of sufficient length for the purpose, has been selected from the History of Richard the First. This historiette, which was written by the monarch’s namesake, Richard of Devizes, and which abounds in very interesting particulars, was lately, for the first time, given to the public in a printed form by the “English Historical Society:” to their publication we are indebted for our text. The reader, having carefully studied the preceding symbols, may now proceed to an examination of the language of this story. This, which has been purposely contracted with every species of abbreviations common to the 9th, 10th, 11th, 12th, 13th, and 14th centuries, he will proceed to extend into full words, verifying his performance, when completed, by comparing it with what immediately follows, which he will find to be the same narrative in an uncontracted form. Having acquired some degree of facility in extending the contracted forms, he may then advantageously reverse the process, and proceed to a reduction of words at length to a contracted state. A little practice will soon enable him to apply his newly acquired knowledge in the elucidation of whatever form of record or of ancient document may come before him. This acquirement he may find extremely useful, and he may possibly thence derive a certain degree of distinction; since this has to the present time been a branch of knowledge entirely confined to a small portion of the learned, and to the few typographical readers whose employments have more immediately required its cultivation. A translation is added, followed by a few explanatory notes.

In conformity with a practice which has hitherto much obtained in Record printing, c has been substituted for t in the terminations tio and tia: this usage, the propriety of which has been questioned, has been here followed, in order that the student’s eye may be accustomed to its recurrence elsewhere. The diphthongs æ and œ have been also for the same reason represented by the simple e.

Story of a Boy killed by the Jews of Winchester.

The preceding in words at length.

Quia Wintonia non debuit debita sibi mercede privari pro servata, ut in capite libri præpositum est, pace Judæis, Wintonienses Judæi civitatis suæ (Judaico more) studentes honori, etsi factum forte defuerit, plurimis facti indiciis celebrem sibi famam de martyrizato a se in Wintonia puero confecerunt. Casus erat hujusmodi. Puerum quemdam Christianum, artis sutoriæ sciolum, Judæus quidam in familiare familiæ suæ consciverat ministerium. Non ibi continuum residebat ad opus, nec magnum aliquid semel sinebatur explere, ne provisam sibi cædem probaret cohabitatio; et ut, pro modico labore melius ibi quam pro multo alibi remuneratus, domum dæmonis, donis ejus et dolis illectus, libentius frequentaret. Fuerat autem Francus genere, pupillus et orphanus, abjectæ conditionis et paupertatis extremæ. Has hujusmodi miserias in Francia male miseratus quidam Judæus Francigena, crebris ei monitis persuasit ut Angliam peteret, terram lacte et melle manantem; Anglos liberales prædicavit et dapsiles; ibi nullum, qui niteretur ad probitatem, pauperem moriturum. Puer promtulus, ut naturaliter Francorum est, ad velle quicquid volueris, assumpto secum comite quodam coætaneo suo et compatriots, ad peregrine proficiscendum præcinctus est; nihil in manibus habens præter baculum, nihil in sytarchia præter subulam.

Valedixit Judæo suo; cui Judæus, “Vade,” ait, “viriliter. Deus patrum meorum deducat te sicut desidero.” Et, impositis manibus super caput ejus, ac si esset hircus emissarius, post stridores quosdam gutturis et tacitas imprecationes, jam de præda securus, adjecit, “Forti animo esto, obliviscere populum tuum et terram tuam, quia omnis terra forti patria est, ut piscibus æquor, ut volucri vacuo quicquid in orbe patet. Angliam ingressus si Londonias veneris, celeriter pertransibis; multum enim mihi displicet illa polis. Omne hominum genus in illam confluit ex omni natione quæ sub cœlo est; omnis gens sua vitia et suos mores urbi intulit. Nemo in ea sine crimine vivit; non omnis in ea vicus non abundat tristibus obscenis; eo ibi quisquis melior est, quo fuerit major in scelere. Non ignoro quem instruo; habes supra tuam ætatem fervorem ingenii, frigiditatem memoriæ, ex utrinque contrariis temperantiam rationis. Nihil de te mihi metuo, nisi cum male viventibus commoreris; ex convictu enim mores formantur. Esto, esto! Londonias venies. Ecce! prædico tibi, quicquid in singulis, quicquid in universis partibus mundi mali vel malitiæ est, in una illa civitate reperies. Lenonum choros non adeas, ganearum gregibus non immiscearis; vita thalum et tesseram, theatrum et tabernam. Plures ibi quam in tota Gallia thrasones offendes, gnathonum autem infinitus est numerus. Histriones, scurræ, glabriones, garamantes, palpones, pusiones, molles, mascularii, ambubaiæ, pharmacopolæ, crissariæ, phitonissæ, vultuariæ, noctivagæ, magi, mimi, mendici, balathrones, hoc genus omne totas replevere domos.[1] Ergo, si nolueris habitare cum turpibus, non habitabis Londoniis. Non loquor in literatos vel religiosos, sive Judæos; quamvis et ex ipsa cohabitatione malorum, minus eos ibi quam alibi crediderim esse perfectos.

“Nec eo pergit oratio, ut in nullam te recipias civitatem, cum meo consilio nusquam tibi sit nisi in urbe manendum, refert tamen in qua. Si igitur circa Cantuariam appuleris, iter habebis perdere; si vel per eam transieris. Tota est illa perditorum collectio ad suum nescio quem nuper deificatum, qui fuerat Cantuariæ archipresbyter, quod passim præ inopia panis et ocio per plateas moriuntur ad solem. Rovecestria et Cicestria viculi sunt, et cur civitates dici debeant præter sedes flaminum nihil obtendunt. Oxonia vix suos clericos, non dico satiat, sed sustentat. Exonia eodem farre reficit homines et jumenta. Bathonia, in imis vallium in crasso nimis aere et vapore sulphureo posita, imo deposita, est ad portas inferi. Sed nec in arctois sedem tibi legeris urbibus, Wigornia, Cestria, Herefordia, propter Walenses vitæ prodigos. Eboracum Scottis abundat, fœdis et infidis hominibus vel homuncionibus. Eliensis pagus perpetuo putidus est pro circumfusis paludibus. In Dunelmo, Northwico, sive Lincolnia, perpaucos de potentibus, de tua conditione nullum penitus audies Romane loquentem. Apud Bristollum nemo est qui non sit vel fuerit saponarius, et omnis Francus saponarios amat ut stercorarios. Post urbes, omne forum, villa, vel oppidum, incolas habet rudes et rusticos. Omni insuper tempore pro talibus Cornubienses habeto, quales in Francia nosti nostros Flandrenses haberi. Ceterum regio ipsa generaliter in rore cœli et in pinguedine terræ tota beatissima est; in singulis etiam locis aliqui boni sunt, set multo minus in omnibus quam in una Wintonia.

“Hæc est in partibus illis Judæorum Hierosolyma, in hac sola perpetua pace fruuntur, hæc est schola bene vivere et valere volentium. Hic fiunt homines, hic satis est panis et vini pro nihilo. Sunt in ea tantæ monachi misericordiæ et mansuetudinis, clerus consilii et libertatis, cives civilitatis et fidei, feminæ pulchritudinis et pudicitiæ, quod parum me retinet quin ego vadam illuc cum talibus Christianis fieri Christianus. Ad istam te dirigo civitatem, urbem urbium, matrem omnium, et omnibus meliorem. Unum est vitium et illud solum, cui de consuetudine nimis indulget. Salva pace literatorum dixerim et Judæorum, Wentani mentiuntur, ut vigiles, sed in fabulis faciendis. Nusquam enim sub cœlo de tam facili tot rumores falsi fabricantur, ut ibi; alias, per omnia sunt veraces. Multa haberem adhuc et de meis negotiis tibi dicere, sed ne forte non capias, vel obliviscaris, literulas has familiaris mei Judæi manibus inseres, credo quia et ab illo aliquando remuneraberis.” Scripta brevis erat Hebraica. Judæus peroraverat; et puer, omnia interpretatus in bonum, pervenit Wintoniam.

Subula sibi sicut et sodali suo satisfecit ad victum, et male parta per literas Judæi sæva suavitas et blæsa benignitas ad solatium. Ubicumque diebus pauperculi operarentur ab invicem, vel comederent, singulis noctibus in uno unius vetulæ veteri tugurio in uno lectulo quiescebant. Dies succedunt diebus, menses mensibus; et hujusmodi pueri nostri, quem tam curiose hucusque diduximus, adesse per abesse festinant tempora. Crucis adoratæ dies advenerat, et puer ipso die apud Judæum suum operans, quocumque modo de medio factus, non comparuit. Erat quippe proximum Pascha, dies festus Judæorum. Socius illius vespere non revertentis ad cubiculum miratus absentiam, plurimis ipsa nocte terretur insomniis. Quæsitum diebus aliquot per omnes urbis angulos cum non invenisset, convenit Judæum simpliciter, si suum quoquam misisset nutritium; quem cum præter solitum de tam benigno pridie vehementer sensisset acerbum, verborum et vultus varietate notata, incanduit illico, et, ut erat vocis acutæ et mirabilis eloquentiæ, statim prorupit in jurgia, magnis eum de sublatione socii sui clamoribus urgens. “Tu,” inquit, “fili sordidæ meretricis, tu latro, tu traditor, tu diabole, tu crucifixisti socium meum. Hei mihi! modo quare non habeo vires hominis! Ego te manibus meis dilaniarem.” Audiuntur in platea clamores vociferantis in æde, concurrunt undique Judæi et Christiani. Puerulus instat, et jam pro turba constantior, interpellatis præsentibus, cœpit allegare pro socio. “O vos,” ait, “viri qui convenistis, videte si est dolor sicut dolor meus. Iste Judæus diabolus est, iste cor meum de ventre meo rapuit, iste unicum sodalem meum jugulavit, præsumo etiam quod manducavit. Filius quidam diaboli, Judæus, Francigena, nec intelligo, nec experior, Judæus ille dedit sodali meo literas mortis suæ ad hominem istum. Ad hanc urbem venit inductus, imo seductus. Judæo huic sæpe servivit, et in domo ejus novissime visus est.” Non defuit ei testis ad aliqua, quantum et femina Christiana, quæ, contra Canones, in eadem domo nutrierat Judæulos. Constanter jurabat se vidisse puerum in penum Judæi descendere sine regressu. Judæus inficiatur, res refertur ad judices. Deficiunt accusatores; puer quia infra ætatem erat, femina quia infamem eam fecerat Judæorum ministerium. Judæus obtulit purgationem conscientiæ propter infamiam. Judicibus aurea placuit. Dedit Phinees et placavit, et cessavit quassatio.

Translation.

As it would have been wrong that Winchester should be deprived of her due reward for having preserved peace with the Jews, as has been stated at the beginning of this book[2], the Winchester Jews, studious (after a Jewish fashion) of their city’s honour, although clear evidence of the deed was perhaps wanting, yet from several indications of its commission, gained for themselves a notorious celebrity by the martyrdom of a lad in Winchester. The circumstance was as follows: A certain Jew had engaged a Christian boy, who was a little acquainted with shoemaking, in the domestic service of his family. He did not remain permanently at work in the house, nor was he allowed to perform any great matter at once, lest cohabitation with the family should show him the destruction prepared for him; as also, that, being better remunerated for a little labour there than for much elsewhere, he should, enticed by his presents and deceit, the more willingly resort to the demon’s house. Now the boy was a native of France, a minor and an orphan; he was, too, of low condition and extreme poverty. A French Jew, hypocritically pitying this his state of wretchedness while in France, persuaded him by repeated exhortations to seek England, a land flowing with milk and honey: he extolled the English as liberal and munificent; adding, that no one who would struggle for an honest living in that country could die poor. The lad, rather ready, as is natural with the French, to conform his will to that of others, taking with him a companion of his own age and country, girt up his loins for a foreign journey; carrying nothing in his hand except a staff, nor anything in his scrip besides an awl.

He took leave of his friend the Jew, who thus addressed him. “Go thy way,” says he, “manfully. May the God of my fathers be thy leader, according to my desire.” And having laid his hands upon his head, as if he had been the scape-goat, being now certain of his prey, he added, after certain guttural croakings and silent imprecations, “Be of a stout heart: forget thy people and thy country, for every land is as his country to the brave, even as is the sea to fish, as to the bird whatever lies before it on the open globe. On landing in England, shouldst thou go to London, thou wilt pass through it quickly, for much doth that city displease me. Every kind of men from every nation under heaven flows into that place; into that town hath every people carried its vices and its habits. No one lives there untainted with crime; there is not a street within that place which abounds not with sad obscenity; a man is there accounted better in proportion as he has been a greater adept in iniquity. I am not ignorant of whom I instruct: thou hast a glow of genius beyond thy years, a coolness of reflection, and, as the result of these opposite qualities, a temperateness of the reasoning faculty. I have no fear for thee unless thou dwell with evil-livers, for from our associations are our morals formed. Amen! amen! thou wilt go to London. Lo! I tell thee beforehand, whatever there is of evil or of wickedness in particular parts of the world, whatever in all its parts together, in that one city wilt thou find. Go not among the multitude of the corrupters of youth; mix not with the crowds issuing from the stews; flee dice and chess, the playhouse and the pothouse. Thou wilt meet there more bullies than are in the whole of France, and yet the number of mean flatterers is infinite. Stage-players, buffoons, bald-pated reprobates, men living like wild Indians, parasites, infamous boys, effeminate and scandalous men, lewd music girls, quacks, wantons, fortune-tellers, harpies, night-walkers, conjurers, mimics, beggars, shabby scoundrels,--this is the sort of people with which each house is filled. If, then, thou wouldst not be a dweller with men of shame, thou wilt not abide in London. My observations are not directed against men of letters or the religious, nor against Jews; though, from their very cohabitation with the wicked, I should believe them to be farther from perfection there than anywhere else.

“Nor does my advice go the length of dissuading thee from betaking thyself to a city, since in my opinion thou shouldst tarry nowhere but in some large town; it is of consequence, however, in which. If then thou shouldst land near Canterbury, thou wilt be on the road to destruction; if even thou pass through it. All that collection of lost men is so devoted to the service of some lately deified person of their place (I know not whom)[3], who was archbishop of Canterbury, that they are dying everywhere in the sun, for want of bread and through indolence, in the very streets. Rochester and Chichester are mere villages and offer nothing for which they should be called cities except their being bishops’ sees. Oxford scarcely, I do not say satiates, but keeps her clerks alive. Exeter feeds men and beasts with the same meal. In the depths of valleys, in an exceedingly dense atmosphere and amid sulphurous vapours, Bath is posited, yea deposited, at the gates of hell. But neither wilt thou select for thyself an abode in the northern cities, in Worcester, Chester, or in Hereford, on account of the Welsh, men prodigal of human life. York abounds with Scots, who are filthy and deceitful men, or something less than men. From its surrounding marshes, the Isle of Ely is one eternal stench. In Durham, Norwich, or in Lincoln thou wilt hear very few of the higher orders speaking Latin; of thine own condition, not a soul. At Bristol there is not a man who is not, or has not been, a soap-boiler: now a Frenchman loves soap-boilers as well as he does nightmen.[4] Out of the large towns, every market-town, vill, or petty town has rude and clownish inhabitants. Thou mayst, moreover, at all times consider the Cornishmen to be such as thou knowest our Flemings to be esteemed in France. In fine, the country generally is in the highest degree blessed with the dews of heaven and with richness of soil: there are, too, some good men in every place within it, but fewer by far in all together than in Winchester alone.

“That city is the Jerusalem of the Jews in those parts: within her precincts alone do they enjoy perpetual peace; she is the school of those who wish to live well and to thrive. There men are produced; there thou mayst have a sufficiency of bread and wine for nothing. In that place there are monks of such mercy and meekness, a clergy so wise and tolerant, citizens of such probity and so regardful of their fellows’ rights, women so beautiful and modest, that little withholds me from going thither, and, among such Christians, myself becoming a Christian. To that city do I direct thee, the city of cities, the mother of all and better than all. There is one vice, and only one, in which she is accustomed to over-indulge. Asking pardon of the men of letters and the Jews, I must say (that thou mayst be upon thy guard) that the Winchester people are addicted to lying, yet only in inventing idle tales; for in no place under heaven, as there, are so many false reports fabricated with so much facility; in all other matters they are perfectly veracious. I had yet much to tell thee of my own affairs; but lest thou shouldst not comprehend all, or shouldst forget, thou wilt place this small letter in the hands of a Jewish friend, as I feel confident that thou wilt one day be rewarded by him.” This was a brief note written in Hebrew. The Jew had finished his oration; and the lad, putting the best construction upon everything, arrived at Winchester.

His awl provided food enough for his companion and himself; and the cruel kindness and stuttering civility so evilly obtained him by the Jew’s letter procured him comforts. Wherever these poor creatures might work separately in the day, or take their meals, they each night rested on a little bed in the ancient cottage of an aged woman. Day succeeds day, month month, and the last hours of this our youth, whom we have thus far so curiously traced, hasten, by their very escape, their arrival. The day of the Adoration of the Cross[5] had arrived; and the boy, working upon that day at his master the Jew’s, in whatever manner he was made away with, disappeared. Now the next day was the Passover, the great festival of the Jews. His companion, wondering at his absence, as he did not return in the evening to his bed, is terrified that night by many hideous dreams. Having for several days sought him in every corner of the city without finding him, he at once asked the Jew if he had sent the lad, who was his means of support, anywhere; whom when he perceived to become, contrary to his wont, from the particularly mild man of yesterday, outrageously bitter,--noticing this change in his language and his countenance, he immediately took fire, and as he had a piercing voice, and was gifted with a wonderful flow of words, he instantly broke out into reproaches, with loud outcries charging him, with making away with his friend. “Thou offspring of a filthy harlot!” he exclaims, “thou thief! thou traitor! thou devil! thou hast crucified my companion! Woe is me! why have I not yet the strength of a man! I could tear thee in pieces with my hands.” The cries of the boy vociferating within the house are heard in the public street; from all sides Jews and Christians hastily assemble. The boy presses; and, now become more confident from the presence of the crowd, he began, having gained their attention, to plead the cause of his companion. “O men,” he says, “who have here assembled, see if there be grief like my grief. This Jew is a devil; he hath torn my heart from within my breast; he hath murdered my only companion, I even think he hath devoured him. A son of the Evil One, a certain Jew,--whether he be French-born I neither understand nor know,--but that Jew gave to my friend a letter, which was the warrant for his death, directed to this man. Thus induced,--yea, seduced,--he came to this city. He was often engaged in the service of this Jew, and in his house was he last seen.” The boy was not without a witness to some portion of his tale; inasmuch as there was a Christian woman, who, contrary to the Canons, had nursed the Jewish children in the same house. She swore positively that she had seen the lad go down into the Jew’s store-room, but never return. The Jew denies it; the matter is referred to the Judges. The accusers fail; the boy because he was under age, the woman because her ministry to the Jews had rendered her infamous. The Jew offered a purgation[6] of his conscience with respect to the infamy. Gold was acceptable to the judges: Phinees gave it and appeased them, and the stir ceased.

[1] Some of these worthless characters are mentioned in the lines of Horace:

“Ambubaiarum collegia, pharmacopolæ, Mendici, mimi, balatrones.”--Sat. lib. i. 2.

Others are to be found in Juvenal.

[2] The atrocious massacre above referred to, is related in the following impious and inhuman terms:--“On that same day of the coronation, about the solemn hour in which the Son was immolated to the Father, they began in the city of London to sacrifice the Jews to their father the devil; and so long was the duration of this famous mystery, that the holocaust could scarcely be completed on the second day. Other cities and towns in the country emulated the faith of the Londoners, and with equal devotion dispatched their bloodsuckers in their blood to the infernal regions. Somewhat, but not to such an extent, was at that time enacted against those children of perdition everywhere throughout the kingdom: Winchester alone spared her vermin,--a people prudent and forecasting, and a city at all times respecting her citizens’ rights.”--“Eodem coronationis die, circa illam sollemnitatis horam qua Filius immolabatur Patri, incœptum est in civitate Londoniæ immolare Judæos patri suo diabolo; tantaque fuit hujus celebris mora mysterii, ut vix altera die compleri potuerit holocaustum. Æmulatæ sunt aliæ civitates regionis et urbes fidem Londoniensium, et pari devotione suos sanguisugas cum sanguine transmiserunt ad inferos. Aliquid, sed inæqualiter, ea tempestate contra perditos paratum est ubique per regnum: sola tantum suis vermibus pepercit Wintonia, populus prudens et providus, ac civitas semper civiliter agens.”

[3] Thomas à Becket, who had been murdered a few years antecedently.

[4] Soap was first made in London in 1524; prior to which time it had been supplied by Bristol.

[5] Good Friday.

[6] It was the custom, where sufficient testimony could not be had, to allow the accused to clear himself from the charge by his oath: this was sailed purgation. The oath having been made, twelve persons, called compurgators, were produced on the prisoner’s behalf, who swore, that, from what they knew of his general character, they believed his oath. This was deemed satisfactory.

Table of the principal Abbreviations used in Records.

ā ã an, am.

ã. a. annus and its cases.

a^a aliqua.

a^m annum.

āte ante.

ãimus animus.

a^o anno.

a’ aũ autem.

ã a^t aut.

Abb͞s Abb͞i Abb͞ibʒ Abbas and its cases.

Abb͞a Abb͞e Abb͞am Abbatia and its cases.

Abb͞issa Abbatissa.

acc̃ente accidente.

ac^a acra.

ac^{a}m acram.

adm̉ciatꝰ am̉ciatꝰ admerciatus, amerciatus.

adm̉ciam̃tū am̉ciam̃tū admerciamentum, amerciamentum.

advõe advocate.

aĩa aĩe ãi aĩo anima, animæ, animi, animo.

aĩal animal.

aĩal̵ animalis.

aĩalia animalia.

aĩabus animabus.

a^{a}ꝝ aliarum, aliquarum.

a^{i}d aliquid.

al̵ alias, alius and its cases.

al̵r aliter.

al̵c^i alicui.

alic̃ꝰ alicujus.

aliq̃ aliqua, aliquæ.

aliq̵̃ aliquem.

aliq̵ aliquod, aliquid.

aliqđ aliquod, aliquid.

aliq^i aliqui.

aliq̵^i aliquid.

aliq^i{s} aliq^{i}d aliquis, aliquid.

aliq^ā aliq̵^ā aliquam.

abñia absentia.

ab́ne absolutione.

ã ap̃ ap̃d apud.

alt̉ alter.

alt̉a altera.

alt̉ut̉ alt̉utr̃ alteruter and its cases.

am̉als amerals (admirals).

am^o amodo.

ampliꝰ āpliꝰ amplius.

añ ante.

aña antea.

añq^ā antequam.

añc̃ antecessor and its cases.

añcessores antecessores.

añcessoribȝ antecessoribus.

añia animalia.

añq^ā antequam.

antiq^{i}tꝰ antiquitus.

adh̵ adhuc.

ag^r agitur.

apƿp^{i}ar̃ appropriare.

ap̃loꝝ apostolorum.

ap^{lici} apostolici.

āpliꝰ amplius.

app̃ne appellatione.

appõita apposita.

appõitꝰ appositus.

appōit^r apponitur.

aq̃ aqua and its cases.

aq^ā aq̵^ā aq^ām aquam.

aq^a aq̵^a aqua.

Arcħep̃c̃ Arcħep̃m Archiep̃s Archiep̃i Archiep̃o Archiep̃m Ar̃ep̃c̃ Ar̃ep̃s Archiepiscopus and its cases.

arcħep̃tꝰ archiepiscopatus.

aret^o aretro.

artic̃lꝰ articulus.

ar^{li} articuli.

ass̃u assensu.

auc̃te auctoritate.

aṽnc̃lo avunculo.

b̵ b̴ ber, bis, as lib̃tate libertate, Merleb̴ge Merleberge, nob̵ nobis, vob̴ vobis.

b̴ b’ b^te b̵te beatæ.

Bapt̃ Baptista and its cases.

b̴i b’ beati.

b̴m beatum.

bñ bene, bien.

b̴ns biens.

bñvołncia benevolentia.

bo. bonus and its cases.

br̃ breve and its cases.

br̃e br̃i breve, brevi.

br̃ia brevia.

c̉ cer, cre.

c̃ cum.

c^a carta.

c^ata carta.

ca^{ci} canonici.

c^aīo crastino.

canc̃ cancellarius and its cases.

cantav̉nt cantaverunt.

capiet^r capietur.

cap̃li capituli.

cap̃tłm capitulum.

c^a c̃a causa.

cãs causas.

cap^{us} capitaneus.

cari^{mo} carissimo.

cħ chere.

cħun chacun.

cħre chartre.

cħłr chevalier.

cħres chartres.

cestasf̴ cestassavoir.

c^i cui.

c^ilʒ cuiłt cuilibet.

c^ia cit^a citra.

cĩt^{as} civitas.

clc̃s clericus.

cłico clerico.

claud̴t claudet, claudit, claudunt.

claudʒ claudet.

cło clero.

c^{i}ʒ cuique.

c^icūq̧, cuicumque.

c̃ cõ contra.

cont^a contra.

ꝯt^a ꝯ^a ꝯ^{ta} contra.

cõa cõe cõam communa, communæ, communam.

cõe cõis commune, communis.

cõer comuner.

cõi ꝯ^i communi.

cõit̉ communiter.

cõia communia.

ꝯ^{a}io contrario.

cõ ꝯp̃ computate, computabitur, comparendum, &c.

ꝯp^obr̃ ꝯt^obr̃ ꝯ^abr̃e ꝯ^obr̃ia controbreve, contrabreve, controbrevia.

cołł collector and its cases.

ꝯpʒ comparet.

com̃ comes and its cases.

comp̃o compositio.

ꝯ^a ꝯ^o contrabreve, controbreve.

ꝯ^i communi.

ꝯ^ĩ ꝯi communi.

ꝯpełłe compellere.

ꝯp̃o compoto.

ꝯp̃m compotum.

ꝯput̃ computatio and its cases.

ꝯput̃ computabitur.

ꝯputabit^r computabitur.

ꝯp̃one computatione.

ꝯp̃one compositione.

ꝯsiđaco͠em considerationem.

ꝯsuet̃ consuetus and its cases.

ꝯsuet̃ consuetudo and its cases.

ꝯt^{a}cto contracto.

ꝯtent̃onis contentionis.

ꝯtig̃ contingo and its tenses.

ꝯt^u conventu.

ꝯvalủit convaluerit.

ꝯc̃ conc̃ concordia.

ꝯc̃ concessio and its cases.

ꝯc̃ concessum, &c.

ꝯfirmādā confirmandam.

cons̃ consilium.

conc̃ concessus and its cases.

con^{a}dco͠e contradictione.

con^{tu} ꝯ^{tu} contemptu, conventu.

con^{ble} constable.

con^a ꝯ^a concessa.

con^a contra.

concedimꝰ concedimus.

con^{su} consensu.

cōvēco͠e conventione.

coq^{i}ne coquine.

ꝯſ̴vet conservet.

ꝯs̃^l conseil.

cōſ̴ consilium.

c^r cur.

c^{r}a cura.

c^{r}ca circa.

cꝰ c̃jꝰ cujus.

cꝰłʒ cujuslibet.

cꝰtodier̃t cꝰtodiƪnt custodierunt, custodierint.

Đ De, Deus and Dominus and their cases.

Đs Deus.

Dꝰ Deus, Dominus.

Đi đi Dei.

đ d̴ de, der, denarius and its cases.

dꝰ dicimus.

dāpnū dampnum.

darr̃ darrain.

Dd̴ David.

dc̃a dicta.

dc̃s dictus.

dc̃o dicto.

dc̃i dicti.

dc̃m dictum.

dr̃ d̴r dicitur.

dĩna divina.

diñr dicuntur, dinoscuntur.

di^t d̴t dicit or dicunt.

dc̃nt dicunt.

dilõne diłone dilatione.

diłone dilectione.

di. dilectus and its cases.

dĩ dimidium.

đte dite.

dilc̃us dilectus.

dilc̃o dilecto.

đre dicere.

dic̃ dicit.

dic̃nt dicunt.

diebꝰ diebʒ diebus.

dilaco͠e dilat̃ōe dilatione.

dilc̃m dilectum.

dilc̃s dilectus.

dim̃ dimiđ dimidium and its cases.

dimiser̃t dimiserunt.

disp̃one dispositione.

diss̃ dissaisitus and its cases.

diss̃e dissaisinœ.

dist^icco͠e dist^ict̃ōe districtione.

đd̴ dedit.

decr̃ decretum.

deſ̴d̴ desusdite.

dʒ debet, det.

đd̴it dederit.

deb̴nt^r debentur.

deb̴ent debent.

deb̴t debet.

debʒ debet.

debủt debuerunt.

decet̉o decetero.

dec^em̃tū decrementum.

deñ denarius and its cases.

destruco͠e destructione.

det^im̃tum detrimentum.

det̉īat̃ōe determinatione.

dñs dñe dñi dño dñm dominus and its cases.

đniū dominium.

doł dolium.

don^c donec.

Dñica Dominica.

dñico dominico.

dñic̃s dominicus.

donat̃ōes donaco͠es donationes.

ducatꝰ ducatus.

durat^ram duraturam.

ẽ e̚ [#] [#] est.

eꝰ ejus.

e^a ecclesia.

e^ā ecclesiam.

ead̴ eadem.

ec̃ eciam.

ecc̃a ecclesia.

eccłiam ecclesiam.

eccłiaꝝ eccłar̃ ecclesiarum.

eccłias ecclesias.

eccłie ecclesiæ.

e̚e esse.

e̚et esset.

e̚ēt essent.

effc̃s effc̃u effectus, effectu.

eid̴ eidem.

eisđ eisd̴m eisdem.

eꝰd̴ ejꝰd̴ ejusdem.

eła ełīa elemosina.

ełariꝰ elemosinarius.

ẽm eum, sometimes enim.

ep̃c̃ ep̃s ep̃i ep̃o ep̃oꝝ ep̃m episcopus and its cases.

eq̃ū equum.

eq^{a}łr equaliter.

eođ eodem.

eoꝝđ eorumdem.

er̃ er̃t erit, erunt.

esp̃ale especiale.

escr̃ escript.

ex^a ext^a extra.

exāīat̃ examinatus and its cases.

exc̉cit̃ ex̉cit̃ excercitus and its cases.

excõĩa excommunicata.

excõĩcamꝰ excommunicamus.

ex^o exemplo, excepto.

exp̃ns̃ expensis.

f. f̴m festum.

f. f. fieri fecimus.

fac̃ faciendo.

faci^d’ faciendum.

fac̉e facere.

fc̃s fc̃a fc̃o fc̃m factus and its cases.

far^a farina.

feĩa feĩe feĩas femina and its cases.

feođ feodum and its cases.

feodałr feodalit̉ feodaliter.

feud̴ feudum and its cases.

f̴i fĩa f^{i}a figura, feria.

f̴i fieri.

fidłr fidelit̉ fideliter.

fił f̴s filiꝰ filius.

fir^t’ firmiter.

fiłm filium.

fła fłas falsa, falsas.

f̴o festo, filio.

for̃ forum.

for̃ forisfactum, &c.

for^a forma, foresta.

fr̃ fr̃ is fr̃ es fr̃ e fr̃ em fr̃ m frater and its cases.

fr̃ e facere and fratre, frere.

fr̃ m frumentum.

fr̃ e ferre.

f̴te faite.

fủnt fủūt fuerint, fuerunt.

fut^{r}i futuri.

g^a erga.

g^{a}ce grace.

garr̃ garrant.

g^{a}t̃m gratum.

g^{a}vam̃ gravamen.

g^{a}t̃nt̉ gratanter.

g^{a}vit̉ graviter.

g^i igitur.

gła gloria.

głiosꝰ gloriosus.

g̃nƪa genera.

g̃ƪal general.

g̃nƪałr g̃nƪalit̉ generaliter.

g̃nƪe genere.

g^o ergo.

gr̃a gr̃m gr̃as grat̃ gratia and its cases.

grat̃ gratus and its cases.

H. ħ hic, hæc, hoc.

h^a hac.

habuer̃t habủnt habủūt habuerit, habuerint, habuerunt.

habuimꝰ habuimus.

harño harnesio.

ħat ħāt habeat, habeant.

h^c huic, huc, hic, hinc.

h^{c}ꝰq̹̹ hucusque.

ħc hunc.

ħeat ħeāt habeat, habeant.

ħeb̴t habebit, habebunt.

ħebunt habebunt.

ħedes hœredes.

ħedit̃ ħeditar̃ hœreditarius and its cases.

ħedit̃ hœreditas and its cases.

ħedū hœredum.

ħeđ hœredes, habendum.

ħenđ habendum, &c.

ħeo habeo.

herb̴gag̃ herbergagium and its cases.

ħes hœres, habes.

ħet habet.

ħet^r habetur.

h^i hic.

ħꝰi hujusmodi.

ħit̃ habitus and its cases.

ħitu habitu.

ħjꝰm^{o}i hujusmodi.

ħmõi hujusmodi.

h. l. n. f. ſ. p. has litteras nostras fieri fecimus patentes.

ħ^nibʒ hominibus.

Hñr̃ H’nr̃ Henricus and its cases.

ħnt habent.

ħniū ħniis hominium, hominiis.

ho. homo and its cases.

hoĩm hōiū hom̃ hominum.

hōiagiū hominagium.

hõibʒ hominibus.

hōies homines.

homag̃ homagium and its cases.

hr̃e ħre ħere habere.

hr̃i ħri haberi.

hr̃nt habuerunt.

ħt habet, habent.

ħuit ħuisti habuit, habuisti.

ħủit habuerit.

ħuisse habuisse.

ħuer̃t habuerit, habuerint.

ħủnt habuerint, habuerunt.

ħujꝰ hujusmodi.

hujꝰ hujus.

hujꝰeõi hujuscemodi.

hujꝰm^oi hujusmodi.

hundr̃ hūdr̃ hundredum and its cases.

hundr̃is hundredis.

ħʒ ħt habet.

ħꝰ hujus, hujusmodi.

ī in.

i^a infra, ita, illa.

ib̴ ib̴m ibidem.

ibiđm ibidem.

īc^{r}rat incurrat.

id̴ idem, illud, ideo.

idc^{i}co idcirco.

iđm idem.

ig^r igitur.

ij^b’ duobus.

ijꝰte injuste.

iłł ille and its cases.

im̄e^{te} immediate.

imp̴p̃m īp̴p̃m imperpetuum.

illiꝰ illius.

iłłd illud.

iñ inde.

inc^{r}rat incurrat.

inf^a īf^a infra.

inf̴ꝰ īf̴iꝰ inferius.

injꝰte ījꝰte injuste.

insp̃r insup̴ īsp̃r insuper.

int^r intratur.

int̉ it̉ inter.

integ^e īteg^e integre.

ĩo iđo ideo.

ip̃a ipsa.

ip̃e ipse.

ip̃m ipsum.

ip̃o ipso.

ip̃os ipsos.

ip̃ius ip̃ꝰ ip̃iꝰ ipsius.

ip̃am ipsam.

ip̃as ipsas.

ip̃oꝝ ipsorum.

ir^r irrotulatur.

it̃ i^a ita.

it̉ iter.

it̃ iterum.

īt^a intra.

īt̉ inter.

i^{te} iste.

īt̉dc̃m interdictum.

īt̉e̚e interesse.

it̃m ĩm it̃ item.

it̉m iterum.

īt̉m īt̉ī interim.

it^r itur.

ītr̃v̉t intrav̉īt intraverunt, intraverint.

j^a. prima.

j^ā jam.

jamdc̃os jamdictos.

j^o. primo.

j^o.q̹^o unoquoque.

jo^r jour.

j^rat̃ jurat̃ juratores and its cases.

jũe jure.

jꝰ j^re j^ra j^ribʒ j^ribꝰ jus, jure, jura, juribus.

jura^{ta} juramenta.

jusq̃s jusques.

jꝰtic̃ justicia.

jꝰticia justicia.

jux^a juxta.

kł kalendœ, kalendas, &c.

km̃e charissime.

km̃o k̴mo charissimo.

ł vel.

ł. łi. łj. libra and its cases, libratas, &c.

lat^{o}ñium latrocinium.

lẽi legitimi.

l’erc̃ l’ercevesque.

lĩ liberas, libratas.

łia licentia.

lib̴at̃ liberatio and its cases.

lib̴c̃ones liberationes.

lib^{a}t̃ librata and its cases.

lib̴tat̃ libertates, &c.

lib̴nt̉ libenter.

lib̴nt^r liberentur, liberantur.

lic̃ liña liñia licentia.

liq̹ liquet.

lo. locus and its cases.

lo^r lour.

loq̃la loquela.

łr libenter.

łra littera.

łras litteras.

łre lr̃e lettre, litteræ.

łris litteris.

łtt̃me łme legitime.

łʒ libet and licet.

m̉ mer.

m̃ m. m^a. marca and its cases.

m̃a mea.

magñ magnus and its cases.

mag̃r magister.

mag̃ri magistri.

mag̃rissa magistrissa.

mag̃ros magistros.

mag̃roꝝ magistrorum.

magr̃m magistrum.

mag̃t̉iū magisterium.

mãm materiam.

mat^a materia.

mat̉ m^at̉ mater.

mat^imōio matrimonio.

m^ax^a maxima.

m̃am meam.

m̃br̃m membrum.

m̃broꝝ membrorum.

m̉cħ marchia and its cases.

m̃di mundi.

Mẽ M’e Marie.

me. memorie.

me^d’ memorandum.

med^{te} medietate.

međtas medietas.

mem̃ mem^d memoꝝ memorandum.

mẽf̴ mensis.

m^i mihi, mei.

mĩa misericordia, miseria.

mĩe misericordiæ.

mił miles and its cases.

mĩo matrimonio.

m̃is meis.

mĩis misericordiis.

mis̉c̃dia misericordia.

m^l. mille.

młr mulier.

młr̃s mulieres.

młm multum.

m̃ltipłr multipliciter.

m̃lt̃m multum.

m^o mod̴ modo.

mo^r monemur, movemur, &c.

m̃ltões multoties.

mołnđ molendinum and its cases.

mo^r moratur.

m̃os meos.

mr̃ mater, magister, martyr.

mr̃e matre.

mr̃is matris, martyris.

mr̃i matri.

n. enim.

ñ. n. nostri.

ñ enim, non.

ñ ne.

n^a nota.

n^c nec, nunc.

nc̃ce necesse.

nc̃ nunc.

nec̃c̃ia nec̃ria necessaria.

neg̃m negotium.

neg̃o negotio.

neq̹ neque.

neq^{a}q^a nequaquam.

ñd̴ ñdū nondum.

n^cñ necnon.

n^i nisi, nemini.

nicħ nicħl nihil.

ñīatim nominatim.

n^{i}l nihil.

nim^{i}ū nimirum.

n^l nihil.

nłła nulla.

nłłm nullum.

nłłs nullus.

n^{l}oꝰ nihilominus.

ñm nūƪum numerum.

nob̴ nobʒ nobis.

nob̴c̃ nobʒc̃ nobiscum.

no^c’ nocumentum.

nocum̃tū nocumentum.

nōīa nomina.

nōīatī nominatim.

nōīe nomine.

nōīum nominum.

nost̉ noster.

nost^is nostris.

ño nũo numero.

noꝰ nous.

nr̃ ñr noster.

nov̉it noverit.

novit̉ noviter.

nr̃a nostra.

nr̃e nôtre.

nr̃i nostri.

nr̃is nostris.

nr̃o nostro.

nr̃os nostros.

nr̃am nostram.

nr̃m nostrum.

nr̃oꝝ nostrorum.

num̉at^r numeratur.

nunq^ā nunquam.

nūq̹^m nunquam.

nũs numerus.

nʒ neque.

õ ob̴ obolus and its cases.

ob̴ obiit.

obẽia obedientia.

obier̃t obierint, obierunt.

obed̴ie obedientie.

obłonibʒ oblationibus.

occ̃o occasio.

occo͠e occ̃one oc̃one occasione.

occo͠ibʒ occo͠ibus occasionibus.

õe omne.

ões omnes.

õia omnia.

õibʒ õibꝰ omnibus.

oĩm õium omnium.

oĩo om̄īo omnino.

om̃ omnis and its cases.

om̄i omni.

om̃s ões omnis, omnes.

oĩode omnimode.

ōnino ōīno omnino.

op̴at̃ōibʒ op̴acõibʒ operationibus.

opꝰ op̴a opus, opera.

opp^a opportuna.

oppoĩa opposita.

op̴^t oportet.

õs omnis, omnes.

ov̉tem̃t overtement.

p. patentes.

p̴ per, par, por.

p̴ pro.

p̉ pre, præ.

p̉ præcipimus, præsenti.

p^i pri.

p^a prima.

p̴^a persona.

p̴^{a}łr p̴so^t’ personaliter.

p^a pagina.

p^a publica.

pat̉ pater.

p^{a}ti prati.

p̴bʒ præbet.

p̉b̴nđ præbenda, &c.

pc̃c̃i peccati.

p^{ca} publica.

p̉cipimꝰ præcipimus.

p̴cħ prochain.

p̴c̃ssꝰ processus.

p̉đ p̉dict̃ prædictus and its cases.

p̉dc̃a prædicta.

p̉dc̃as prædictas.

p̉dc̃m prædictum.

p̉dc̃o prædicto.

p̉dc̃os prædictos.

p̉dc̃i prædicti.

p̉dc̃oꝝ prædictorum.

p̴ãlate perambulatæ.

p̴e pere.

p̴ent̉e parentre.

p̴ē parem.

p̉fat̃ p̉fata p̉fat̃m p̉fatꝰ prœfatus, &c.

p̴ħre prohibere.

p̴hendinav̉nt perhendinaverunt.

p^{i}m̉e primere (première).

p^{i}ve prive.

p^{i}e prie.

p^{i}sa prisa.

p^{i}ꝰ p^{i}us prius, primus.

p̴^{i}a propria.

p̴iñ proinde.

p̴^{i}o proprio.

p̉juđ prejudicial.

pła plura.

plac̃ placitum and its cases.

p̴lem̃t parlement.

płma plurima.

płes plures.

płia placita.

płg̃ plegiagium and its cases.

płim plurimum.

płit̃ placitum and its cases.

p̴mutat̃o permutatio.

pñt possint and possunt.

p̃n^c’ presentia and its cases.

p̃nt present.

p̃ns prœsens.

p̃nt̃ prœsentem, prœsentes, prœsentibus, &c.

p̉nōīato prœnominato.

p̴p^{i}o proprio.

p̴p̴ p̴p̃ p̴pt̉ propter.

p̃ p̃ p^ap Pp^a papa.

pp̃li populi.

pp̃o populo.

p̴p^{i}a propria.

p̴porco͠e p̴porco͠is proportione, proportionis.

p^o primo.

po. posito.

posſ̴^{em} possessionem.

p^{o}ea postea.

p^r pour, pur.

p^{r}veio^{r}s purveiours.

pr̃ pater.

pr̃i patri.

pr̃is patris.

pr̃iam patriam.

pr̃onatꝰ patronatus.

p̃r presbiter.

p̴sōe persone.

p̃state p̃ꝰtate potest^e potestate.

p̉sb̴r presbiter.

p̉sc^{i}pt̃ præscriptus and its cases.

p̉sentes præsentes.

p̴s p̴te pars, parte.

p̉t̉it̃ preteritus and its cases.

p^t post, potest.

p̉t̉ præter.

p̴tiñ p̴tinenc̃ pertinentiis.

p̴tiñ p̴tinentibʒ p̴tinent̃ pertinentibus.

p̴tinētes pertinentes.

pu^{ce} publice.

puisf̴ puissant.

p̴x^o p̴x^a proximo, proxima.

pꝰ pꝰt post.

pꝰm̃ pꝰtmođ postmodum.

pʒ p^t patet, potest.

Q2 q2 quia, quòd.

q̹ que, quia, quòd.

q̃ qui, quæ.

q̴ quod, quòd.

q̴̃ quem, quos.

q^a q̴^a qua, quadrans.

q^ā q̴^ā quam.

q^{a}nt quant.

q^{a}łrcūq̹ qualitercumque.

q̃a quia.

q^{a}rt̉ quarter.

q^{a}cūq̹ quacumque.

q^{a}r̃ quare, quarum.

q^{a}ꝝ quarum.

q^{a}i quasi.

q^{a}s quas.

q^{a}libʒ qualibet.

q^{a}p̴pt̉ quapropter.

q^{a}tenꝰ quatenus.

qđđm quoddam.

qđlʒ quodlibet.

qđ quid, quod

q^{i}s quis.

q^{i}łʒ quilibet.

q^{i}bʒ quibus.

q^{i}bʒcūq̹ quibuscumque.

q^{i}cūq̹ quicunque.

q^{i}cq^id quicquid.

q^i q^{i}a quia.

q^{i}d quid.

q^{i}eta quieta.

q^{i}etū quietum.

q^inq̹ q^i’q̹ quinque.

q^{i}sq^am quisquam.

qm̃ quoniam, quem, quomodo.

q̃le q^{a}le quale.

q^{a}t̉xx. q^{a}t̉xx^{ti}. quater viginti.

qñ quando, quoniam.

q^o quo.

q^{o}s quos.

q^{o}m^o quomodo.

q^{o}m^{o}łʒ quomodolibet.

q^{o}nđ quondam.

q^{o}q̹ quoque.

q^{o}ꝝ quorum.

q̹^o quoque.

q^{o}łʒ quolibet.

qñc̃q̹ quandocumque.

qr̃ quare.

q̃ratis queratis.

q̃relar̃ q̃r̃laꝝ querelarum.

q̃rƪe quærere.

q’q̹ quodque, quiconque.

quar̃ quare.

quereł querela and its cases.

qũx queux.

℞ Rex and its cases.

r. r̃. r̃ regni, regno, &c.

rece^r recevoir.

reclamaco͠e reclamat̃ōe reclamatione.

reg̃ł regula and its cases.

reg̃lães regulares.

relq̃ reliqua.

reliq̃ reliqui, reliqua, &c.

relīq^i relinqui.

reliq^i reliqui.

req^{i}sitꝰ requisitus.

rep̴aco͠e reparatione.

respc̃s respectus.

respc̃u resp̃u respectu.

resp̃m respectum.

rem̃ remanet.

re^{tam} receptam.

rev̉^mꝰ reverendissimus.

ret^o retro.

rña regina.

rñdʒ respondet.

r̃ndeat^r respondeatur.

r̃nsio responsio.

rñsum responsum.

rñs^{r}us responsurus.

r^o responsio.

rõe rõne r̃one ratione.

rõi rationi.

ro^{lo} rotulo.

rõnabilt̉ rõabiłr rationabiliter.

roy^{me} royaume.

r̃ociniū rõniū ratiocinium.

rõnio ratiocinio.

r̃r̃ reꝝ rerum.

r̃spc̃u respectu.

S’ S. Sanctus and its cases.

.s. scilicet.

s. sunt.

s̃. solidus and its cases.

ſ̴ salutem.

ſ̴ ſ̴^r seigneur.

s^a secunda, summa, supra.

s^{a}dc̃m supradictum.

sał sałm sałt̃ sałt̃m salutem.

sacr̃m sac^am̃tū sacramentum.

Sb̴b̴i Sabbati.

s̃b sub.

s̃btꝰ subtus.

sb̴nia substantia.

Sc̃s Sanctus.

Sc̃i Sancti.

Sc̃is Sanctis.

Sc̃os Sanctos.

Sc̃a Sancta.

sc̃đm secundum.

sciłt scilicet.

sc^{a}c̃io scaccario.

s^c sic.

sc̃de seconde, secundæ.

s^c’ sic^t sicut.

sc̃lari seculari.

scłʒ scilicet.

sc̃laribʒ sec̃laribʒ secularibus.

ſ̴dit susdit.

ſ̴em̃t serement.

sen^{al} seneschal.

seqũ sequens and its cases.

sem^l semel.

seq^r sequitur.

sec^{r}ū securum.

sepedc̃i sæpedicti.

seq̃ns sequens.

sib̴n sibien.

sig̃ sigillum and its cases.

sic̃ sicut.

sĩlit̉ similiter.

sing̃la singula.

sĩ sive.

s^i sibi.

siłt̃r similiter.

signĩcas significas.

sig^{a}sti significasti.

sigłs sigł singulus and its cases.

siłr siłt̃r similiter.

sing̃lis singulis.

sir̃ schira and its cases.

słʒ scilicet.

ſ̴^m secundum.

s̃mpłr simpliciter.

sm^a summa.

sñ sine.

sñia sententia.

solʒ solet.

s^o secundo.

s^o seriò, serò.

soł solidus and its cases.

sp̃ale speciale.

spłr specialiter.

sp̃s spiritus.

sp̃alis specialis, spiritualis.

sp̃ualia spiritualia.

ſ̴ra sera.

s̃r super, sur.

subs̃ subsidium and its cases.

sup̴ super.

suffiſ̴ suffisant.

ſ̴^{r}ie seignurie.

s̃s suus, suos, suas, suis.

St̃e Sainte.

s^t s̃t sunt.

sub̴a substantia.

sup^a supra.

sup̴iꝰ superius.

ſ̴vic̃ servicia.

sṽ sive.

sʒ set for sed.

slʒ scilicet.

T. teste, testibus.

T’ terminus and its cases.

TT. tituli or titulo.

t. t̃. t̃ teste, testibus.

t̉ ter.

tał talis, &c. taliter.

tałr taliter.

t^{a}nsgr̃ transgressio.

t^{a}diđunt tradiderunt.

t^{a}dider̃t tradiderit, tradiderint, tradiderunt.

tam̃ tamen.

tāq^ā tanquam.

t^c t̃c tūc tunc.

temp̃re tempore.

tēp̴ibʒ temporibus.

tec̃ tecum.

testīo^m testimonium.

test̃o testamento.

teñ tenementum and its cases.

teñʒ tenements.

ten^t tenet.

tenđ tenendum.

teñdas tenendas.

thes̃ thesaurarius.

tħr̃m thesaurum.

t^{e}s tres.

t^{i}a tria.

t^i tibi.

t̉īo termino.

t^{i}bus tribus.

t̃m tantum.

t̉^m t̉ĩm terminum.

t̃m^o t̃mm^o tantummodo.

t̃mdē tantundem.

T’m̃ terminus and its cases.

T’miñ terminus and its cases.

t̃mp̴alia temporalia.

t̃mp̴alibʒ temporalibus.

t̃mp̴e tp̃re tempore.

t̃n tñ tamen, tantum.

tot̃ totus and its cases.

t̃p̴e tempore.

tp̃re tempore.

t̃p̴ibʒ temporibus.

to^l totalis.

toucħ touchant.

t̉r̃ t̉ra t̉re t̉rā t̉ram t̉rar̃ t̉raꝝ terra and its cases.

t^{r}r̃ turris and its cases.

t^{r}i turri.

t^{r}ī turrim.

t̉sb̴n tresbien.

tʒ tenet.

u. ut.

ub̴e u^i ubi.

u^{i}c̃q̹ ubicumque.

ult̃ ultimus and its cases.

ult̉iꝰ ulterius.

uñ unde.

uñc̃q̹ undecumque.

unct̃ōem unctionem.

uniꝰ unius.

unic^iʒ unicuique.

ūq^ā unquam.

ut^{i}usq̹ utriusque.

ut̃r uter, utrum.

ut̃rq̹ uterque and its cases.

utꝰq̹ utriusque.

ux̃ uxor.

ux̃e uxore.

ux̃is ux̉is uxoris.

v. vel.

ṽꝰ versus.

vac̃ vacatio and its cases.

vađ vadia.

vałat valeat.

valʒ valet.

v̉ba verba.

vałet valeret.

venaco͠e venatione.

v^i vir.

vī vim.

vic̃ vicec̃ vicecomes and its cases.

v^{i}i viri.

vidʒ viʒ videlicet.

viłł villa and its cases.

viłr viriliter.

v^{i}oꝝ virorum.

virg̃is virginis.

ṽl v^l vel.

v^o vero.

v^{o}. quinto.

voꝰ vous.

v^q’. quinque.

v^r videtur.

vr̃ vester.

vr̃a vestra.

vr̃e vestræ.

vr̃i vestri.

vr̃o vestro.

vr̃m vestrum.

vʒ v^iʒ videlicet.

v̉ſ̴ versus.

w^t with.

x. decem.

x^a decima.

X^c Xc Xs̃ Xs Xp̃c Xp̃s Christus.

xl^a. quadragesima.

Xp̃i Christi.

Xp̃o Christo.

Xp̃iani Christiani.

xv^{me} quinzisme.

zo^r your.

REFERENCES.

There are various references used for notes, according to the fancy of the author, or the master printer; where they are not numerous in a page, the common references are generally used, in this order-- *, †, ‡, §, ‖, ¶, and where there are more than six notes in a page, two of each reference are put to a note; but this is looked upon as having an unsightly appearance.

Italick lower case letters are sometimes used, enclosed between parentheses (a), and sometimes figures (1); the letters, when they are used, are often continued through the alphabet, and then commence again with (a).

The most usual references, and which are esteemed the neatest, are superiors, both letters and figures; where the notes are at the foot of the page, letters are most frequently used, sometimes going through the alphabet, and sometimes commencing with ^a in each page in which notes occur: where the notes are placed at the end of the volume, figures ^{1 2} are nearly always adopted, in regular succession.

REGISTER.

This term implies such an arrangement of the whites in both forms of a sheet, as that, when printed off, the pages shall fall precisely at the back of each other, so that the sides and heads of the pages of one form shall not project beyond those of the other; in fine work the principle is carried still further, and the whites in the pages are so arranged that line shall fall upon line, when the reiteration is worked. See GAUGE. SPACE LINES.

REGISTER SHEET.

The sheet or sheets printed to make register with.--M. When works are printed on fine and expensive paper, register is usually made with proof paper; and it is not till the form is completely made ready that they use its own paper.

REGLET.

Is a sort of furniture of an equal thickness all its length. It is quadrat high, of several thicknesses, viz. Nonpareil, Brevier, Long Primer, Pica, &c. thick.--M.

Reglet and all other furniture, except side and foot sticks, are made in lengths of three feet each, and are always styled a yard of reglet, a yard of broad, &c.; the use of reglet is to branch out titles, jobs, and other matter, to economise the use of quadrats: it is preferable to quadrats for this purpose, it keeping the lines more even; for different founts of the same size being often mixed, and the quadrats frequently battered, are not so true as a piece of reglet, which I would always have put next to a line of capitals; it is also used in making margin.

The thinnest reglet used is called card reglet, a substitute for scale-board; the regular sizes commence with Pearl and go up to Two Lines Great Primer, with the exception of Ruby, Minion, Bourgeois, Small Pica, English, Paragon, and Two Lines Pica, which are sizes not used.

REITERATION.

The second form, or the form printed on the backside of the white paper.--M. This is a term generally used for press work; when the second form is working, that is, perfecting the sheet, the pressmen say they are working the reiteration.

REVIEWS. See Newspaper Postage.

REVISE.

An impression of each form printed on proof paper the first thing after it is laid on, and taken by the pressman to the reader or overseer, for him to examine that all the corrections in the press proof are made, previously to the impression being worked off. The compositor frequently takes the revise for waste paper; but this should never be done with that of the first form; the pressman should put it into the heap, so that it may be readily found, which keeps it damp, and the revise of the second form ought always to be pulled on it; the reader, in revising the second form, then sees the sheet perfect, which is necessary to ascertain that the matter follows, and that the furniture is right.

RIBS.

In wooden presses, long pieces of steel, polished on the upper surface, which is a little rounded, on which the carriage traverses in being run in and run out; they are fastened down upon long pieces of wood, which are called Wooden Ribs.

RIDES.

Leads are said to ride, when one end projects over another; this will occasionally take place when two or more are used in the same measure. It ought to be guarded against, as, when it happens, it prevents the page rising, or if by tightening the quoins the form is made to rise, it causes the lines to be crooked.

RINSE THE FORM.

Laying up the form, and washing the lye and ink away to make the letter clean.--M. This is always done by the pressman as soon as a form is off; he takes it to the lye trough, and brushes the ink from off the face of the letter, the furniture, and chase, with the lye brush and lye; he then lifts it out of the trough and sets it on its edge, resting against the side of the trough or against some other support, and rinses it well with water, to wash away the lye and the ink it has dissolved, and thus leaves the face of the letter, the furniture, and the chase clean, ready for the compositor to lay up preparatory to distributing.--See LAY UP.

RINSING TROUGH.

The trough forms are rinsed in.--M. It is two troughs combined in one; the smallest and deepest is for the water, and in some offices has an iron ladle chained to the near upper corner, to prevent its being displaced; the shallow part is used to lay up forms in; they are both lined with lead, and the shallow one has a loose deal bottom to preserve the lead, and in general is bound with iron, particularly at the front, to prevent the edge of a chase, when being lifted upon the letter board, from cutting the lead; they both have an opening with a short pipe at the bottom to convey away the water; that in the water trough having a brass plug in it, for the convenience of letting the water off to clean it out. They stand on a frame, which is usually placed in a platform raised at the edges a few inches, lined with lead, styled the sink, with a loose bottom of boards, which leads into a pipe for drainage.

RISE.

A form is said to rise, when in rearing it off the correcting stone no letter or furniture, &c. stay behind.--M. When every thing is properly justified, and the form properly quoined and locked up, so that nothing falls out in lifting it up.

RISERS.

The material upon which stereotype plates are fixed, in order to be printed.

These risers are sometimes made of wood, with the plates screwed, or otherwise fastened upon them; sometimes of brass, bell metal, gun metal, or type metal; and occasionally of gypsum, or Roman cement: but, of whatever substance they may be formed, the riser and the plate together should be of the same height as types.

Mr. James Fergusson took out a patent for risers made of elastic substances, of which he published the following description, or specification:--“Now know ye, that I the said James Fergusson, in compliance with the said Proviso, do hereby declare, that the nature of my said Invention, and the manner in which the same is to be performed, are particularly described and ascertained by the following explanation thereof, that is to say: In the process of printing from Stereotype Plates, the plates are put upon, and fastened to, certain materials or apparatus, called by different names, such as blocks, matrix-plates, risers, &c., which are made either of iron, brass, type-metal, bell-metal, Roman cement, gypsum, wood of various kinds, or some other suitable substance; or, without using any such materials or apparatus, the plates are, or may be, put upon, and fastened to, the coffins or tables of such printing presses as are in general use, or upon cylindrical or any other sort of printing machines. In all cases, however, of printing from Stereotype Plates, it is necessary to apply some remedy to the unequal thickness of the plates; and the operation usually adopted is that of putting layers or pieces of paper, or other material, under the thinner places of the plates, or over the same, upon the tympan, which operation is technically termed underlaying and overlaying. Now, the nature or object of my Invention is that of saving the time and expence unavoidably sacrificed in the operation of underlaying and overlaying; and this object I accomplish by putting elastic substances under the Stereotype Plates, whereby the printed impressions from them are immediately equalized wholly or in part; for the elastic substances yield to the pressure upon the thicker parts of the plates, and at the same time afford the necessary resistance for obtaining sufficient strength of impressions from the thinner parts. It must be evident, that the elastic substances are to be interposed between the Stereotype Plates and whatever solid or firm substance may be made use of, whether blocks, matrix-plates, risers, cylinders, printing presses, printing machines, or any other apparatus whatsoever. So far as I have made experiments and trials of different elastic substances, I have hitherto found Cork to be the best calculated for the purposes of my Invention; but, in virtue of the Letters Patent granted unto me, I claim the exclusive right and privilege of applying Cork, and any other elastic substance, to all kinds of printing apparatus and machines, with the view of remedying the inequalities in the thickness of Stereotype Plates; and I also claim the sole right and privilege of manufacturing the elastic articles requisite for the attainment of this object, of vending such articles, and of granting Licenses for the use of the same. In further explanation of the manner in which my Invention is to be performed, it may be proper to state, that the Cork is prepared by cutting, sawing, rasping, and filing; and by these means it is wrought to such a uniform thickness as is required. I consider a quarter of an inch as a proper thickness, but a lesser or a greater may be adopted. If, when a determinate thickness has been fixed upon, the Cork is to be applied to some apparatus now in use, that apparatus should of course be diminished as much as is the thickness of the Cork, in order that the same height to paper may be preserved. The layers or beds of Cork may be formed either of single pieces, cut to the respective sizes of pages, or made up by several slips, whereby they may be adjusted to various widths and lengths. Whether the Cork be laid loose upon the blocks, &c., or be attached by soft pitch, shoemakers’ wax, or other adhesive substance, is unimportant; but I prefer attaching it, so as to keep it in its place. Although my Invention essentially consists in discovering the applicability of Elastic Substances for the purpose of remedying inequalities in the thickness of Stereotype Plates, yet, in this Specification, I have necessarily given my explanations by particularising Cork, that being the material which I now manufacture and prefer. How to adapt any other elastic substance, which may answer the purpose equally well as Cork, cannot be a matter of doubt or difficulty to any person practically acquainted with apparatus used in Stereotype Press-work.----In witness whereof, &c.”

Mr. T. C. Hansard took out a patent for improvements on, and additions to, Printing Presses, and various processes relative to Printing; these improvements included “Stereotype-Plate Risers, with Holdfasts or Claws,” of which Mr. Hansard published the following description:--“The Risers are made of Type Metal, or with any other metal or substance, cast in a Type-founder’s mould, having somewhat the form of what are called Quotations. I take the usual standard for Printer’s ad-measurement, and cast them quadrilateral to four Pica m’s; then longer ones as parallelograms, four by eight, four by twelve, four by sixteen, and smaller ones, four by two, four by one, and four by a half; in height they are about three-fourths of an inch, or sufficient to raise the Plate to the usual height, or somewhat higher than common Type; these being cast and dressed perfectly true, in body and height, may be easily combined to form the size of any page necessary, with the certainty of having a uniform plain surface for all the plates, however numerous; they are cast as hollow cubes, the larger combinations having divisions to give sufficient support to every square against any pressure which can be brought upon them.

“The Holdfasts or Claws are formed of Brass or other hard metal, accurately adjusted in thickness to a Brevier, or any other body chosen, with a projecting Bevil at the top. They may be of various lengths, as to 4, 8, 16, 24, or more or less, Pica m’s, the elongated parts of the larger ones being to the height of ordinary Reglet, having the Holdfast or Claw in the centre, or towards each end. They may be opened, or pierced, as well to make them lighter, as to cause them, by pressing and indenting into the furniture of the forme, to be less liable to be drawn out: the height of the Claw is about seven-eighths of an inch, or sufficient for the projecting bevil of about one-eighth of an inch to lay upon the flanch of the plate when resting on the Risers. To prepare plates for working, form with the Risers the requisite number of pages for the forme or sheet to the nearest size they may make by the various combinations, and add any difference wanting by reglet, leads, or scale-board; then lay on the Plates, and place at the head, foot, and sides of each plate as many Holdfasts as may, from the size of the plate, be deemed sufficient for proper fastening; thus for small pages, as in Octadecimos and Duodecimos, one at each side and end will be sufficient; for larger pages two or more may be thought necessary; making up the parts which they may be deficient of the length and breadth of the pages with quadrats or reglet of the same body; then proceed to make margin, or dress the formes, and lock-up in the usual mode. To change the Plates; when worked, unlock the forme, draw out the Holdfast at the head or foot of the plate, slide off the done-with plate, replace by the new one; lock up again; and if the Plates have all been cast true to one gauge in thickness, width, and length, you will have throughout the whole work exact and uniform register, and equal impression;--when the Work is completed, the same material of Risers and Holdfasts, by admitting every combination of size, will form into any other sized pages for any other sized plates.”

ROBBERY. See STOLEN PROPERTY.

ROLL UP BALL LEATHERS.

When the pressman leaves work at noon he draws half the nails out of the balls, and takes the wool out; then doubles the loose half of the leather over the remaining nailed-on half, with the inky sides of each half next each other, and rolls up the leathers close, and lays them in a bowl or pan of water to soak till he has dined--M. This plan is entirely discontinued; the ball nails now are never drawn nor the covering taken off till it is worn out, owing to the different composition of the ink.

ROLLER.

A cylinder coated with composition, fixed in an iron frame, and revolving upon an iron rod running through it, with which to ink the forms, preparatory to taking an impression.

The roller has almost entirely superseded the use of balls in printing; and, since the introduction of composition, I may venture to say it has completely superseded the use of pelts for balls. See PELTS.

The use of the roller is less laborious to the pressman than balls; and for common work, and indeed all work where weak ink is used, it coats the surface of the types, &c. more uniformly, perhaps, than balls; but for fine work, where strong ink must be used, and really fine work cannot be produced without strong ink, the roller is decidedly inferior to the ball, partly owing to the difficulty of taking ink and distributing it on the inking table; and partly owing to the inferiority of rolling to beating with balls, in coating the surface of the types with strong ink.

The introduction of composition in lieu of pelts has been the cause of a complete change in printing; but for this article, machine or cylindrical printing would never have been accomplished, as all the first attempts were made with skins to coat the roller, and all failed, owing to the imperfection of joining the edges; it was this that baffled Nicholson, who died before its introduction; and it was the introduction of this article that enabled König to avail himself of Nicholson’s invention and to reduce it to practice, after he had failed in his project of applying steam to the working of presses.

The composition was first introduced in printing by Mr. B. Foster, who spread it in a melted state on canvass, and then formed it into balls in the usual manner. I have been informed that Mr. Foster obtained his knowledge of its properties from a cotton manufactory, where it was used in some part of the machinery; but Mr. T. C. Hansard says that it was in the Staffordshire potteries, in which they use what are there called dabbers, that Mr. Foster first observed it.

Composition.--Mr. Hansard, a printer of extensive practice, in his Typographia, says, “The composition consists principally of glue and molasses, or treacle. I have seen various receipts of ingredients and proportions, some possessing the recommendations which distinguish the recipes of ancient physicians; namely, a vast variety of articles with counteracting properties. But the simple prescription which my experience has proved best, is, to provide glue of the finest quality, made from the cuttings of parchment or vellum; fine green molasses, pure from the sugar refiner, at least not adulterated for the bakers’ or grocers’ shops; and a small quantity of the substance called Paris-white [carbonate of barytes], and you will have every ingredient requisite for the compo. The proportions have been so variously stated, and so different from what I have found to be eligible, that I am wholly at a loss to account for such differences.

Pounds of Glue. Molasses. One receipt which now lies before me in print, says 2 1 Another, MS. 2 3 I find a mixture of 2 6 or 2 7

and about half a pound of the Paris-white, will make the compo of a superior quality to any other proportions, and will be sufficient for two demy rollers. The great disparity which appears in these receipts may perhaps be attributed to a difference in the quality of the materials, and to the mode of management.” Thus far Mr. Hansard on the component parts of the composition.

The late Mr. Robert Branston, an eminent engraver on wood, and who was also very skilful in printing his productions in a superior manner, told me that he made his balls of glue, treacle, and a little shoemakers wax, and that they answered as well as Foster’s. The Cave of Despair, in my Practical Hints on Decorative Printing, will serve as a specimen of his abilities in both these departments.

An ingenious printer in the country, and a good workman, sent me the following receipt, from which he used to make balls for his own use:--Take a pound and a half of glue, let it soak in cold water twelve hours, boil it without any additional water; when it is hot add half a pound of treacle, half an ounce of turpentine, and a quarter of a pound of tar; this quantity is sufficient for a pair of balls. Prepare your canvass or coarse cloth of the size the balls are wanted, by rubbing on it bees wax, (or common paste will answer the purpose after it has been allowed to dry,) to prevent the composition running through the pores; when the mixture is nearly cold, pour it on the canvass, held in a concave manner, in order that it may be the thickest in the middle, and thinner at the edges; then knock up the balls in the usual way.

Another receipt, from which a large establishment in London made their balls and rollers, and the latter both for their machines and presses, is equal parts of glue and treacle; but as the composition is affected by the state of the atmosphere, it is found by experience that in cold weather a greater proportion of treacle is required, and in warm weather a greater proportion of glue.

This establishment was of opinion that the glue known by the name of London Glue is the strongest and best.

These different receipts, each of which was held in high estimation by the party who made use of it on account of its individual superiority over others, tend to show that different proportions of the same materials with different ingredients incorporated with the mixture, produce a composition that possesses all the requisite qualities.

Casting Rollers.--Mr. Hansard gives the following directions:--“The cylinder upon which the compo is cast is made of alder-wood, turned to a requisite diameter, so that the coat of compo which it receives is half an inch. The cylinder is perforated through its centre, having a brass bush or collar driven into each end, through which is passed an iron rod, as an axis, with an enlarged head at one end, and tapped with a screw at the other.

“It is necessary to procure a mould very accurately made and well finished. Mine is made of brass, in two parts, adjusted to each other with rebates, the inside being finely turned and polished, and having flanches projecting by which the parts are screwed together by the screw and lock-burr. To each end is also fitted a collar; and a circular plate of iron is accommodated with great precision to the bore of the mould, having a projection in its centre to enter a cylinder of wood about which the compo is to attach itself, and to hold it exactly in the centre of the mould, and the other end of which is kept in a corresponding position by means of a brass piece to allow of the compo passing down between the interior surface of the mould and the wooden cylinder. There are little projections on the sides of the mould, which serve as feet to support each half in a steady position while lying upon a table or elsewhere. Previous to joining, the parts of the mould must be nicely cleaned and oiled, and the greatest care taken that no particle of compo, grit, or dirt, remain in the rebate. The parts being carefully placed on each other, and the wooden cylinder fixed inside, the screws must be put into their respective places in the flanches, and when all is properly made tight the mould is to be set upright for receiving the compo.

“The next material part of the apparatus is the melting kettle. This must be a double vessel like a glue-kettle, so that the compo in the interior may be melted by the heat of the boiling water in the exterior. For this purpose a strong boiler may be the best or readiest thing found, into which let a tin vessel be fitted, with a flanch to rest on the rim, so as to leave one or two inches clear under it. This vessel may be six or eight inches above the top of the boiler, so that the lid of the one may fit the other; and it must have a handle on each side; also a large lip for pouring out the compo.

“Being thus prepared, put the glue into a little water for a few hours to soak. Pour off all the liquid, and put the glue into the inner vessel, the boiler having in it as much water as it will contain when the inner vessel is in its place. Put it on the fire, and boil the water as quick as you please, the heat of which will soon cause the glue to dissolve, and evaporate part of the water. When the glue is all melted, add the molasses, and let them be well incorporated together for at least an hour, receiving heat from the boiling water, which is an uniform degree that cannot exceed 212° of Fahrenheit. Then with a very fine sieve, mix the white powder, frequently stirring the compo. In another hour, or less, it will be fit to pour off; and when it is, take the inner vessel out of the boiler, and pour the mixture gently into the mould through the opened brass keeper. In about an hour, if the weather be dry and favourable you may take the roller out of the mould; hang it in a cool, dry, situation, or lay it horizontally in a rack made for the purpose, and the next day it will be sufficiently hardened for use. As there will be rather more of the compo at each end of the cylinder than would work clear of the frame in which it is to revolve, cut off from each extremity about half an inch, by encircling it with a piece of fine twine.”

There is a serious practical disadvantage in the mould being formed of two pieces; that of having a seam or ridge running the whole length on both sides of the roller. This seam prevents that accurate distribution of the ink which is essentially necessary, and increases the probability and danger of producing monks in the impression, which ought to be avoided as much as possible, as destructive to good printing.

I have at different times heard complaints of the difficulty of drawing the roller out of the mould, and of the injury it frequently receives from the surface being damaged, which spoils it, and makes it necessary to be recast. This accident occasions disappointment and loss of time; as cleaning the mould from the composition which adheres to it when this happens is tedious. I attribute this to the mould being made too thin, which expands when the hot mixture is poured into it, and contracts as the mixture cools, thus becoming, by the contraction, too small for the roller, and binding it so tight as to prevent its being drawn out with facility, and without great risk of injury.

I know one house in the Metropolis that makes rollers in the most perfect manner, and experiences little or no trouble in drawing them from the mould; and I know a person who had a mould made, with the same result. These moulds were made out of a solid cylinder of metal (tin, or type metal is equally good for the purpose, and more durable), the aperture bored to the size of the required roller, and carefully polished on the inside, the tube being thick, in some instances two inches, so that it was not much affected by the heat of the composition, the expansion being very trifling, and of course the contraction small in proportion; so that the roller when cold was not compressed by the mould, or so slightly as not to cause any inconvenience or damage to it in drawing out. The inside of the mould should be carefully wiped out before using, so as to be perfectly free from dust or dirt, and slightly oiled, which causes the roller to quit it more readily.

Preservation.--Mr. Hansard says, “To keep the rollers in good condition for working, a place should be chosen where the air has free circulation, without being subject to the extreme heat of the sun in Summer, or the freezing damp air in winter; in short, in as even a temperature as possible. It will be necessary to keep a stock of more rollers than are at work; as it is frequently found, when a roller is sick, or greasy, or soft, or you do not know what is its ailment, that washing it clean, and hanging it to rest for a time, restores it to as good a state as ever.

“One other circumstance must be noticed, namely, the influence of the variable temperatures of different situations on this composition. This I have had particular opportunities of knowing, from having carried on business in two distant offices. It frequently happened that when the compo was working kindly at one office, nothing could be more teazing than its progress at the other. Indeed, while I was supplied by those who make for the trade, one of my houses frequently gave them a great deal of trouble. I have heard both Foster and Harrild say, ‘that they were obliged to make a harder compo on purpose for my house and one or two others similarly situated, than the customary temper of the mixture:’ and, frequently, the only alternative was, to find me a roller that had got hard and useless at some other house, to suit the low temperature of mine. The difference was this--one of my houses had the press-room on the ground-floor, the joists and flooring lying on the earth; the sink room adjoining; wet sheets hanging very low; very little influence from the sun, and no thorough ventilation; consequently, from the humidity of the atmosphere engendered by these circumstances, it was a constant complaint that the compo was too soft. At my other house the press-room was on the two-pair floor; the poles very high; the sun’s rays had free admittance, and the ventilation was very complete. Here the compo, complained of as too soft at the former house, was all that could be wished: hence it became the roller-nursery; and by sending them to hang up a day or two, when out of order at the other place, they became firm and fit for work.”

From this statement it appears that any fixed proportions of the materials for the composition cannot answer generally, and that they must vary according to circumstances. And it may cause us to cease wondering at the number of recipes, and of the different proportions of the various articles, and at being told that they all answered very well; for it is evidently owing to the situation, whether moist or dry, of the press-room of a printing office, that different proportions of ingredients are requisite to make a roller work well, under different circumstances.

The usual method of keeping rollers in working condition is to cover them at night, and when they are not likely to be wanted for some time, with a coating of common or refuse ink; this does not dry, and prevents evaporation, and thus keeps them in working condition: the ink must be scraped off when they are required for use. A roller will get foul in the course of working, or become too hard, it should then be washed well with lye and the lye brush, which will remove the foulness, and it may be further washed with clean water and the hand to remove the lye, and to give it a clean surface; it would then be necessary to distribute it well on a clean table. It would be now advisable to proceed with the presswork with a fresh roller, and allow the one that was washed to have a rest, which generally improves its working condition. If a roller become too hard, and the surface is clean, then washing it with clean water and the hand, distributing it on a clean table, and placing it in a damp situation, will restore it; in fact, when the press-room is dry and well ventilated, keeping the rollers in a damp situation when not in use is preferable, in my opinion, to softening them with water, as the moisture is gradually imbibed by the composition, and makes it more uniformly soft and kind.

When rollers get too soft, the general practice is to hang them up in a current of cool dry air, which evaporates the superabundant moisture, cools the composition if the room has been too warm, and brings them to a good working state. But a more expeditious and effective method, is to sponge them with spirit of turpentine, which restores them to a proper condition sooner than any other method, and also cleans them more effectually than lye. If the same rollers are required to be used when it is necessary to change the colour of the ink, there is not any article that will clean them so expeditiously, and take the ink which had been used out of them so completely, as spirit of turpentine.

Occasionally the pressman finds that he cannot produce good and clear impressions with all the care and attention that he can bestow upon his work, and this when his roller seems to be in good condition, and no apparent cause can be assigned for the deficiency of quality; the roller is then said to be sick, or tired; and the only remedy that has yet answered to remove this inconvenience is to give the roller rest; that is, to hang it up, and take another roller for the work in hand; after resting for some time, it will be found that the sick or tired roller has resumed its original qualities, and will again produce good work.

Rollers, when not in use, should always be hung up in a shady place, which is generally done by one end of the frame, for if left on the inking table they would stick to it, and the composition would be torn in the act of separation; neither should they be exposed to the action of the rays of the sun in summer, which will soften the composition so much as to cause it to run, and thus spoil the roller. These observations apply equally to composition balls.

The following is an abstract of the French method of making and treating rollers.

The French roller-makers proportions are eight pounds of glue and twelve pounds of treacle, which is sufficient for four rollers used at press; the quantity required for those used at machines will vary according to their length and diameter.

Paris made glue is the best: it ought to be transparent, have little colour, and break like glass. Flexibility in glue is a proof of its weakness; and it is injured by being left in a damp place.

The treacle ought to be pure; the most compact is the best. To avoid being deceived, it is best to buy the refined. The old is weak, and not of a good quality for rollers.

In preparing to make four rollers, two pounds of good glue must be soaked in river water; the strength of the glue must determine how long; but if too long the glue loses its strength, and the rollers are injured.

This portion of the glue, thus soaked, is then put into the melting kettle, and placed over a fire, and stirred with a spatula; and when it is quite melted, the rest of the glue is added in similar portions, till the whole eight pounds are melted, which ought to have an hour’s boiling before adding the twelve pounds of treacle. The treacle is then gently poured into the melted glue, stirring them until they are well incorporated. This done, they are left over a moderate fire for an hour, stirring them with a spatula every ten minutes. The surface must be skimmed, and afterwards the vessel must be left a little time to slightly cool, before being poured into the mould.

The cylindrical tube in which the rollers are cast should be smeared in the inside with a brush with oil; neatsfoot oil is the best; and it is necessary that every part should be carefully oiled, and that the wooden cylinder should be well cleaned and free from moisture.

These observations can only apply generally to the making of rollers; it is practice which can alone furnish the particulars. The temperature varying in each season must be the object of special attention, as it renders the materials more or less flexible, and requires the composition to be more or less boiled.

It is a fault with rollers when they lug too much, as it detaches the composition from the wooden cylinder. When they are moist they should not be too much washed, as that also tends to make them lug, and detaches the composition. If they are used too soon after making, they distribute the ink badly, fill up the letters, and last but a very little time. They ought to be exposed to a current of air to dry them, and to be carefully scraped before being used, and again afterwards. If they are too dry they must be sponged all over and distributed upon the table until the water has disappeared, and then on a clean table, before taking ink. When they begin to grow old and hard by work, they must be washed in proper lye without being rinsed in water, and care and attention given to their wiping; and by these means they may be preserved for a considerable time. Rollers, when not in use, should be suspended in a place neither too dry nor too damp.

Recasting.--Before recasting old rollers, take great care to wash them well with lye, in order to detach the ink with which they are coated: if they are dry they must be scraped with a knife, as grease deteriorates the matter. Afterwards cut the composition all over with a knife, and it will then be easily detached from the wood. If it is new it will not need cutting, it will easily dissolve; if old it must be cut into little pieces, that it may dissolve more easily, and with less loss: if the composition is very strong, the little pieces must be washed in a pail of water, warm water is better than cold; add to it two pounds of treacle, for four rollers, and so in proportion: when the matter draws out well in threads, the composition is good.

If the rollers have been recast many times, and they draw too much, they may be recast without adding fresh treacle or glue. Rollers which are recast are better than new; they are more elastic and less melting. With three pounds of glue, five pounds of treacle, and the matter of three old rollers, four rollers can be made; if a small glass of spirits of wine be added it will facilitate the dissolving.

The rollers fail the most frequently at the ends. They ought to be dry, and clear from grease. It is a good plan before using them to scrape them clean, and to sponge the ends for about an inch and a half with spirits of wine, and to leave them to dry; the gelatine draws better.

ROSE ENGINE.

The rose engine is, I believe, a French invention, and has long been used for turning ornaments on metal, for instance, watch cases and other articles of plate; it was afterwards applied to produce them to print from by the rolling press: during the sitting of the commission for inquiring into the best means for preventing the forgery of bank notes, about twenty years ago, Mr. Perkins introduced a specimen bank note which was partly executed by this machine; and the late Mr. Branston, then of the firm of Whiting and Branston, was, if I am not mistaken, the first to engrave by its means for letterpress printing, and the tickets and shares for the last state lottery were executed by it at Beaufort House. Its great value for the prevention of forgery is, that all circles, curved and angular lines produced by this machine are precisely similar to each other and true, however numerous, and however small or large; it would be next to impossible to produce the same designs, with the same accuracy, by the hand, and the operation would also be uncommonly tedious.

By the kindness of Mr. Holtzapffel I am enabled to introduce into this work a number of different patterns; only one specimen of each individual apparatus is given. The patterns which are capable of being produced are almost endless, and depend on the skill and taste of the operator; the variations in the designs being caused by different chucks being used in the operation; and the combinations of the effect produced by each chuck, either in straight lines, circles, ellipses, or as a ground covering the whole surface, in many instances are very delicate and have a beautiful effect. The following enumeration shows how the annexed specimens were produced.

Figs. 1. 10. Holtzapffel and Co.’s compound oval and eccentric chuck:--1. Two eccentric movements; 10. One oval and one eccentric movement. 2. 6. 8. Ibbetson’s geometric chuck, parts first, second and third. 3. Rose engine. 4. Straight line chuck. 5. Segment engine. 7. Oval chuck. 9. Eccentric chuck. 11. Eccentric chuck with the rose engine. 12. 15. Holtzapffel and Co.’s compound oval and eccentric chuck with the rose engine:--12. One oval and one eccentric movement; 15. Two eccentric movements. 13. Oval chuck with the rose engine. 14. Ibbetson’s compound eccentric chuck. 16. Geometric chuck combined with the rose engine. 17. Straight line chuck combined with the rose engine.

For details and descriptions of the various chucks, with the methods of operating with them, the reader is referred to Manuel de Tourneur, published by Bergeron in 1792, and to “Specimens in Eccentric Turning, with Practical Instructions. By John Holt Ibbetson, Esq.” Third Edition, 8vo. London. [1840.]

Mr. Ibbetson observes, “The number of beautiful designs which may be obtained by combining, on this principle, two circular adjusting movements is inconceivable. Consecutive circles, &c. may be arranged, not only in elliptical curves, but in the shape of hearts--in straight lines--in triangles--in squares--in polygons, and in both inward and outward looped figures.”

ROUNCE.

The handle by means of which the carriage of the press is run in and out.

RUB OUT INK.

Rubbing the ink out smooth and even on the ink-block with the brayer, for the purpose of taking small quantities with the balls tolerably diffused over their face.--M. The thinner and more equally it is rubbed out on the ink-block the better, as it in a great measure prevents monks and friars in working. In fine works, where strong ink is used, the pressman who beats should occupy his spare time in using the brayer, as it not only diffuses the ink more equably on the block, but causes it to work better.

RUBY.

The name of a type, the next in size larger than Pearl and smaller than Nonpareil; it is half a Small Pica. Mr. Hansard, in his “Typographia,” gives the following account of its origin and name:--“It was, in fact, originally a Nonpareil with short ascenders and descenders, cast on a smaller body, or sometimes a Pearl, on a larger, to look open; but now some founders have a distinct specimen for this size. This name has but very lately been adopted in the type-founders’ specimens, but some years ago it was found, by the writer of this, absolutely necessary to give some distinguishing appellation to this size, as the letter-founders had given him one-nick Pearls of two bodies, viz. one fount half Small Pica, another half Long Primer; the mistakes arising from this circumstance in a house much in the habit of using small type occasioned the expedient of inventing a new name, and as the neighbouring sizes were called Pearl and Diamond, it seemed not very inapplicable to take the name of Ruby.”

RUCK.

In printing at machines, the paper, particularly if it be soft and not flat, in travelling round the cylinders frequently wrinkles; this is termed Rucking, or the Paper Rucks, or the Paper is Rucked; when this takes place, the sheets may be looked on as spoiled when it is for book work: the best preventative is to press the wet paper well in a powerful press for an hour or two, with small quantities between the boards, just before it goes to the machine. I would not recommend more than five quires in each portion, although I am aware that a ream is generally put in; but the smaller the quantity between each two boards the flatter the paper will be, and less likely to ruck.

RULES AND REGULATIONS

proper to be observed in a Printing Office.

Compositors.

1. Compositors to receive their cases from the Overseer, or other person appointed by him, free from all pie, or other heterogeneous matter, with clean quadrat and space boxes to both roman and italic, which they are to return to him in the same clean state.

2. When a Compositor receives letter, furniture, &c. from the Overseer, he is to return what he does not use, in a satisfactory state.

3. Compositors to impose their matter when desired by the Employer or Overseer; and the same for proofs that are desired to be corrected; unless in either case it shall appear that all the stones are engaged.

4. When the Compositor imposes from a form, he is directly to tie up the pages of loose matter.

5. Forms, immediately after they are imposed, to be carried to the proof press; and the proofs, when pulled, to be given to the Reader, or carried into the reading closet, with, if a first proof, the copy, and, if a second, the foul proof.

6. No Compositor shall leave a foul stone, of letter, furniture, &c.

7. No Compositor to detain an imposing stone longer than the nature of the business may require.

8. When any cases are taken out of the racks, the Compositor is to return them into their proper place immediately after he has done with the same.

9. No cases to be placed over others, or under the frames.

10. Galleys with head lines, or other useful materials used during the course of a piece of work, to be cleared at furthest the day after the work is all completely at press.

11. When a work is finishing, the Compositor or Compositors concerned shall, as the forms are finally worked, clear them away; taking from them the head lines, white lines, and direction lines, as also the leads and reglets, which, with the furniture of each sheet, the matter being properly tied up for papering, are to be given to the Overseer, or any person he may appoint.

12. Sweepings of frames to be cleared away before one o’clock every day. Matter broken by accident to be cleared away on the same day.

13. No Compositor to mix two separate founts, without an express order from the Overseer.

14. When a Compositor carries his form down for press, he is not to put two forms together without a partition between them.

15. The saw, saw block, bowl, sponge, letter brush, shears, bellows, &c., to be returned to their respective places as soon as done with.

16. No person to take a candlestick, bodkin, snuffers, composing stick, &c., not his own, without permission of the owner.

17. No person to misplace cases in the rack, or take an upper without the lower case, or vice versâ.

18. Pie of any sort, on boards, windows, frames, &c., to be cleared after five minutes notice.

19. No person to take sorts from the frames or cases of another without leave; nor to hoard useful sorts, not immediately wanting them.

20. No person (except the Master or Overseer) to call off the errand boy while he is sweeping his rooms.

21. No candle to be left by any one, except in charge of some proper person; and the boundaries of the office to be considered, in all cases, the open air.

22. Jobs to be cleared away immediately after notice having been given by the Overseer.

23. These regulations, in cases of extreme hurry of business, by leave from the Master or Overseer, may be suspended; but, when that has ceased, to be immediately resumed.

24. No Compositor to throw for money or liquor.

25. Not to throw letters, quadrats, quoins, or furniture at each other.

Pressmen.

1. All proofs to be pulled within five minutes after notice, by the Pressmen who are in proofs.

2. Immediately after pulling a proof, the Pressmen to rub over the forms and chases with a lye brush, and place them against the Compositor’s frame to whom they belong, where they are to leave the proof.

3. Not to work without a figure unless particularly ordered.

4. As soon as a form is wrought off, the pressman to carry it to the lye trough, and there completely rub it over with lye, rinse it, and then carry it to the wrought-off place, or to the end of the Compositor’s frame it belongs to.

5. Not to leave the lye jar uncovered.

These rules may be varied to suit the business of the office in which they may be adopted, or the size of the establishment; in practice it will be found essentially necessary to have established rules and regulations, that the business may be carried on with method and good order.

RULES. See BRASS RULE. METAL RULES.

RUN IN THE CARRIAGE.

Running the form under the platen, by turning the rounce.--M. This corroborates my opinion that the coffin, plank, &c., and not the long ribs, constitute the carriage, and that it was so understood in the seventeenth century. See CARRIAGE.

RUN OUT.

The running of the carriage from under the platen, by turning the rounce.

RUN OUT FROM COPY.--M. See DRIVE OUT. This term is not now used.

RUNIC.

“Authors are much divided, as to the antiquity of the Runic characters; some suppose them to be very ancient, whilst others contend, that they are more modern than the ancient Gothic. Several writers affirm, that they were brought from Asia by the celebrated Woden. Olaus Wormius and Rudbeck contend, that they are older than the Greek. Mr. Wise says, that the Runic letters are found on coins, and on stone monuments, some of which may be near two thousand years old. He also supposes this alphabet to have been exceedingly ancient, and that it was formed from some alphabet of the Greeks, whilst it consisted of sixteen letters only, and before they had left the Eastern way of writing, from the right hand.

“The judicious Celsius was of opinion, that the Runic letters were nothing more than Roman letters, with the curves changed into straight lines, for the ease of engraving on hard substances. The learned and ingenious author of the History of the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire says, that the oldest Runic inscriptions are supposed to be of the third century; and he adds, that the most ancient writer, who mentions the Runic characters, is Venantius Fortunatus, who lived towards the end of the sixth century. Our opinion on the evidence before us, is, that the report of Woden having brought the Runic letters from Asia is entirely fabulous; that the tales of Rudbeck and Olaus Wormius, do not deserve the least attention; that Mr. Wise, though a respectable writer, is mistaken as to the antiquity of the Runic letters; that the opinion of the learned Celsius is nearly true, and that the Runic characters are composed partly of ancient Gothic and Greek letters, and partly of Roman, deformed and corrupted, probably by the Necromancers of the north, who used them in their spells and incantations, to which they were greatly addicted. The forms of several Runic letters, compared with the Greek and Gothic alphabets, sufficiently prove this observation. For instance, the Runic F or Fei, is a rude imitation of the Roman F, with the same vocal powers. The O or Oys, is an inverted digamma, with the power of the Roman U, that is of ou or W. R or Ridhur, is evidently the Roman R, with the same powers. I or Iis, is the Gothic and Roman I. S or Sol, is a resemblance of the ancient Greek Σ, with the same power. T or Tyr is an imitation of the Greek Tau, or Roman T. B or Biarkan is the Greek Beta, or Roman B; and L or Lagur appears to have been taken from the Grecian Lambda. We are of opinion, that the resemblances above pointed out, sufficiently evince, that the Runic characters are derived from the Greek, Gothic, and Roman letters.

“In the year 1001, the Swedes were persuaded by the Pope to lay aside the Runic letters, and to adopt the Roman in their room. In the year 1115, the Runic letters were condemned in Spain, by the council of Toledo. They were abolished in Denmark in the beginning of the fourteenth century, and in Iceland soon after.

“The order of the old Runic alphabet, which consisted of sixteen letters, was as follows: F, U, D, O, R, K, H, N, I, A, S, T, B, L, M, YR. It is not known when the order of the Runic alphabet was confounded, but we do not suppose that it is of greater antiquity upon that account.”--Astle.

Milman has the following remarks on the opinion of Gibbon quoted above by Mr. Astle: “The obscure subject of the Runic characters has exercised the industry and ingenuity of the modern scholars of the north. There are three distinct theories; one, maintained by Schlözer (Nordische Geschichte, p. 481, &c.), considers their sixteen letters to be a corruption of the Roman alphabet, post-Christian in their date, and Schlözer would attribute their introduction into the north to the Alemanni. The second, that of Frederick Schlegel (Vorlesungen über alte und neue Literatur), supposes that these characters were left on the coasts of the Mediterranean and Northern Seas by the Phœnicians, preserved by the priestly castes, and employed for purposes of magic. Their common origin from the Phœnician would account for their similarity to the Roman letters. The last, to which we incline, claims a much higher and more venerable antiquity for the Runic, and supposes them to have been the original characters of the Indo-Teutonic tribes, brought from the East, and preserved among the different races of that stock. See Über Deutsche Runen, von W. C. Grimm, 1821. A Memoir by Dr. Legis. Fundgruben des alten Nordens. Foreign Quarterly Review, vol. ix. p. 438.”--Gibbon, chap. ix. note ^{16}.

The University of Oxford are in possession of the matrices of a Pica Runic, which is the only one in England.

RUNNING TITLE. See HEAD LINE.

RUNS ON SORTS.

When matter runs much on some few sorts of letters, they say it runs on sorts. See SORTS.--M.

RUSSIAN.

In the Russian alphabet there are thirty-four letters.

The English letters, made use of in explaining the sound of the Russian characters, are to be pronounced as follows:

ā as in fate. a as in far. ē as in me. é as in met. e as e mute. ō as in no. o as in not. oo as in mood. u as in pure. g as in game. j as the French j. z as in zephyr. ch as the Scotch pronunciation of ch in loch, och! &c. tch as in fetch. sh as in shame.

The Russian Alphabet.

+-----+---------+------------------------------------------------+ | А а | ah, | ex. ба́ба, an old woman, baba. | | | | | | Б б | bā, | ба́бочка, a butterfly, babotchka. | | | | | | В в | vā, | вода́, water, voda. | | | | | | Г г | gā, | годъ, a year, goad. | | | | | | Д д | dā, | домъ, a house, dōm. | | | | | | Е е | ā, | ведро́, a pail, védrō. | | | | | | Ж ж | jā, | жена́, a woman, jéna. | | | | | | З з | zā, | зо́лото, gold, zolotō. | | | | | | И и | ē, | видъ, a view, vēēdd. | | | | | | І і | ē, | used before a vowel only, ex. мнѣніе, opinion, | | | | mnānēā. | | | | | | К к | ka, | ex. Коро́ль, a king, Korole. | | | | | | Л л | él, | ма́ло, little, malō. | | | | | | М м | ém, | мра́моръ, marble, mramor. | | | | | | Н н | én, | нашъ, our, nash. | | | | | | О о | o, | окно́, a window, oknō. | | | | | | П п | pā, | пе́пелъ, ashes, pépéll. | | | | | | Р р | r, | ра́но, early, ranō. | | | | | | С с | s, | спасе́ніе, salvation, spasānēā. | | | | | | Т т | tā, | тве́рдость, hardness, tvérdoste. | | | | | | У у | oo, | у̀тро, morning, ootrō. | | | | | | Ф ф | éf, | флагъ, a flag, flagg. | | | | | | Х х | kha, | a guttural sound, resembling the Scotch | | | | pronunciation of ch in loch, &c., ex. | | | | хитрость, cunning, chēētroste. | | | | | | Ц ц | tsā, | (a combination of т and с,) ex. Царь, a king, | | | | tsar. | | | | | | Ч ч | tcha, | ex. человѣкъ, a man, tchélovayk. | | | | | | Ш ш | sha, | шерсть, wool, schārste. | | | | | | Щ щ | sh-tcha,| (a combination of ш and ч) ex. ще́дрость, | | | | bounty, sh-tchédroste. | | | | | | ъ | yerr, | used at the end of words terminating in a | | | | consonant, to which it gives a hard sound, | | | | ex. столъ, a table, stoll. | | | | | | ы | uē, | guttural, ex. рыба, a fish, rue͡ba. | | | | | | ь | yāre, | used at the end of words terminating in a | | | | consonant, to which it gives a soft sound, | | | | nearly corresponding to the English e mute, | | | | ex. ра́дость, joy, radoste. | | | | | | Ѣ ѣ | yā, | ex. рѣка́, a river, rāyka. | | | | | | Э э | ē, | эконо́мъ, a land-steward, ékōnom. | | | | | | Ю ю | you, | ю̀ноша, a youth, younosha. | | | | | | Я я | ya, | я̀рость, fury, yaroste. | | | | | | Ө ө | fā, | ариөме́тика, arithmetic, arēfmétēka. | +-----+---------+------------------------------------------------+

Most of the above letters invariably retain their proper sound, the following however are subject to slight variations.

Г, gā. In some instances bears the sound of a strongly aspirated h: герои, a hero, héroy; генералъ, a general, héneral; Господь, Lord, Hospod, and in the terminations of adjectives and pronouns, in the genitive case, may be pronounced either as v or h, его, yāho or yāvo; что новаго? what news, tchtō nōvahō, or nōvavō?

Е, ā. At the commencement of words bears the sound of yā, ex. есть, it is, yaste; едва, scarcely, yādva. When it precedes two consonants, or a consonant followed by the hard sign, ъ, it generally bears the sound of yeo, as in yeoman, the accent falling upon o, ex. медъ, honey, meo͡dd; ленъ, flax, leo͡nn; орелъ, an eagle, oreo͡ll.

ѣ, yā. Is pronounced like yā at the commencement of a word, and like ā in the middle or at the end, ex. ѣхать, to ride, yachat; лѣнорть, idleness, lānoste; на столъ, on the table, na stollāy.

There are eleven vowels in the Russian alphabet, which are divided into hard and soft.

Hard а, о, у, э, ы. Soft я, е, ю, и, ѣ.

In the combination of vowels with consonants, they are subject to the following variations:

The letter ы following г, к, х, ж, ч, ш, or щ changes into u -- я -- г, к, х, ж, ч, ш, щ, or ц -- a -- ю -- г, к, х, ж, ч, ш, щ, or ц -- y -- о -- ж, ч, ш, щ, or ц -- e -- е -- г, к, or х -- o -- и before another vowel -- i

The only diphthongs in the Russian language are those formed by the combination of и with the other vowels: ай, ей, ій, ой, ый, яй. When и occurs without the ̆ it must be pronounced separately from the vowel, which precedes it, ex. воиин, a warrior, vo-een. Whenever two vowels occur together in a word (excepting the above-mentioned diphthongs) each bears its full and separate sound, ex. воображеніе, imagination, vō-ob-ra-jā-nē-ā--A Practical Grammar of the Russian Language, by James Heard. 2 Parts, 12mo. St. Petersburg, 1827.

RUTHVEN’S PRESS.

Ruthven’s patent press differs materially from all others. Instead of the form of types being rolled under the platen, and back again when the impression has been made, the type form remains stationary upon the iron table, the platen is drawn over it, and the impression is obtained by means of a lever working vertically like the handle of a pump, and acting by connecting levers upon both sides of the platen, so as to draw it down with ease and effect. It is a good and powerful press, but the head and platen are heavy and require exertion to push them back off the form, and more particularly as the ribs, if the grooves in which the wheels attached to the head and platen travel may be so called, form an inclined plane, which causes the platen to come forward over the form with but little exertion.

S.

SAMARITAN.

It is the opinion of many of the most eminent Hebrew scholars, that this alphabet is the one made use of by the ancient Hebrews, and with which Moses himself wrote the Pentateuch; and that the Hebrew letters at present in use are those of the Chaldees of Babylon, introduced by Ezra in consequence of the Jews having forgotten their own characters during the Captivity. It agrees with the Hebrew and Syriac, in respect to the number and power of the letters, though it differs as to their forms, as may be seen from the annexed table:

+---------+---------+-----------------+-----------+-----------+ | | | | | Hebrew | | Figure. | Name. | Power. | Number. |Characters.| +---------+---------+-----------------+-----------+-----------+ ‎‎| ࠀ‎ | Alaph | Spiritus lenis. | 1. | א‎ | ‎‎| ࠁ‎ | Beth | B or Bh. | 2. | ב‎ | ‎‎| ࠂ‎ | Gamal | G or Gh. | 3. | ג‎ | ‎‎| ࠃ‎ | Dalath | D or Dh. | 4. | ד‎ | ‎| ࠄ‎ | He | H. | 5. | ה‎ | ‎| ࠅ‎ | Vau | V or U. | 6. | ו‎ | ‎| ࠆ‎ | Zain | Z. | 7. | ז‎ | ‎| ࠇ‎ | Cheth | Hh. | 8. | ח‎ | ‎| ࠈ‎ | Teth | T. | 9. | ט‎ | ‎| ࠉ‎ | Jud | J. | 10. | י‎ | ‎| ࠊ‎ | Caph | C or Ch. | 20. | כ‎ | ‎| ࠋ‎ | Lamad | L. | 30. | ל‎ | ‎| ࠌ‎ | Mim | M. | 40. | מ‎ | ‎| ࠍ‎ | Nun | N. | 50. | נ‎ | ‎| ࠎ‎ | Semchat | S. | 60. | ס‎ | ‎| ࠏ‎ | Ain | Gn. | 70. | ע‎ | ‎| ࠐ‎ | Pe | P or Ph. | 80. | פ‎ | ‎| ࠑ‎ | Tzade | Tz. | 90. | צ‎ | ‎| ࠒ‎ | Kuph | K. | 100. | ק‎ | ‎| ࠓ‎ | Risch | R. | 200. | ר‎ | ‎| ࠔ‎ | Schin | S or Sch. | 300. | שׂ‎ שׁ‎ | ‎| ࠕ‎ | Thau | T or Th. | 400. | ת‎ | +---------+---------+-----------------+-----------+-----------+

It will be readily perceived that this is one of the most simple of the Oriental alphabets, as there are no initials or medials, as is the case with the Arabic and Syriac; there are no letters lengthened for the sake of ornament, as in the Hebrew and Chaldee; and there are no finals.

With respect to pronunciation, ࠀ‎ ࠇ‎ and ࠏ‎ seem to differ very little from each other, if we may judge from their frequent permutation.

In writing the numbers, they follow the Hebrew system of notation, with this exception, that for 15 they use both ࠄࠉ‎ (10 and 5) with the Syrians, and ࠅࠈ‎ (9 and 6) with the Jews.

The Samaritans are altogether destitute of vowel points, and their power is to be collected from the cognate languages.

The quiescents are the same in Samaritan as in Hebrew and Chaldee, namely, four, ࠀ‎, ࠄ‎, ࠅ‎, ࠉ‎. The situations and the points, by which each becomes quiescent, are the same as in Hebrew.

The Samaritans use also certain points and lines in writing, partly for the sake of distinction, and partly of abbreviation. The points are as follow:--

1. A thick point placed near the top of the letter distinguishes one word from another, thus ࠰ࠄࠄࠋࠀ ࠰ࠓࠌࠀࠅ‎ and God said.

2. An imperfect sentence is indicated by two transverse points, in this manner, ࠰࠰ࠌࠉࠌࠋ‎ saying--

3. A period or perfect sentence is marked by two perpendicular points, thus, ࠱ࠄࠌࠅࠄࠕ ࠰ࠉࠐࠀ ࠰ࠋࠏ‎ upon the face of the deep.

4. The beginning of every verse is marked by an asterisk, as, ‎‮-¦-‬ࠅࠀࠌࠓ࠰ࠀࠋࠄ࠰‎ And God said.

5. In long paragraphs a third point is added to the period, thus, ‮¦-‬‎, and in order to point off sections various lines are made use of,as ‮:>-‬‎, ‮¦-—‬‎, in which much is left to fancy.

A line drawn above a letter denotes:--

1. That words with two meanings must not be received in their more general signification, as, ࠓࠓࠓ̅ࠓ‎ bedebher, in pestilence, not ࠓࠓࠓࠓ‎ bedabhar, in a word; ࠌࠔ̅‎ Sem, for a proper name, not an appellative; ࠋࠀ̅‎ El, for the name of God, and not the preposition.

2. Apocope, or elision of a letter, as, ࠕ̅ࠀ‎ for ࠄࠕࠀ‎‎ atta, thou; ࠏ̅ࠔࠉࠅ‎ for ࠄࠏࠔࠉࠅ‎ and he looked back.

3. The mark of a quiescent letter, as, ࠉࠅ̅ࠔ‎ he placed.

4. The substitution of one letter for another, as, ࠕ̅ࠌࠔ‎ for ‎ࠔࠌࠄ‎ his name.

The preceding observations are abridged from the “Synopsis Institutionum Samaritanarum” of George Otho, printed at Frankfort-on-the-Main, 1707.

Samaritan in the British Founderies.

English. Oxford.

Pica. Caslon. Grover, to James, to Fry, to Thorowgood and Besley; cut for Walton’s Polyglot.

Small Pica. Fry, to Thorowgood and Besley.

SANSKRITA. The term Sanskṛita seems to have been given to the language so called by way of pre-eminence, and to distinguish it from the vulgar dialects called Prākṛita. The former is an epithet implying elegance and perfection, and the latter the contrary.

Several of the provinces of India have alphabets distinct from each other, in which they not only write their particular dialects, but even Sanskṛita. Indeed most of the alphabets, properly Indian, agree in the number, order, and power of their letters, with the Dēva-nāgari, the one here used, because it is that in which Sanskṛita is most commonly written, and which is the most elegant and approved.

All languages of the Hindu class are read from left to right.

THE ALPHABET.

अ a, आ ā; इ i, ई ī; उ u, ऊ ū; ऋ ri, ॠ ṛī; ऌ ḷri,

ॡ ḷrī; ए ē, ऐ ai; ओ ō, औ au; ं am, ः ah.

+------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------+ | क ka, | ख kha; | ग ga, | घ gha; | ङ nga. | | | | | | | | च cha, | छ ch’ha; | ज ja, | झ jha; | ञ ṇya. | | | | | | | | ट ṭa, | ठ ṭha; | ड ḍa, | ढ ḍha, | ण ṇa. | | | | | | | | त ta, | थ tha; | द da, | ध dha; | न na. | | | | | | | | प pa, | फ pha; | ब ba, | भ bha; | म ma. | | | | | | | | य ya, | र ra; | ल la, | व va. | | | | | | | | | ष ṣa, | श sha; | स sa, | ह ha. | [#] ksha. | +------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------+

In speaking of the letters individually, it is the practice to use the term कार: kārah (make, form) after each of their names as here exhibited: thus the vowel अ a, is called अकार: a-kārah; and the consonant क ka, ककार: ka-kārah.

OF THE VOWELS.

The simple vowels are reckoned five; for which there are ten characters: अ a, इ i, उ u, ऋ ṛi, ऌ ḷri, to denote the short sounds; and आ ā, ई ī, ऊ ū, ॠ ṛī, ॡ ḷrī their corresponding long sounds, which are directed to be held twice the time of the short.

Most of the vowels, occasionally, assume a very different shape from that exhibited in the alphabet, which the following arrangement may serve to explain.

As Initials.

अ आ इ ई उ ऊ ऋ ॠ ऌ ॡ ए ऐ ओ औ

As Medials and Finals.

ऻ ि ी ु ू ृ ॄ ॖ ॗ े ै ो ौ

Initials, Medials, and Finals, in composition with a Consonant.

अक aka, आका ākā, इकि iki, ईकी īkī, उकु uku, ऊकू ūkū, ऋकृ ṛikṛi, ॠकॄ ṛīkṛī,

ऌकॢ ḷrikḷri, ॡकॣ ḷrīkḷrī, एके ēkē, ऐकै aikai, ओको ōkō, औकौaukau.

In this manner the vowels may be combined with any other consonant.

As the letters have the same powers in composition which are given to them in the alphabet, and do not, as in our language, change their sound with their situation, a few observations on the pronunciation of each character in due order, may enable a person to read with tolerable accuracy and ease.

अ a, the first letter in the alphabet, has that obscure short sound which the French give to e, in the particle le, and which is very common in our language, though there be no distinct character for it; as in the words money, honey, and some others, where it is represented by o; and in but, shut, and the like, where u is the substitute. The letter अ never makes its appearance but as an initial; for when the sound of it is required after a consonant, as a medial or final, it is pronounced with it as in the alphabet; it being an invariable rule, that every open consonant, not followed by another vowel, must be pronounced as if अ a were written after it.

आ ā should have the same sound as is given to the former, held twice the length. It occurs, as a medial, in the word काला kāla, Time, the first syllable of which is pronounced nearly like the English word call. As a medial and final its character is [#].

इ i, and ई ī, are two characters to note the sound which the Italians give to the vowel i. The former is to be pronounced short, like ee in meet (encounter), and the latter long, like the same letters in meet (fit). After a consonant, as a medial and final, as has been already observed, they are changed to ि and ी , which are placed as in the words मणि: manih, A jewel, and देवी dēvī, A goddess.

उ u, and ऊ ū, are to be articulated like oo in the English words foot, and fool. After a consonant they are usually subjoined; as in पुत्र: putrah, A son, and भू: bhūh, The earth; but occasionally, particularly after र r, on the side, thus रु ru, रू rū.

ऋ ṛi, and ॠ ṛī. The first of these sounds short, somewhat like ri in rit; and the second is the same held twice as long. ॠ ṛi short occurs in ऋत ṛita, Right, True. The other is very rarely used, except it be in the oblique cases of some nouns. In our characters a dot under the ṛ may serve to distinguish them from the syllables रि ri and री rī. As medials or finals they are always placed under their consonants, in this form, नृ nṛi, नॄ nṛī.

ऌ ḷri, and ॡ ḷrī. The short power is found in the word कॢप्त kḷripta, which the learned of Bengal soften into kḷipta, and which, probably, is the true pronunciation of it. The long form seldom, if ever, occurs but in grammars. Here too a dot under the ḷ will serve as a distinction, when we would explain them.

ए ē, though classed among diphthongs, differs not from the simple sound of e in where; and so it is pronounced in [###] dēvah, A god. It is said to be a compound of अ a and इ i.

ऐ ai is a diphthong, and is always sounded as the letter i in our alphabet; but it will be better to represent it by ai. There is an example of it in the word रै: raih, Wealth.

ओ ō differs not from our o held long, as in stone; though it is said to be a diphthong composed of अ a and उ u.

औ au is decidedly a diphthong, having the power of ow in the word how; which in these letters would be written thus, हौ hau.

Here properly end the vowels, for ं am, and : ah, are, correctly speaking, rather substitutes for the nasals, and ह ha, when silent, at the end of a syllable. They are called अनुस्वार: anuswārah, and विसर्ग: visargah. The one occurs in the pronouns अहं aham, I, and त्वं twam, Thou, and the other in स: sah, He.

OF THE CONSONANTS.

The first five-and-twenty consonants are distributed into five classes, in the plural number called वर्गा: vargāh; in speaking of which, they are named after the first letter of each class: the first class being called कवर्ग: ka-vargah, the class of क ka; the second चवर्ग: cha-vargah, the class of च cha; and so for the rest. Some grammarians use the first letter of each class combined with उ, to denote all the letters in each class respectively, as, कु ku, for the first; चु chu, for the second; टु ṭu, for the third; तु tu, for the fourth; and पु pu, for the fifth class.

The First Class, or Gutturals, क ख ह घ ङ.

क ka has the precise sound of hard c, but is better expressed by k, the power of which not being liable to change.

ख kha has the same sound uttered with greater force, as if combined with the letter ह ha. Ignorant transcribers are very apt to confound it with the letter श sha.

ग ga is the hard g, as sounded in gun.

घ gha is the same aspirated.

ङ nga is equivalent to ng in king. Generally speaking, every other nasal is resolved into this, before any letter of this class; or, at least, to be pronounced like it. In Dēva-nāgari manuscripts, it is, when silent, for the most part represented by the single dot [ं] अनुस्वार: anuswāra.

च छ ज छ ञ The Second Class, or Palatals, च छ ज छ ञ.

च cha has the exact power we express by ch, as in church.

छ ch’ha is the former aspirated.

ज ja has the power of g soft, as in Giles; but will be more certainly expressed by j, as in James.

छ jha is the aspirate of the former.

ञ ṇa. This is the proper nasal of this class, which in composition is sounded rather softer than ङ nga, It seems to be formed by pressing the whole breadth of the tongue into the hollow of the palate, the tip turned downwards, and forcing the sound through the nose, with the mouth open. It is chiefly used before letters of its own class; but in Dēva-nāgari manuscripts, as is the case with the other nasals, it is generally expressed by [ं] anuswārah. It seldom appears with another consonant immediately before, or a vowel after it: indeed there are but few instances of it, (except in grammatical compositions,) one of which is in the root ज्ञा jnā, signifying know, and its derivatives, where the character ज्ञ is said to be a compound of ज ja and ञ ṅa, the just articulation of which is found so difficult, and the sound so harsh, that it is frequently softened into gyā, as if written ग्या. As the sound of ण before another consonant approaches nearer to that of n than any other letter, it may be represented by it, with a mark over it, thus, ṅ.

The Third Class, or Cerebrals, ट ठ ड ढ ण.

This series of consonants is pronounced by turning and applying the tip of the tongue far back against the palate; which producing a hollow sound, as if proceeding from the head, it is distinguished by the term मूर्द्धन्य mūrddhanya, which Mr. Halhed, in his Grammar of the Bengal Language, has translated cerebral.

ट ṭa has the sound of t, articulated as above directed.

ठ ṭha is the same aspirated.

ड ḍa differs from the common d only in the above particular. In Bengal it is generally pronounced like a very obtuse r.

ढ ḍha is the same aspirated.

ण ṇa is distinguished from the common n by the manner of producing it, as above.

In our letters those of this class may be conveniently expressed by a dot under ṭ, ḍ, ṇ.

The Fourth Class, or Dentals, त थ द ध न.

त ta is the common dental t.

थ tha is the former aspirated.

द da has the power of our d.

ध dha is the aspirate of द da.

न na is the common n. It is sometimes, like the other nasals, represented by anuswāra [ं].

The Fifth Class, or Labials, प फ ब भ म.

प pa corresponds with p.

फ pha is the former aspirated. In writing foreign words with these characters, this letter is used for the sound of f.

ब ba. This letter is very often confounded with व va. Its power is that of b.

भ bha is the aspirate of ब ba.

म ma is m. When silent it is often expressed by [ं] anuswāra; as in संवत् samvat, A year, an æra.

The Semi-Vowels, य र ल व.

य ya. This letter, which is a palatal, like our y (with which it corresponds), is often put in the place of इ i and ई ī. Its proper power is that of y in yarn; but in Bengal they generally pronounce it as we do j, confounding it with ज ja.

र ra is our r. It is esteemed a cerebral. In composition it frequently assumes two other forms. In the middle of a word, immediately preceding another consonant, it is mounted upon its head in this shape [#], when it is optional in the writer to double the letter with which it so coalesces: as in the word कार्य्य kāryya, An affair, which is pronounced kārya. After a consonant it is always subjoined in this shape [#], as in the word प्रकार prakāra, A sort or manner. This letter, in grammars, is generally called रेफ rēpha.

ल la answers to our l. It is ranked among dentals.

व va is generally pronounced like v, and is then a dento-labial; but when subjoined to another consonant, it is often necessarily articulated as our w, it being then frequently the natural substitute for उ u before another vowel; as द्वौ ḍwau, Two.

The Sibilants and Aspirate, ष ष स ह.

ष ṣa. The proper sound of this letter is produced by applying the tip of the tongue to the fore-part of the palate, and passing the voice as in pronouncing our s, from which it may be distinguished by a dot under it, thus, ṣ. It is a palatal.

ष sha is generally pronounced as sh in shoe; but in the western parts of India it is frequently articulated like, and confounded with ख kha. It is a cerebral.

स sa has precisely the power of s in Saint, and is esteemed a dental.

ह ha is h. At the end of a word, when silent, it is represented by [ः] visarga. It is classed among gutturals. This properly is the last letter in the alphabet, [#] ksha, as before observed, being a compound character.

There is another letter, not usually given in the Dēva-nāgar alphabet, in this form, ॡ, which seems to have a power similar to that of the surd, or Welsh ll. It occurs in the Vēdas, and is included in some of the provincial alphabets.

OF COMPOUND CONSONANTS.

The sound of अ a, it has been already mentioned, is given to every open consonant, not followed by another vowel; but as it must often happen that a word ends with a consonant, or that two or more consonants meet together without a vowel between them, it is proper the learner should know what is done in these two cases. If a word terminates in a consonant, the vowel is cut off by a small mark of elision, such as is seen under क ka in the word वाक् vāk, Speech, which written without it, thus, वाक, would be pronounced vāka. If two or more consonants meet together, it is a general rule that they coalesce, and form a compound character. Sometimes it so happens that the simple letters are not to be traced in the compound, instances of which occur in [#] ksha, and क्ष jṅa, which are composed of क and श, and ज and ण; but, in general, the shapes of the letters are so little altered, that they may be easily discriminated. There are several modes of forming these compounds: sometimes it is found convenient to put one letter under the other, and at others to blend them together, thus, द्ध; but the most usual way is to place them in their natural order, yet so that their bodies, as well as heads, may be in contact, omitting the final upright stroke of every letter that has one, except the last. In the word कार्त्स्न्यं kārtsnyam, Wholeness, there is a coalition of no less than five consonants; namely, र, त, स, न, and य; ra, in a new shape, is mounted upon the head, and त ta, स sa, and न na, deprived of their upright strokes, thus, [#] [#] [#], are connected, and finally united to य ya. A little practice will render this subject familiar to the learner.

OF EXTRANEOUS CHARACTERS.

One stroke, thus [#], or two, thus [#], serve to divide hemistichs and distichs.

A sort of sigma, in this shape, [#], is frequently used as an apostrophe, to show that a vowel has been dropped by rule.

A character like a crescent, with a dot between its horns, thus, ँ, is occasionally put over a consonant, which by the rules of orthography has been substituted for a nasal.

In the Vēda other diacritical marks are used, which do not occur in common books. A small perpendicular line over a vowel, thus अ॑, denotes that it is to be pronounced high; a parallel line drawn under a vowel, thus अ॒, denotes that it should be pronounced low; and a curved line over a vowel, thus [#], indicates that it must be pronounced in a manner to partake of both the former. The intention of these three marks seems to be the same as what was originally designed by the acute, the grave, and the circumflex accents. A figure of three is sometimes put after a vowel, thus अ३, or three lines over it, thus [#], to show that it is to be held longer than usual, as in calling, or crying.

Two dots, thus ः, called visarga (विसर्ग:), are used to denote a final [#]. They are occasionally represented in this manner [#].

A single dot over a letter, thus अं, is called anuswārah (अनुस्वार:), and denotes a final nasal.

The numerical figures are,

१ २ ३ ४ ५ ६ ७ ८ ९ ० 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

In the Vēdas, the character for ं anuswāra, before व, स, ह, and र, is in this form, [#]; so for [###] is written [###].

_A Grammar of the Sanskrita Language, by Charles Wilkins, LL.D. F.R.S._ 4_to._ 1808.

Sanskrit in the British Founderies.

English. Caslon; cut for Dr. Wilkins, Oriental Librarian to the East India Company.

SAW. A small thin saw, with a back to strengthen it, to cut furniture with. I would have the blade much narrower than it generally is, so broad only as to cut fairly through the furniture, before the back stops it from cutting deeper by resting on the saw block; it would then prevent the saw block from being cut so much as it generally is in a careless manner, sometimes even through at the front, till the saw comes in contact with the stone, and is spoiled.

SAW BLOCK. A piece of wood on which to cut furniture to certain lengths; it is similar to a carpenter’s mitre block, with the addition of a cut at right angles. The customary place for using it is on the fore edge of the imposing stone.

SAXON, or ANGLO-SAXON. The Anglo-Saxon alphabet contains twenty-three letters; Q not being originally a Saxon letter.

+-------------+-----------------------+ | Form. | Sound. | | [A] A a | a as in b_a_r | | B b | b | | [C] C c | c as in _ch_oice | | D ꝺ | d | | [E] E e | e as in f_e_int | | F ꝼ | f | | [G] G ᵹ | g as in _g_em | | [H] H h | h | | I ı | i | | K k | k | | L l | l | | [M] M m | m | | N n | n | | O o | o | | P p | p | | R ꞃ | r | | [S] S ꞅ | s | | T ꞇ | t | | Ð Þ ð þ | th | | U u | u | | Ƿ ƿ | w | | X x | x | | Y ẏ | y | | Z z | z | +-------------+-----------------------+

For anꝺ the Saxons used these abbreviations, ⁊ and [#]; for þaꞇ and þæꞇ they wrote ꝥ; and for oððe or, and the termination lıce ly, they wrote ł; as ł or; and ꞅoðł for ꞅoðlıce truly.

[Note.] We also find uł for or; Ƿıłłm. for Ƿıllelm, William; and [H]æł, for [H]ælenꝺ, Jesus; ł stands for leoꝼeꞅꞇan, φίλτατοι, amicissimi, most friendly or beloved; apł, ap̃, or ap°, for apoꞅole, an apostle; apłar, apostles; [H]ieꞃłm, Jerusalem,; ꞅcıł, a shilling, money.

When an m was omitted, they made a short stroke over the preceding letter; as þā for þam.

[Note.] There are many other abbreviations and connectives; such as æꝼꞇ̃ æꝼꞇeꞃ, after; allm̃ allmıhꞇıᵹ, almighty; am̃, amen; ancen, ancenneꝺe, only begotten; b, b̵, bıꞅc̃, bıꞅcop, a bishop; bꞃoð, bꞃođ, bꞃoþeꞃn, brethren; caꞃc̃, caꞃceꞃne, a prison; cꝼꞇ, [#], Cꞃıꞅꞇ, xꞃeꞅ, Cꞃıꞅꞇeꞅ, Christ, Christ’s; c̃ƿ, cƿæð, saith; [#] for ꝺæᵹ, a day; ꝺꝺ, ꝺđ, David; ꝺꞃīh, ꝺꞃıhꞇ̃, Lord; ꝺñꞅ ꝺꞃıhꞇneꞅ, Lords; ꝼ̃ ꝼoꞃ, for, on account of; ᵹ̃, ᵹeaꞃe, a year; Iħr, Ihc̃, Jesus; ꞅ. [M]. ꞅeınꞇe [M]aꞃıe, St. Mary; ꞅ. p. St. Peter; ƿũꞇ, ƿuꞇoꝺlıce, certainly, &c. See Thwaites, p. 1.

In studying the Anglo-Saxon tongue, it is of great consequence to remark, that the inevitable changes introduced by the lapse of time through successive ages; the existence of the three great dialects, and their frequent intermixture; the variety of Anglo-Saxon writers, and their little acquaintance with each other; but, above all, their total disregard of any settled rules of orthography; have occasioned many irregularities in the language, and thrown difficulties in the way of the learner, which at first sight appear truly formidable; but, on closer inspection, these difficulties present no insuperable obstacle.

The principal difficulty consists in this: The Anglo-Saxon writers often confounded some letters, and used them indifferently for each other. This is the case to a most surprising extent with the vowels and diphthongs; so that the consonants, though often treated in the same manner, form the only part of the language which possesses any thing like a fixed and permanent character.

Remarks on the Change of the Consonants required for derivation and declension.

B.

B, F, or U, are often interchanged; as

Bebeꞃ, beꝼoꞃ, a beaver. Iꝼıᵹ, ıueᵹ ivy. Obeꞃ, oꝼeꞃ, oueꞃ, over. [E]bolꞅan, eꝼolꞅan to blaspheme. Foꞇ, uoꞇ a foot.

C.

C often interchanges with G, K and Q; as

Ðonceꞅ, þonᵹeꞅ thoughts. [C]ẏð, kẏð kindred. [C]ẏnınᵹ, kẏnınᵹ a king. Aceꞃ, Akeꞃ a field. [C]ƿen, quen, a queen, wife, &c.

C and CC are also often changed into H, or Hh, before ꞅ or ð, and especially before ꞇ; as Sꞇꞃehꞇon they strewed, for ꞅꞇꞃecꞇon, from ꞅꞇꞃeccan. Ahꞅıan for acꞅıan or axıan to ask. ꞅehđ for ꞅecđ seeks, from ꞅecan to seek.

In Dan. Sax. C changes into ᵹ, h, hƿ and k; and ch changes into h.

D.

D and T are often used indiscriminately for each other, and Ð is changed into ꝺ, especially in verbs; as ꞅeođan to boil or seeth; ꞅoꝺen boiled, ıc cƿæđ I said; þu cƿæ đe thou saidst. he ƿẏꞃđ he is or becomes; þu ƿuꞃꝺe thou becomest.

F.

In Dan. Sax. F changes into b and p.

G.

G is often changed into h and ƿ; as [H]eꞃeꞇoha for heꞃeꞇoᵹa a leader; Dahum for ꝺaᵹum with days; Geꞅƿıᵹan to be silent; ᵹeꞅuƿoꝺe he was silent or dumb; ꞅoꞃh for ꞅoꞃᵹe sorrow.

G interchanges with I and Y, when I has a sort of a consonant sound; as ᵹeo, ıeo or ıu yore, formerly; ᵹeoᵹuđ, ıeoᵹuđ youth; ᵹeoc, ıoc or ıuc yoke.

G is often suppressed before n, or ᵹn lengthened into ᵹen; as þẏꞅıᵹne, Þẏꞅıne from þyꞅꞅ or þıꞅ this, and ænıᵹne, aenıne, from aenıᵹ any. G is often added to words that end with ı, as hıᵹ for hı they; and on the contrary G is often omitted in those words which end in ıᵹ; as ꝺꞃı for ꝺꞃıᵹ or ꝺꞃẏᵹ, dry.

In Dan. Sax. G is sometimes dropped, or changed into C, H, or K; and GS into X.

H.

[H] is sometimes changed into ᵹ; as þaᵹ for þah he grew or throve, from þean to grow.

In Dan. Sax. [H] is sometimes added to words, and sometimes dropped; or it is changed into c, ᵹ, ch, or k; and [H]u into ƿ.

K.

The Saxons originally expressed the sound of the modern K by C. As C also stood for a soft sound, it was difficult to know when it was to be sounded hard, and when soft. To remove this difficulty, the Danes and Normans introduced the letter K to denote the hard sound of C.

L.

L and N are often written double or single without any distinction at the end of monosyllables; but this reduplication ceases when words are lengthened, so that a consonant follows; as ƿell or ƿel well; ealle or al all (omnis); ealne, all (omnem); also ıc ꞅẏlle, þu ꞅẏlꞅꞇ, he ꞅylđ, I sell, thou, &c.

In Dan. Sax. L is sometimes put for R.

M and N.

In Dan. Sax. these two letters are sometimes interchangeable; and N is occasionally dropped.

P.

The Saxon p and ƿ are easily mistaken for each other, both in MSS. and on coins; and even in printed books great care is sometimes necessary to distinguish these letters.

In Dan. Sax. P changes occasionally into B and U.

Q.

Q is not an original Saxon letter, and very seldom occurs in MSS.; Cw and Cu were commonly employed where Q is now used.

R.

R in Dan. Sax. is occasionally added to words, and is sometimes changed into L.

S.

S and Z are merely variations of the same original letter. The Z is only the S hard.

In Dan. Sax. Ss, Ð, or X are sometimes substituted for S.

T.

T in Dan. Sax. occasionally changes into D and Ð.

W.

In Dan. Sax. W changes into F and Ui; We into oe, u, ue; Wi, into u, uu; Wa, into uıæ, ƿæ; Wr, into war; and Wu, into u.

X.

X is sometimes supplied by cꞅ; as neoꞃcꞅen for neoꞃxen quiet. In Dan. Sax. X interchanges with S.

Z.

Z is only the S hard. See S.

Remarks on the Vowels and Diphthongs.

If the consonants,--those natural sinews of words and language,--suffer such changes, it may safely be presumed, that those flexible and yielding symbols, the vowels, would be exposed to still greater confusion; a confusion almost sufficient to induce one to imagine that they are of no weight or authority, in Anglo-Saxon orthography.

A.

A kind of Italic a is much used in Anglo-Saxon MSS. Where we now use A or E, the diphthongs Æ, Œ, and Ea continually occur in Anglo-Saxon; but Œ more frequently in Dan. Sax.

The vowel A and its diphthongs thus interchange.

A and O. See under O.

A and Æ: as ac, æc an oak; aceꞃ, æceꞃ a field; habban to have, ıc hæbbe I have; ꞅꞇan a stone; ꞅꞇænen stony; laꞃ doctrine; læꞃan to teach; an one; æniᵹ any one.

Æ and EA: as æ, ea water; æc, eac eternal.

Æ and Œ: as aeᵹhƿeꞃ, ceᵹhƿeꞃ everywhere; aeᵹhƿilc, oeᵹhƿilc every one.

Æ and Y: as ælc, ẏlc each one.

In Dan. Sax. these occur indifferently:--A, æ, e, ea, o, eo; Æ, e, ıe, œ, o, ea, ue.

E.

E interchanges with [Æ]. It is often added to the end of Anglo-Saxon words where it does not naturally belong, and it is as often rejected where it does.

Eo is changed into ẏ and e, and ea into e, but more usually into ẏ.

[E]aðe, eðe easily; and ceaᵹreꞃ, cereeꞃ a castle.

[S]eolꝼ, ꞅelꝼ, ꞅẏlꝼ self; ꞅẏllan, ꞅellan to give, sell, &c.

Neah near; nehꞅꞇ nearest; ealꝺ old; ꞅe ẏlꝺꞃa the elder; ƿealꝺan to rule, he ƿelꞇ or ƿẏlꞇ he rules; leaꞅ loose, lẏꞅan to loose; ᵹeleaꝼa belief, ᵹelẏꝼan to believe.

In Dan. Sax. these occur indifferently:--E, a, eo, ce, O, u, as, ea, ẏ; ea, eo, ı, ẏ; eau, eoƿ; ee, e; eı, œ, ı; eo, a, e, ı, ıƿ, u; eu, ẏƿ.

I.

I is interchanged with e and y; as

Iᵹlanb, eᵹlanb, ẏᵹlanb an island; eꝼel, ẏᵹel evil; ıꞃþımᵹ, eaꞃþımᵹ, ẏꞃþlınᵹ a farmer; ꞃen rain, ꞃınan to rain; beꞃnan to burn, bẏꞃnan to set on fire; cƿeþan to say, þu cƿyꞅꞇ, cƿıꞅꞇ, thou sayest.

In Dan. Sax. these occur indifferently: I, ıa, ıo, eo, ẏ; ıœ, ıe, œ; ıuh, eoƿ.

O.

O is changed into u, e and ẏ, and eo into ẏ; but sometimes into a, especially before n in a short or terminating syllable.

Oꝺe and oꝺ, into aꝺe and aꝺ; ꝺom ᵹudgment, ꝺeman to judge; ꝼꞃoꝼeꞃ comfort, ꝼꞃeꝼꞃtan to comfort; ꝼoc a foot, ꝼec feet; boc a book, bee books; ꞅcoꞃm a storm, ꞅcẏꞃman to storm; ᵹolꝺ gold, ᵹẏlꝺen golden; ƿoꞃb a word, anꝺƿyꞃꝺan to answer; ƿeoꞃc a work, ƿẏꞃcean to work; heoꞃb or hẏꞃꝺe a herd; ıoc, ıuc me a yoke; leƿan, ᵹoƿan to show; man and mon a man; lanᵹ and lonᵹ long; ꞅanꝺ and ꞅonꝺ sand.

In Dan. Sax. these occur:--O, a, e, I, u; œ, æ, e, o, ue, ƿe; oea, eo; oƿe, uu.

U.

U is sometimes converted into ẏ: as ꞅcꞃuꝺ clothing, ꞅcꞃyꝺan to clothe; cuþ known, cẏþan to make known.

In Dan. Sax. these are used indiscriminately:--U, ꝺ, ꝼ, o, oƿ, ƿe, ƿı, ƿu; ue, æ, œ, ƿe; uı, ƿ; uu, oƿe.

Y.

The Anglo-Saxon Y is the Greek Υ (upsilon), or, as the French call it, y Greque. The ẏ was not dotted in the oldest MSS.

Y is sometimes changed into u.

In Dan. Sax. these occur:--Y into e, ea, ı; and Yƿ into eu.

Further Remarks on the Letters.

The preceding observations on the consonants and vowels will render the following peculiarities less surprising, and may perhaps explain their causes.

The final letters of words are often omitted: as ƿomb, ƿom; ƿæᵹ or ƿeᵹ, ƿe.

A vowel near, or at the end of a word, is often absorbed by the preceding or succeeding consonant, especially if that consonant be a semi-vowel; but either that or the nearest vowel is still understood: as Luꝼꞅꞇ for luꝼaꞅꞇ lovest; luꝼð for luꝼað loveth; and other verbs in the 2d and 3d persons. Geƿꞃıxl for ᵹeƿꞃıxle changes; ꞅuꞅl ꞅuꞅel sulphur; ꞅƿæꝼl for ꞅƿæꝼel sulphur; bloꞅm for bloꞅma a blossom; boꞅm for boꞅum bosom; boꞇl for boꞇle a village, house, &c.; bꞃıꝺl for bꞃıꝺel a bridle.

Contractions of words are common: as N’ẏꞅꞇe for ne ƿıꞅꞇ knew not; n’æꝼꝺe for ne hæꝼeꝺ had not; ẏꞃn’ð for ẏꞃneð runneth.

In Dan. Sax., on the other hand, monosyllables are sometimes changed into longer words: as ƿꞃað anger, wrath, lengthened into ƿaꞃað. Other words contract two syllables into one; as cẏnınᵹ into kẏnᵹ a king.

The different letters suffer a very frequent change of position: as ꞇınꞇeꞃᵹe, ꞇınꞇꞃeᵹe pain; þıꞃꝺa, þꞃıꝺꝺa third.

A very great variety exists in writing the same word by different Anglo-Saxon authors, as will appear from the following examples: ᵹeoᵹeþe, ᵹeoᵹoð, ᵹeoᵹuð, ᵹeᵹoþe, ıoᵹoð, ıuᵹuð youth; mæneᵹeo many, a multitude, is written mæneᵹo, mænıᵹeo, mænıᵹo, mænıᵹu, mænıo, mænıu, mænẏᵹeo, maneᵹeo, maneᵹu, manıᵹe, manıᵹo, manıᵹu, meneᵹeo, meneᵹo, meneᵹu, menıᵹeo, menıᵹo, menıᵹu, menıo, menıu.

Adjectives in the comparative degree end indifferently in aꞃ, æꞃ, eꞃ, ıꞃ, oꞃ, uꞃ, or ẏꞃ; and the superlative in aꞅꞇ, æꞅꞇ, eꞅꞇ, ıꞅꞇ, oꞅꞇ, uꞅꞇ, or ẏꞅꞇ.

Active participles end in anꝺ, anꝺe, ænꝺ, ænꝺe, enꝺ, ınꝺ, onꝺ, unꝺ or ẏnꝺ; and passive participles in aꝺ, æꝺ, eꝺ, ıꝺ, oꝺ, uꝺ, or ẏꝺ.

So also, [H]e ꝺıelꝼ, ꝺealꝼ, ꝺelꝼ or ꝺalꝼ he dug; and læꞅƿenꝺe, læꞅƿıᵹenꝺe, læꞅᵹenꝺe or læꞅıenꝺe feeding; ıc ƿuꞃpe, ıc ƿeoꞃpe, ıc ƿẏꞃpe, or ıc ƿeꞃpe I cast away; man, mon a man; he mæᵹe or muᵹe he may; he ꞅıᵹ, ꞅı, ꞅıe, ꞅe, ꞅıo, or ꞅeo he is; ꞅınꝺon, ꞅenꝺon, ꞅıenꝺon, ꞅınꞇ, ꞅıenꞇ, ꞅınꝺ, ꞅın, ꞅıen, ꞅeon, are.

Some short words assume very different meanings: as bıᵹ, bıᵹe, bẏᵹe, beᵹ, beaᵹ, beah and beh, which, according to their connexion, signify indifferently, a turning, a crown, a gem, a bosom, buy, he turned, he submitted, &c. from buᵹan, to turn, bow, &c.--The Elements of Anglo-Saxon Grammar. By the Rev. J. Bosworth, M.A. F.A.S., 8_vo_. 1823.

“The Saxon capitals which vary from those now used are C, E, G, H, M, and W. The small letters are d, f, g, r, s, t, and w, which are all Roman, except the Ƿ, ƿ, and some notes of abbreviations used by the Saxons, as Ð ð, þ th, ꝥ that, &c. Many other abbreviations were used by the Saxons. These notes of abbreviation are not the original members of an alphabet; they were the result of later reflection, and were introduced for dispatch.

“By an attentive observation of the different specimens of writing in England, we perceive the several gradations of change, by which one form of a Roman character has imperceptibly changed into another. The Saxon ƿ, says Mr. Whitaker, seems to have been only the Roman V at first, and to have been lengthened into the Saxon character, and enlarged into the present Roman W, by bringing the principal stroke somewhat lower, and closing the top in the one, and by redoubling the whole in the other. The W is unknown, both to the Latin and its daughter languages, the French, the Spanish, and the Italian: it is composed of two characters, namely of the V or U doubled.

“The writing which prevailed in England from the coming of St. Augustin, in 596, to the middle of the eleventh century, is generally termed SAXON, and may be divided into five kinds, namely, the ROMAN SAXON, the SET SAXON, the RUNNING HAND SAXON, the MIXED SAXON, and the ELEGANT SAXON.”--Astle.

Elegant Saxon.--This writing was adopted in England in the tenth century, and was continued till the Norman conquest; but was not entirely disused till the middle of the thirteenth century.

All subsequent Saxon writers endeavour to keep as near as possible to the form of the letters in a book of Saxon Homilies in the Lambeth Library (No. 439), written in the tenth century. There is a beautiful specimen in the MSS. of the Rev. E. Thwaites, M. A. to be found in the Harleian MSS., at the British Museum (No. 1866). It is described in Nichols’s Lit. Anec., vol. iv. p. 140, as “one of the most lovely specimens of modern Saxon writing that can be imagined.”--Bosworth, p. 20.

About the year 1567, John Daye, who was patronized by Archbishop Parker, cut the first Saxon types which were used in England. In this year Asserius Menevensis was published by the direction of the archbishop in these characters; and in the same year Archbishop Ælfric’s Paschal Homily; and, in 1571, the Saxon Gospels. Daye’s Saxon types far excel in neatness and beauty any which have been since made, not excepting the neat types cast for F. Junius at Dort, which were given by him to the University of Oxford. Astle, p. 224.--Bosworth.

Spotted a typo or a problem in this chapter? Tell us